4 Volume-5

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 332

MADHYA PRADESH POWER TRANSMISSION CO. LTD.

SHAKTI BHAWAN RAMPUR: JABALPUR

VOLUME –V
Part-1

Technical Book Serial No.


MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR SUPPLY


OF MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION OF
220KV AND 132KV TRANSMISSION
LINES.

O/o CHIEF ENGINEER (PROCUREMENT)


MPPTCL, JABALPUR.
TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART I – Specifications & requirements for supply of


Transmission Line Materials

Section- 1 Common Technical Requirement ………………………. 1

Section- 2 Technical Specifications for Towers ………………….. 14

Section- 3 Technical Specifications for Conductor ………………. 32

Section- 4 Technical Specifications for Earth wire …..………….. 44

Section- 5 Technical Specifications for Disc Insulators …………… 51

Section- 6 Technical Specifications for Hardware fittings for


Conductor & Earth wire………………..................... 87
Section- 7 Technical Specifications for Accessories for Conductor
& Earth wire ……………………………………………. 105
Section- 8 Technical Specification for Optical Ground Wire (OPGW),
Associated Hardware & AccessoriesTechnical
Specifications for erection of transmission ……. 121

Section- 9 Technical Specifications for erection of transmission


lines ………………………………………………… 156

Annexure – 1 Technical Particulars of ACSR Conductors & Earth 177


wire
Annexure – 2 Technical Particulars of Disc Insulators 181

Annexure – 3 Technical Particulars of Hardware for conductor 183


& Earth wire
Annexure – 4 Technical Particulars of Accessories for conductor 187
& Earth wire
Annexure – 5 List of Drawings 190
Volume-V

SECTION-1
COMMON TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT
1.01 SCOPE:

1.01.01 The provisions under this section are to supplement


common requirements for supply of Transmission Line Materials
and Installation work. Section-2 to Section-9 contains technical
specification for all the Materials to be used for Construction of
Transmission Lines. The bidders shall furnish catalogues,
engineering data / technical information, drawing etc. in
conformity with the technical specification.

1.01.02 The scope of work involves fabrication, galvanizing and


delivery of 220kV & 132kV Double Circuit/ Multi circuit towers, their
body extensions, river/ line crossing structures (Gantries), Hangers, U
bolts, D Shackles, Bolts and Nuts, Spring washers, pack washers, step
bolts, tower accessories (earthing rod with clamps, Danger Boards,
Number plates, Phase plates and Anti-climbing Devices (including fixing
arrangements and barbed wire), ACSR Conductor, Earth wire, OPGW,
Disc insulators, hardware and accessories for conductor and Earth
wire/OPGW and complete erection of transmission lines including,
detailed survey/check survey, casting of foundations, tower erection,
stringing etc. and testing & commissioning of the transmission lines.
Cement and reinforcement steel for foundation of towers, extensions,
river/ line crossing structures and any such materials required for
erection work shall also be provided by the successful Bidder. The
Bidder is also required to provide required number of stub
setting templates for each installation work at his own cost.

1.01.03 This section also provides for the Design, manufacturing,


stage testing, inspection and testing before despatch, packing and
delivery of materials for use on 220kV/132kV transmission lines in the
State of Madhya Pradesh.

1.01.04 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all details of


the design and construction of Material. However, the Material shall
conform in all respects to high standards of engineering, design and
workmanship and shall be capable of performing the duties specified
herein. The Material offered shall be complete with all components
necessary for its effective and trouble free operation. Such components
shall be deemed to be within the scope of Bidder’s supply, irrespective
of whether these are specifically brought out in this specification or not.

1.01.05 If due to site condition any other type of tower (which is not
envisaged at present) is required to be provided, the same will also be
supplied by the bidder at the same rates terms and conditions.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 1 of 190


Volume-V

1.02 CLIMATIC CONDITION


The equipments and materials shall be suitable for satisfactory
continuous operation under the following climatic conditions:

1 Location in the state of MADHYA PRADESH


0
2 Maximum ambient air temperature ( C) 50
3 Minimum temperature in shade (0C ) 1
4 Maximum relative humidity (%) 95(sometimes
approaches
saturation)
5 Average daily ambient air temperature (0C ) 32° Centigrade
6 ISOCERANIC Level (days/year)
50
(Average number of thunder storm days)
7 Average rainfall(mm) 1250
8 Wind Zone as per IS 802(Part-I)- 1995 4
9 Max. Altitudes above mean sea level
1000
(meters)
10 Seismic level (Horizontal acceleration)(g) 0.3

NOTE: Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and
fungus growth. The climatic conditions are also prone to wide
variations in ambient conditions. Smoke is also present in the
atmosphere. Heavy lightening also occurs during June to
October.

1.03 STANDARDS:

1.03.01 Bidders may please note that all offered materials shall be
manufactured, tested and supplied with all guaranteed technical
particulars generally conforming to meet the requirement of technical
specification as brought out in various Sections and latest revisions of
relevant standards of international electro technical commission or
equivalent national standards of India with latest amendments of
relevant standards rules and codes. The lists of standards are specified
in relevant Sections of bid document.

1.03.02 The works covered by the specification shall be designed,


engineered, manufactured, built, tested and commissioned in
accordance with the Acts, Rules Laws and Regulations of India.

1.03.03 The Contractor shall also note that list of standards


presented in this specification is not complete. Wherever necessary the
list of standards shall be considered in conjunction with specific IS/IEC.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 2 of 190


Volume-V

1.03.04 When the specific requirements stipulated in the


specifications exceed or differ than those required by the applicable
standards, the stipulation of the specification shall take precedence.
1.04 ACCEPTANCE OF OTHER AUTHORITATIVE STANDARDS :

1.04.01 The lists of Indian standards are specified in individual


sections for various materials and Installation work of bid document.
However, the Material and Installation work meeting any other
authoritative International Standard, which ensures equal or better
quality than the Standards mentioned in bid document, shall also be
acceptable. Material for which Indian Standards are not available,
any equivalent International Standards will be applicable.
Please attach photocopy of all such Standards according to
which the material and Installation work have been offered.

1.04.02 If the material offered by the Bidder conform to any other


standards, salient points of comparison between the standards adopted
and the specific standards shall be clearly brought out in relevant
schedule of deviation. It will be sole responsibility of Bidder to prove
that the salient features of offered materials are equivalent or better
than Indian standards as indicated in Section-2 to Section- 9 of this
document.

1.04.03 The Material and Installation work conforming to standards


other than specified in individual sections for various Material and
Installation work shall be subject to Employer’s approval.

1.05 TYPE TESTS:


1.05.01 Type tests shall mean those tests, which are to be carried
out to prove the process of manufacture and general conformity of the
Material.
1.05.02 The offered Material (except Towers & Tower Accessories)
should be fully type tested as per the relevant standards. Bidder shall
invariably furnish type test reports from the reputed and approved
national/international laboratory/Government approved test houses to
prove that specifications of Material to be supplied conform to the
relevant standard. Test certificates shall clearly indicate the type and
other details etc., so that relevant details of offered Material could be
verified. While submitting the bid the details and type etc., shall be
clearly indicated. Type test reports so furnished should not pertain to
the period earlier than five years from the date of opening of Bid. In
case the type tests were carried out earlier than five years, the
manufacturer will have to conduct these tests without any extra cost to
the Employer. In both the above cases type test certificate must be
submitted with the offer. The Bidders have to submit one complete set
of Test reports for the offered Material. Further, for any change in the
design/type already type tested and the design/type offered against

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 3 of 190


Volume-V

this specification, the Employer reserves the right to demand repetition


of tests without any extra cost.

1.06 DISCREPANCY IN TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

The bidders will have to furnish confirmation in regard to compliance of


our entire technical requirement. The bid should clearly describe
various technical particulars of the material as per this specification.

1.07 MANUFACTURER'S AUTHORISATION:


The bidders shall have to submit the documentation from the
manufacturer of the Material on the format specified in this volume that
they are authorised to supply the material indicated in their bids in the
employer's country

1.08 SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES:

1.08.01 The requirements of various Materials and Installation work


are indicated in Price Schedules. In these schedules short description of
material has been given. The details of all such description are given in
relevant sections of this document. The bidder shall refer these detailed
descriptions for clarity.

1.08.02 Although all the quantity of Material and Installation work


have been included in the bid as mentioned in Price Schedules.
However there may be requirement of some minor nature items
required for successful erection / commissioning of transmission line
work covered under this Bid. Bidder should include all such items in
the bid proposal sheets which are not specifically mentioned but are
essential for the execution of the contract. The cost of supply of such
item which explicitly may not appear in various schedules and are
required for successful commissioning of transmission line shall deemed
to be inclusive in the bid price and shall be provided at no extra cost to
Employer.

1.09 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE PERIOD:

All the Material & its accessories and Installation work covered under
the Bid shall guaranteed for performance and quality for a period of 24
months from the date of completion of facilities (or any part thereof).
In case after commissioning of transmission line, any operational
problem is observed in any Material/ installation work because of which
any major rectification or replacement work is done, then the guarantee
for such Material / installation work shall be extended by a period equal
to the period during which the facilities or such part can not be used by
the EMPLOYER.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 4 of 190


Volume-V

1.10 WORKMANSHIP:

All Material shall be of the best class and quality most suitable for the
conditions of operation under the climate conditions as per clause no.
1.02 above for supply of Material. The workmanship shall be of the best
grade and the entire construction in accordance with the best modern
practice.

1.11 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS:

1.11.01 In addition to those stipulated in Vol. I of bidding


document, the following also shall apply in respect of Contractor
drawings.

1.11.02 Within one month from the award of contract, the


contractor shall submit the drawing of all Material for approval. Each
drawing submitted by the Contractor shall be clearly marked with the
name of the EMPLOYER, the specification title, the specification number
and the name of the Project. All titles, noting, markings and writings
on the drawing shall be in English. All the dimensions should be to the
scale and in S.I. units.

1.11.03 The comments/ approval to drawings submitted by the


Contractor shall be conveyed by the EMPLOYER as far as practicable
within 15 days and shall be modified by the Contractor if any
modifications and/or corrections are required by the EMPLOYER. The
Contractor shall incorporate such modifications and/or corrections and
submit the final drawings for approval with 15 days from date of
EMPLOYERs comments. Any delays arising out of failure by the
Contractor to rectify the drawings in good time shall not alter the
Contractual Time Schedule.

1.11.04 The drawings submitted for approval to the EMPLOYER shall


be in quadruplicate. One print of such drawings shall be returned to
the Contractor by the EMPLOYER marked “approved/approved with
corrections”. The contractor shall there upon furnish the EMPLOYER
additional prints as may be required along with one reproducible in
original of the drawings after incorporating all corrections.

1.11.05 The work shall be performed by the Contractor strictly in


accordance with these drawings and no deviation shall be permitted
without the written approval of the EMPLOYER, if so required.

1.11.06 All manufacturing, fabrication and Installation work under


the scope of Contractor, prior to the approval of the drawings shall be
at the Contractor’s risk. The contractor may incorporate any changes in
the design, which are necessary to confirm to the provisions and intent
of the contract and such changes will again be subject to approval by
the EMPLOYER.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 5 of 190


Volume-V

1.11.07 The approval of the documents and drawings by the


EMPLOYER shall mean that the EMPLOYER is satisfied that:
a. The Contractor has completed the part of the Works covered
by the subject documents (i.e. confirmation of progress of
work).
b. The Works appear to comply with requirements of
Specifications.
In no case the approval by the EMPLOYER of any document does imply
compliance with all technical requirements or the absence of errors in
such documents.
If errors are discovered any time during the validity of the contract,
then the Contractor shall be responsible for consequences.

1.11.08 All drawings shall be prepared using AutoCAD software.


After final approval all the drawings and documents (structural
drawings, BOMs, shop sketches, tower accessories drawings and
drawings of other materials) shall be submitted to the EMPLOYER in
CDs.
A copy of each drawing reviewed will be returned to the Contractor as
stipulated herein.

1.11.09 Copies of drawings returned to the Contractor will be in the


form of a print with the EMPLOYER’s marking.

1.11.10 All rights of the design/drawing for all Material and


Installation work drawings shall be strictly reserved with the EMPLOYER
only and any designs/drawings/data sheets submitted by the contractor
from time to time shall become the property of the EMPLOYER. Under
no circumstances, the contractor shall be allowed to user/offer above
designs/drawings/data sheets to any other authority without prior
written permission of the EMPLOYER. Any deviation to above is not
acceptable and may be a cause for rejection of the bid.

1.11.11 The manufacturing of the material shall be strictly in


accordance with the approved drawings and no deviation shall be
permitted without the written approval of the EMPLOYER. All
manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the material
prior to the approval of the drawing shall be at Contractor’s risk.

1.11.12 Approval of drawing/works by EMPLOYER shall not relieve


the Contractor of his responsibility and liability for ensuring correctness
and correct interpretation of the latest revision of applicable standards,
rules and codes of practices. The plant shall conform in all respect to
high standards of engineering, design, workmanship and latest
revisions of relevant standards. EMPLOYER shall have the power to

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 6 of 190


Volume-V

reject any work or material, which in his judgment is not in full


accordance therewith.

1.12 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM:

1.12.01 Quality Assurance Program : To ensure that the Material


and Services under the scope of this contract whether
manufactured or performed within the Contractor's works or at his Sub-
Contractor's premises or at the EMPLOYER's site or at any other place of
work are in accordance with the Specifications, the Contractor shall
adopt suitable Quality Assurance Program (QAP) with hold points for
EMPLOYER’s inspection to control such activities at all necessary points.
Such program shall be outlined by the Contractor and shall be finally
accepted by the EMPLOYER after discussions.

1.12.02 Immediately after award of contract, the contractor shall


submit to the EMPLOYER, the quality assurance plan for all major
items of Material covering the manufacture and Installation activities of
the transmission line. The list of selected sub vendors for supply of
minor items like Bolts & Nuts, tower accessories etc. shall also be
submitted.

1.12.03 The contractor shall ensure that manufacturer must


establish that they are following the accepted quality assurance
programme for manufacture of offered equipments.

1.12.04 The contractor shall ensure that manufacturers of major


items of Material invariably furnish following information:-
(i) Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of
sub supplier for the raw material, list of standards according
to which the raw material are tested, list of tests normally
carried out on raw material in presence of manufacturers
representative, copies of test certificates.
(ii) Information and copies of test certificates as in (i) above in
respect of bought out items.
(iii) List of manufacturing facilities available.
(iv) Levels of automation achieved and list of areas where
manual processing exists.
(v) List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage
inspections are normally carried out for quality control and
details of such tests and inspection.
(vi) Special features provided in the equipment to make it
maintenance free.
(vii) List of testing equipment available with the manufacturer
for final testing of equipment specified and test plant

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 7 of 190


Volume-V

limitations, if any vis-à-vis type, special, acceptance and


routine tests specified in the relevant Indian Standards or
equivalent international standard. These limitations shall be
very clearly brought out in schedule of deviations from
specified test equipments.

1.12.05 The Contractor shall follow the accepted Quality Assurance


Plan in true spirit. If desired by the EMPLOYER, he shall give access to
all the Specifications, equipments and records so as to satisfy the
EMPLOYER that Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) is being followed
properly.

1.12.06 All Material shall be subjected to the routine and acceptance


tests before dispatch, as specified in this Specification.

1.13 INSPECTION AND TEST CERTIFICATES:


1.13.01 All Material to be supplied will be subject to inspection and
approval by the EMPLOYER's representative before despatch. Inspection
before despatch will not however relieve the contractor of his
responsibility to supply the Material strictly in accordance with the
specifications.
1.13.02 For Inspection / testing, the contractor shall intimate the
EMPLOYER at least 15 days in advance about readiness of Material as
per the scheduled delivery so that action may be taken for getting the
Material inspected. While notifying the readiness of the Material, the
factory test certificate in respect of offered Material shall invariably be
sent. The EMPLOYER will depute authorized representative for
inspection of Material or alternatively may issue waiver of inspection.
1.13.03 The contractor will submit a test certificate to the
EMPLOYER after inspection of offered Material by EMPLOYER’s
authorized representative. These test certificates should be in
accordance with latest issue of the relevant Indian Standards or as
approved by the order placing authority.
1.13.04 The Material shall not be dispatched unless the test
certificates approval and despatch instructions have been issued by the
EMPLOYER.
1.13.05 All Material shall conform to provisions of any statutory
acts such as the Indian Electricity Act, Indian Factory Act, the
Indian Boiler Act, etc. and corresponding rules and regulations as may
be applicable.

1.13.06 The EMPLOYER's representatives shall be entitled at all


reasonable time during manufacture to inspect, examine and test at
the contractor's premises the material and workmanship of the plant to
be supplied under this contract.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 8 of 190


Volume-V

1.13.07 A copy of the accepted Quality Assurance Plan must be


available at the manufacturer’s works of the Material for reviewing by
inspecting officer of the EMPLOYER.
1.13.08 The acceptance of any quantity of plant shall in no way
relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities for meeting all
requirements of the specification, and shall not prevent subsequent
rejection if such plant is later found to be defective. The Contractor will
have to assume the responsibility for free replacement/rectification of
such defects.
1.13.09 Testing Expenses:
The entire cost of testing for the acceptance and routine tests and tests
during manufacture specified in the bid document shall be treated as
included in the quoted unit price of plant.

1.14 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS:

1.14.01 EMPLOYER expects that participating bidder will take all


necessary precautions to supply best quality Material, which may
provide trouble free performance and also it is expected that the
modern practices for erection and commissioning shall be adopted to
ensure timely and trouble free commissioning of installation and also to
ensure aesthetic overall view of finished transmission line installation.

Some of the conditions which will have to be essentially accepted and


followed by the Bidders for the purpose of participating against the Bid
and also for undertaking construction activities are enumerated below
for specific confirmation by the Bidders.

1.15 STORE FOR SUPPLY OF MATERIAL:


The Contractor shall supply the Material at selected destination set up
by him along the route of the transmission line. The Contractor will set
up above site store within one month from the date of contract and
inform the EMPLOYER. The Contractor will have to supply above
materials and receive them at these places only and the rates
quoted by the Bidder should include charges for delivery of such
materials at the store set up by him, receipt and proper stacking/
stocking at the store.

1.16 COMMENCEMENT OF ACTIVITIES:

Commencement of following activities is subject to prior and specific


approval of the items mentioned against each:-

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 9 of 190


Volume-V

S. Activity Items for which prior approval


No. is necessary from Employer
1. Manufacturing of tower Inspection of Proto Assembly of
parts. each type of tower. Submission
of quality assurance plan.
2. Manufacturing of Submission of Quality Assurance
Conductors, Ground wire, Plan, approval of drawings.
Insulators, Hardware
fittings & Accessories for
Conductor and Earth
wire/ OPGW.
3. Dispatch of towers, Acceptance test and issue of test
Conductors, Earth wire, certificate approval
Insulators, Hardware
fittings & Accessories for
Conductor and Earth
wire/ OPGW.
4. Foundation work. Classification of foundation.
5. Erection of tower Quality Assurance Plan for
erection.
6. Stringing of Conductor Stringing chart and stringing
and Earth wire /OPGW. method.

1.17 RESPONSIBILITY FOR OBTAINING INFORMATION AND


TAKING ACTION IN TIME:
Whenever any information or clarifications in respect of construction
of line has to be obtained from various authorities, the Contractor shall
be responsible for taking action well in time so that there are no delays
on this account. The completion period specified in the bidding
document is deemed to include the time taken for such incidental
works. Request for extension of the completion date on such ground
will not be entertained.

1.18 PERMITS AND PRIORITIES:

1.18.01 Necessary permits, if any, required for the execution of the


contract shall be arranged by the Contractor himself. The Contractor
shall obtain the necessary license/permission as per
Central/State/local statutory bodies at his cost.

1.18.02 The Purchaser may, however, furnish to the Contractor such


certificates (on receipt of such written request from the Contractor) as
may be required for the necessary permits/priorities for the execution
of works, if it considers the demand as justified.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 10 of 190


Volume-V

1.18.03 The Purchaser however, shall not be responsible for the delay
in execution of contract, if permits/priorities are not granted in time in
spite of issuance of such certificate.

1.19 WAY LEAVE:

The purchaser will arrange for necessary way leave and clearance of
trees. The Purchaser will pay the way leave compensation. The
purchaser will also arrange for the following: -

(i) Railway clearance


(ii) PTCC clearance
(iii) Forest clearance
(iv) Any other necessary clearance if required/requested.

The Contractor shall inform the purchaser about the places where there
is a way leave problem, sufficiently in advance (preferably 30 days) so
that required way leave can be arranged in time.

Further Contractor shall inform the employer at least 15 days in


advance, the sections of the line where he has planned to carry out the
foundation/ tower erection/stringing work so that MPPTCL may take
advance suitable actions to avoid possibility of any ROW problem.

Please note that while carrying out stringing work, if obstruction is faced
due to branches of trees, the same will be cleared by the contractor.
Further, the contractor will make all- out efforts to carry out stringing
work across Electrified Railway Track within minimum possible duration.

1.20 USE OF PRIVATE ROADS/APPROACH ROAD TO SITE:

1.20.01 The purchaser will help in getting necessary permission for


use of private/forest/canal, roads for transportation of materials and
construction personnels, wherever possible under the rules. Any
charges/tole tax etc. levied by the concerned authorities for use of such
roads etc. shall be borne by the Contractor.

1.20.02 During the erection work, if approach roads are required to be


constructed for reaching the construction sites for transportation of
men/materials, the cost of construction of such approach roads and any
other expenses incurred in obtaining clearance/permission shall be
borne by the Contractor.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 11 of 190


Volume-V

1.21 MATERIALS TO BE ARRANGED BY THE CONTRACTOR FOR


ERECTION WORK:

1.21.01 The supply of cement for foundation work would be arranged


by the Contractor of the quality as per IS - 269 :1989 (Ordinary
Portland Cement 33 Grade) or IS – 8112 : 1987 (Ordinary Portland
Cement 43 Grade) or IS – 12269 : 1987 (Ordinary Portland Cement 53
Grade) or IS:1489 (Portland-Pozzolana Cement (PPC)). The cost of
cement shall be deemed to be included in the quoted unit rates of
concreting.

1.21.02 The cement used shall be procured from reputed manufacturer


like JP Cement, L&T, Birla Cement, ACC, Ambuja etc. The Contractor
shall submit the manufacturer’s certificate, for each consignment of
cement procured, to the Purchaser. The cement shall be arranged in
conventional Jute/HD bags each weighing 50 Kgs net with necessary IS
certification mark on it. In case of any dispute regarding quality of
cement, sample for testing may be taken jointly by contractor’s
representative and Engineer in- charge of work or any authorized
representative of the Company. The sample taken shall be tested for
standard test as per IS code in Govt. Engineering/Polytechnic College
and testing charge shall be borne by the contractor. In case the
material is found defective i.e. not as per relevant ISS, the same shall
be replaced by the contractor at his cost. The Contractor shall also have
no claim towards suspension of work due to time taken in conducting
tests in the laboratory. Changing of brand or type of cement within the
same structure shall not be permitted without the prior approval of the
Purchaser.

1.21.03 The Quantity of cement to be used per unit quantity of


consumption for different mix (nominal mix) of concrete should be as
follows:

Description Unit Quantity of minimum


S. Cement to be used per Unit
No. quantity of work(in kgs)
1 1:1.5:3 nominal mix Cu.m. 400
concrete
2 1:2:4 nominal mix Cu.m. 330
concrete
3 1:3:6 nominal mix Cu.m. 220
concrete
4 Random Rubble Masonry Cu.m 83
with 1:6 cement mortar

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 12 of 190


Volume-V

1.21.04 The Contractor shall arrange metal, sand, stone and water
required for foundation/revetment work. The transport, octroi, levy or
duty on these materials shall be borne by the Contractor himself and
the purchaser will not accept any liability on this account.

1.21.05 The Contractor will also arrange steel rods and binding wires
etc. for foundation, reinforcement and the cast incurred will be
borne by him. Materials for proper earthing of towers i.e. earthing rod,
connecting clamps and connecting wires etc. would also be
arranged by the Contractor as already specified.

***

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 13 of 190


Volume-V

SECTION-2

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR SUPPLY OF TOWERS


2.01 INDIAN STANDARDS:
The 220kV & 132kV Double Circuit/ Multi circuit towers, their body
extensions, river/ line crossing structures (Gantries) under this
specification shall conform to the requirements of the latest revisions
and amendments available at the time of placement of order of all the
relevant Indian standards/codes listed here under or equivalent
International Standards, except as modified in this document.
S. Indian standards or Title
No. equivalent
International
Standards
1 IS:209-1992 Zinc ingot- Specification.
2 IS:278-1991 Galvanized Steel Barbed Wire.

3 IS:800-1991 Code of Practice for General Building


Construction in Steel.
4 IS:802-Part-II-1990 Code of practice for use of structural
steel in overhead transmission line.
Part-II Fabrication, Galvanising,
Inspection & packing.
5 IS 808 – 1991 Dimensions for Hot Rolled Steel beam,
Column, Channel and Angle Sections.
6 IS:1363(Part-III)-1992 Specification for Hexagon head bolts,
screws and nut for product grade –
“C” Hexagon nuts of property class 5.
7 IS:1367-1992 Technical supply conditions for
st
threaded fasteners (1 Revision).
8 IS:1367(Part-III)-1991 Mechanical properties and test method
for bolts, screws & studs with full
loadability.
9 IS:1367(Part-VI)-1994 Mechanical properties and test method
for nuts with specified proof loads.
10 IS-1367(Part-XIII)-1983 The hot dip galvanized coating of
fasteners.
11 IS:1573-1991 Specification for electroplated coating
of zinc on Iron & steel.
12 IS:1586-1968 Methods of Rock well hardness test
(`B’ & `C’ scales) for steel (first
revision).

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 14 of 190


Volume-V

S. Indian standards or Title


No. equivalent
International
Standards
13 IS:1852-1991 Rolling and Cutting Tolerances of Hot
Rolled Steel Products.
14 IS:2016-1992 Plain Washers.
15 IS:2062-2006 Steel for general Structural purposes –
Specification.
16 IS:2614-1969 Method for sampling of fasteners.

17 IS:2629-1990 Recommended practice for hot dip


galvanizing of iron and steel.
18 IS:2633-1992 Method of testing uniformity of coating
of zinc coated articles.
19 IS:3063-1994 Single Coil Rectangular Section spring
washers for bolts, nuts, and screws.
20 IS:3202-1972 Methods for testing local thickness of
electro plated coatings.
21 IS:3218(Part-V)-1979 Isometric screw threads “Tolerance”.
22 IS:3757-1992 High Strength Structural Bolts.

23 IS:4072-1975 Specification for steel for spring


washers (first revision).
24 IS:4218(Part-VI)-1978 Isometric screw threads limits of sizes
for commercial bolts & nuts.
25 IS:4759-1990 Specification for Hot dip Zinc coatings
on Structural Steel and other Allied
products.
26 IS:5358-1969 Hot dip galvanized coatings on
fasteners.
27 IS:5369-1991 General Requirements for Plain
Washers.
28 IS:6610-1991 Specification for Heavy Washers for
Steel Structures.
29 IS:6623-1992 High Strength Structural Nuts.

30 IS:6745-1972 Method for determination of weight of


zinc coating of zinc coated iron and
steel article.
31 IS:6821-1973 Methods for sampling of non threaded
fasteners.
32 IS:8500-1992 Specification for weldable structural

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 15 of 190


Volume-V

S. Indian standards or Title


No. equivalent
International
Standards
steel (Medium & High Strength
Qualities).
33 IS:10238-1989 Step Bolts for Steel Structures.
34 IS:12427-1992 Specification for Transmission Tower
Bolts of property class 5.6

2.02 TYPE OF TOWERS :


2.02.1 The towers will be double circuit, self-supporting lattice
type, designed for the specified loading conditions. The following type
of towers are required: -
(A) For 220kV Lines :-
i) Tower type B-0: Tangent type tower with maximum line
deviation up to 2° to be used with
Single/Double suspension insulator strings.
ii) Tower type B-30: Medium angle tower to be used for line
deviation from 0° to 30° with Single/Double
tension insulator strings.
iii) Tower type B-60: Heavy angle tower to be used for line
deviation from 0° to 60° and also as dead
end tower with Single/Double tension
insulator strings.
iv) Gantry (type-AGT) Wherever necessary will also be required for
crossing 220/400kV transmission lines.
(B) For 132kV Lines:-
i) Tower type E-0: Tangent type tower with maximum line
deviation up to 2° to be used with
Single/Double suspension insulator strings.
ii) Tower type E-30: Medium angle tower to be used for line
deviation from 0° to 30° with Single/Double
tension insulator strings.
iii) Tower type E-60: Heavy angle tower to be used for line
deviation from 0° to 60° and also as dead
end tower with Single/Double tension
insulator strings.
iv) Gantry(type-3GO4):Wherever necessary will also be required
for crossing 132/220kV transmission lines.

2.03 EXTENSIONS:

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 16 of 190


Volume-V

Suitable extension of 3M, 6M and 10M height will be supplied for use
with 132 kV/220 kV towers.

2.04 TOWER TYPE JC/JCT:


River crossing tower to be used across major river crossings with
Double suspension insulator strings.

2.05 220KV MULTI CIRCUIT TOWERS:


Wherever necessary, MC-0/MC-30/MC-60 type multi circuit towers with
3/6/10 Meter extension and MCX tower may be required for
transmission lines.

2.06 132KV MULTI CIRCUIT TOWERS:


Wherever necessary, MD-0/MD-15/MD-30/ MD60 132kV Multi circuit
Towers with 5M & 10M extension may be required for transmission
lines.

2.07 STUB SETTING TEMPLATES:


The Contractor will fabricate required number of adjustable stub-
setting templates for each type of tower for carrying out the foundation
work. The templates will remain property of the contractor.

2.08 PROCUREMENT OF STEEL AND ZINC:


The following provisions shall apply in connection with the procurement
of steel and zinc by the bidder:
2.08.1 The steel used for fabrication of tower parts, extensions,
templates etc. shall be mild steel of tested quality as per Indian
Standard 2062-1992 or equivalent International Standard.
2.08.2 The bidder should take into account the fabrication wastage
while quoting the rates. The Employer shall not accept any liability in
connection with the actual wastage of steel during fabrication or
otherwise and no additional cost will be allowed on this account.
2.08.3 Substitutions, if any, of steel sections of the tower parts by
higher size, due to their non-availability or otherwise shall be to the
Bidder’s account. The Employer shall not accept any liability on this
account.
2.08.4 The steel shall generally be procured from the Main Steel
Producers. However, sections not rolled/available from the main
producers, could be procured from re-rollers as per quality conforming
to Indian Standard, provided;
2.08.4.1 Re-rolling of structural steel sections is done from
billets/ingots of tested quality only.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 17 of 190


Volume-V

2.08.4.2 Re-rolled sections are duly tested as per relevant Indian


Standard. It may however be noted that no additional cost
shall be payable towards procurement of steel section from
re-rollers.
2.08.5 The zinc used for galvanising of fabricated material shall be
Electrolytic High Grade Zinc (99.95% purity).

2.09 MATERIAL:
2.09.1 IS Steel Sections of tested quality in conformity with IS:
2062: 2006 grade E250 (Designated Yield Strength. 250 MPa) and/ or
grade E350 (Designated Yield Strength 350 MPa) are to be used in
towers, extensions, stubs and stub setting templates. The Contractor
can use other equivalent grade of structural steel angle sections and
plates conforming to latest International Standards. However, use of
steel grade having designated yield strength more than that of EN
10025 grade S355 JR/JO (designated yield strength 355 MPa) is not
permitted, unless otherwise indicated in this specification.
2.09.2 Steel plates below 6mm size exclusively used for packing
plates/packing washers produced as per IS: 1079 -1994 (Grade -0) are
also acceptable. However, if below 6mm size plate are used as load
bearing plates viz gusset plates , joint splices etc. the same shall
conform to IS : 2062 or equivalent standard meeting mechanical
strength/metallurgical properties corresponding to grade E250 or E350
(designated yield strength not more than 355MPa), depending upon the
type of grade incorporated into design. Flats of equivalent grade
meeting mechanical strength/ metallurgical properties may also be
used in place of plates for packing plates/ packing washers. The
chequered plates shall conform to IS: 3502. SAILMA 350HI grade plate
can also be accepted in place of HT plates (EN 10025 grade S355 JR/JO
/ IS 2062:2006 – grade 350, as applicable) provide SAILMA 350HI
grade plate meet all the mechanical properties of plate as per EN 10025
grade S355 JR/JO (designated yield strength 355 MPa) / IS 2062:2006
– grade 350.
2.09.3 For designing of towers, preferably rationalised steel section
has been used. During execution of the project, if any particular section
is not available, the same shall be substituted by higher section. Any
cost on account of the same shall be borne by the Contractor. However,
design approval for such substitution shall be obtained from the
employere before any substitution and records of such substitutions
shall be maintained by the Contractor.

2.10 WEIGHTS:
The unit weight of each type of tower and extension including bolts and
nuts, accessories, attachments and step bolts is indicated in the Bill of
Materials which shall be supplied by the Employer to the successful

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 18 of 190


Volume-V

bidder. The weight of structure means the weight calculated using black
sectional (i.e. ungalvanised) weights of all steel members of the sizes
indicated in the fabrication drawings without taking into consideration
the reduction in weight due to drilling of bolts, holes, skew cuts,
chamfering etc. or increase in weight due to galvanising.

2.11 GALVANISING:
2.11.1 The tower parts, stubs and pack washers shall be hot dip
galvanized. The galvanization shall be done as per requirements of IS
4759 after all fabrication work is completed. The contractor shall also
take guidelines from the recommended practices for hot dip galvanizing
laid down in IS 2629 while deciding and implementing galvanizing
procedure. The mandatory requirements however, are specified herein.
2.11.2 Unless otherwise specified the fabricated tower parts and
stubs shall have a minimum overall zinc coating of 610 gms per sq.m.
of surface except for plates below 5mm which shall have Zinc coating of
460 gms per sq.m of surface. The average zinc coating for sections
5mm & above shall be maintained as 87 microns and that for sections
below 5mm shall be maintained as 65 microns.
2.11.3 The zinc coating shall be adherent, reasonably uniform,
smooth, continuous and free from imperfections such as black/bare
spots, ash rust strains, bulky white deposits/wet storage strains and
blisters.
2.11.4 The surface preparation for fabricated tower parts and stubs
for hot dip galvanizing shall be carried out a indicated herein below:
(i) Degreasing & Cleaning of Surface: Degreasing and cleaning of
surface, wherever required, shall be carried out in accordance
with clause 4.1 of IS 2629-1990. After degreasing the article
shall be thoroughly rinsed. However, if acidic degreasers are
used rinsing is not required.
(ii) Pickling: pickling shall be done using either hydrochloric or
sulphuric acid as recommended at clause 4.3 of IS 2629-1990.
The actual concentration of the acids and the time duration of
immersion shall be determined by the Contractor depending on
the nature of material to be pickled. Suitable inhibitors also shall
be used with the acids to avoid over pickling. The acid
concentration, inhibitors used, and maximum allowable iron
content shall form part of plant standard to be formulated and
submitted to Employer along with Quality Assurance Program.
(iii) Rinsing: After pickling, the material shall be rinsed, preferably in
running water to remove acid traces, iron particles or any other
impurities from the surface. Two rinse tanks are preferable, with
water cascading from the second tank to the first to ensure
thorough cleaning. Wherever single tank is employed, the water

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 19 of 190


Volume-V

shall be periodically changed to avoid acid contamination, and


removal of other residue from the tank.
(iv) Fluxing: The rinsed article shall be dipped in a solution of zinc
ammonium chloride. The concentration and temperature of the
flux solution shall be standardized by the contractor depending on
the article to be galvanized and individual circumstances. These
shall form part of plant standard to be formulated and submitted
to Employer along with Quality Assurance Program. The specific
gravity of the flux solution shall be periodically monitored and
controlled by adding required quantity of flux crystals to
compensate for drag-out losses. Free acid content of the flux
solution also shall be periodically checked and when it is more
than two (2) grams of free acid per litre of the solution, it shall be
neutralized. Alternatively, Ph value should be monitored
periodically and maintained between 5.0 to 5.5.
(v) Drying: When dry galvanizing is adopted the article shall be
thoroughly dried after fluxing. For the purpose of drying, the
contractor may use hot plate, air oven or any other proven
method ensuring complete drying of the article after fluxing and
prior to dipping in the molten zinc bath. The drying process shall
be such that the article shall not attain a temperature at which
the flux shall get decomposed. The article thus dried shall be
galvanized before the flux coating picks up moisture from the
atmosphere or the flux layer gets damaged or removed from the
surface. The drying procedure, time duration, temperature limits,
time lag between fluxing, drying, galvanizing etc shall form part
of plant standard to be formulated and submitted to Employer
along with Quality Assurance Program.
(vi) Quality of Zinc: Any one or combination of the grades of zinc
specified in IS 209 or IS 13229 or other comparable international
standard shall be used for galvanizing. The contractor shall
declare the grade(s) of zinc proposed to be used by them for
galvanizing. The molten metal in the zinc bath shall contain
minimum 98.5 % zinc by mass. It shall be periodically measured
and recorded. Zinc aluminium alloy shall be added as per IS
2629.
(vii) Dipping Process: The temperature of the galvanizing bath shall
be continuously monitored and controlled. The working
temperature of the galvanizing bath shall be maintained at 450 ±
10°C. The article should be immersed in the bath as rapidly as
possible without compromising on safety aspects. The
galvanizing bath temperature, immersion angle & time, time
duration of immersion, rate of withdrawal etc. shall be monitored
and controlled depending upon the size, shape, thickness and
chemical composition of the article such that the mass of zinc
coating and its uniformity meets the specified requirements and

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 20 of 190


Volume-V

the galvanized surface is free from imperfections and galvanizing


defects.
(viii) Post Treatment: The article shall be quenched in water. The
quench water is to be changed / drained periodically to prevent
corrosive salts from accumulating in it. If water quenching is not
done then necessary cooling arrangements should be made. The
galvanized articles shall be dipped in chromating solution
containing sodium dichromate and sulphuric acid or chromic acid
base additive at a predetermined concentration and kept at room
temperature to retard while rust attack. The temperature of the
chromate solution shall not exceed 65°C. The articles shall not
be stacked immediately after quenching and dichromating. It
shall be ensured that the articles are dry before any further
handling operation.
(ix) Storing, Picking and Handling: In order to prevent while rust
formation sufficient care should be exercised while storing
handling and transporting galvanized products. The articles shall
be stored in an adequately ventilated area. The articles shall be
stored with spacers in between them and kept at an inclination to
facilitate easy drainage of any water collected on the articles.
Similar care is to be taken while transporting and storing the
articles at site.
(x) The Contractor shall prepare a detailed galvanizing procedure
including Flow Chart with control parameters and all plant
standards as required above and submit to Employer for
acceptance as part of Quality Assurance Plan.
(xi) Minor defects in hot-dip galvanised members supplied at site shall
be repaired by applying zinc rich primer and two coats of enamel
paint to the satisfaction of the employer before erection, after
obtaining specific permission from Employer.

2.12 GALVANISED BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS:


2.12.1 The bolts and nuts to be supplied shall be mild steel hot dip
galvanized bolts (5.6 quality) and nuts (5.0 quality). The spring
washers are to be supplied for insertion under all nuts. These washers
shall be of steel, electro galvanized, and positive lock type and of
3.5mm thickness. Bolt heads and nuts shall be of hexagonal shape.
2.12.2 The nuts shall be forged and tapped after galvanizing and
then lubricated. The nuts shall be chamfered on one face only; the
other face shall be machined.
2.12.3 The bolts of 16mm size shall be manufactured by cold/hot
forging process and the threads shall be rolled.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 21 of 190


Volume-V

2.12.4 The bolts and nuts shall be free from forging and threading
defects such as cuts, splits, burrs, bulging, taper, eccentricity, loose fit
etc.
2.12.5 The bolts shall be threaded up to standard length only as
per relevant Indian Standard and not to full length.
2.12.6 The bolts and nuts shall conform to Indian Standard1367:
1991 Part-III and Part-IV, Indian Standard12427:1992, Indian
Standard1363-1992, Indian Standard 1367 (Part-XIII)-1983 with latest
amendment or equivalent International Standards.
2.12.7 The spring washers designated as M 16-B suitable for
16mm dia galvanized bolt shall be manufactured out of rectangular
section with tolerances as per Indian Standard 3063-1994 with latest
amendments or equivalent International Standard. The spring steel
shall conform to Indian Standard:4072-1975 with latest amendments
"Specification for steel for spring washers" or equivalent International
Standard.
2.12.8 The spring washers after coiling shall be suitably heat-
treated to obtain finished washer having hardness 43 to 50 HRC when
tested in accordance with Indian Standard 1586- 1968 or equivalent
International Standard.
2.12.9 The surface of the washers shall be free of scales and burrs.
The washers shall be coiled without any kinks (except for the shape
with turned-up ends). The ends of the washer shall not abut when the
washers are compressed. The ends shall be so served as to prevent
tangling.
2.12.10 The approximate weight of 1000 pieces of spring washers
suitable for 16mm dia bolt shall be 8.91 kg. in natural black finish as
shown in Indian Standard 3063-1994 with latest amendments or
equivalent International Standard.
2.12.11 The spring washer shall be electro galvanized with
chromate passivation. The electro galvanizing of washers should
conform to ’severe’ grading service conditions incorporated in Indian
Standard 1573: 1991 or equivalent International Standard as "Service
Grade No.4", classification Fe Zn 25. The thickness of zinc coating
should be minimum 25 microns and average thickness 38 microns. It
should be further suitably heat-treated to avoid any danger of hydrogen
embrittlement.

2.13 STEP BOLTS :


Each tower will be provided, on one of the legs, with step-bolts of
16mm dia and 175mm long, spaced not more than 450mm and
extending from 3 meters above ground level up to the top portion of
the tower. The step bolts shall conform to Indian Standard1363-

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 22 of 190


Volume-V

1992, Indian Standard10238:1989 and Indian Standard 1367(Part-


XIII):1983 or equivalent International Standards.

2.14 DANGER BOARD, NUMBER PLATE AND PHASE PLATES :


Each tower will be fitted with danger board, number plate and phase
plates. The tower to be supplied shall have provision to fix these plates
at a height of about 3 meters above ground level. Necessary provision
in tower & extensions for fixing of these items shall be made. The
Danger board, number plate and phase plates shall be supplied
conforming to following technical details:-
2.14.1 The danger boards shall conform to IS-2551-1982 and their
revision, if any except where modified in this specification.
2.14.2 The danger boards, number plates and phase plates shall
conform to the drawings enclosed in this specification.
2.14.3 The colour scheme of the enamel and size of figures and
dimensions of lettering shall be as shown in the drawing as also the
overall size. The holes as indicated in the drawing shall be provided
before enamellings.
2.14.4 The thickness of the plate out of which the danger board,
number plate and phase plate will be manufactured, shall not be less
than 1.6mm.
2.14.5 The enamellings shall be done by vitreous enameling
process only.
2.14.6 All letterings shall be centrally spaced. The dimensions of
the letters, figures and their respective positions shall be as given in
drawings. The size of each letter in the word in each language and the
spacing between them for the purpose of scribing shall be so chosen
that they are uniformly written in the space earmarked for them.
2.14.7 The corners of the plate shall be rounded off. The location
of the fixing holes shall be according to drawing annexed with this
specification.
2.14.8 The plate shall be made from mild steel at least 1.6mm
thick and vitreous enameled white, with letters, figures and the
conventional skull and cross-bones in signal red colour on the front
side. The rear side of the plate shall also be enameled.

2.15 ANTICLIMBING DEVICE WITH BARBED WIRE :


The barbed wire type anti-climbing device shall be supplied for use at a
height of approximately 3 meters as an anti-climbing deterrent
measure, as per the details given in Indian Standard: 5613(Part-
2/Sec-I) 1985 or equivalent International Standard. The angle pieces
with notches for accommodating barbed wire shall be used for this

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 23 of 190


Volume-V

purpose. The towers to be supplied by the Bidder shall have provision


of suitable bolt holes on leg members for fitting the angles to fix the
barbed wire as indicated above. The details of anti-climbing device are
indicated in drawing enclosed in Annexure-6. The requirement of angle
pieces with notches and barbed wire (per set) will generally be as
under:-
(A) For 220kV Towers:-
Angle pieces - 23.57 Kgs.
Bolts & nuts - 3.41 Kgs.
Barbed wire - 25.00 Kgs.

(B) For 132kV Towers:-


Angle pieces - 24.34 Kgs.
Bolts & nuts - 2.00 Kgs.
Barbed wire - 20.00 Kgs.

2.16 EARTHING :
2.16.1 A provision shall be made in all stubs for fixing earthing
material. The stub will be provided with a hole at a distance of 250 mm
from bottom end and at a distance of 500 mm below ground level for
connection with earthing materials. The hole will be of 17.5 mm dia.
2.16.2 The Bidder shall also supply and erect the following
materials per earthing set for earthing of towers (four sets per tower): -
(i) One no. Hot dip galvanized earthing Mild Steel Rod (2 Meter
long, 25 mm diameter):
(ii) Hot dip galvanized connecting clamps (`F’ type and `U’ type- 2
No. per set);
(iii) Hot dip galvanized stranded steel wire of size 7/4mm, Grade 5 to
be used as connecting wire conforming to Indian Standard:
2141:1992 and Indian Standard 4826: 1979 or equivalent
International Standard (5 Meter per earthing set).
2.16.3 The details of earthing rod and clamps and earthing
arrangement for towers are shown in the drawing enclosed.
2.16.4 The earthing rod shall be of mild steel solid rod of 2 meters
in length and 25mm in diameter with one end pointed. The rods shall
be galvanized as per relevant Indian Standard or equivalent
International Standard. The zinc coating on the rod shall not be less
than 610 gm/m² of surface area.
2.16.5 The tower end-connecting clamp shall be of flat type and
rod end connecting clamp shall be of `U’ type. The clamps shall be of
forged steel cast iron / malleable iron. The clamps should be hot dip

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 24 of 190


Volume-V

galvanized as per Indian Standard: 2629:1990 or equivalent


International Standard. The zinc coating on the clamps shall not be
less than 610 gm/m² of surface area.
2.16.6 The hot dip galvanized stranded steel wire of size
7/4.00mm shall be supplied for connection between the earthing rod
and the stub. The steel wire shall conform to Indian Standard 2141:
1992 or equivalent International Standard and Indian Standard:4826:
1979 and latest revision thereof or equivalent International Standard
and shall consist of seven strands, each strand having a diameter of 4
mm and Grade-5. The galvanizing shall be done as per Indian
Standard specification2141: 1992 or equivalent International
Standard and 4826: 1979 and latest revision thereof or equivalent
International Standard for heavy zinc coating. The coating of zinc shall
not be less than 260 gm/m².

2.17 ATTACHMENT FOR INSULATOR STRING & EARTH WIRE


/OPGW CLAMPS:
2.17.1 The towers shall be provided with suitable attachment for
supporting insulator strings and Earth wire /OPGW suspension and
tension assembly.
2.17.2 The towers shall be provided with the cleats to support the
hanger.
2.17.3 The Earth wire suspension assembly has got a ‘D’ shackle.
There shall be a suitable arrangement to support the same.
2.17.4 On angle towers, strain plates shall be provided for the
purpose of attaching the tension insulator string. For fixing Earth wire
tension assembly a hole 17.5mm dia shall be provided in the strain
plate.

2.18 FABRICATION WORKMANSHIP :


2.18.1 Except where hereinafter modified, details of fabrication
shall conform to Indian Standard-802 (Part-II)-1990 or equivalent
International Standard.
2.18.2 The fabrication of towers shall be done strictly in
accordance with the drawings supplied by the Employer.
2.18.3 The tower shall be of bolted construction.
2.18.4 Normally lap splice shall be used for connecting members
of un-equal size and the inside angles of lap splice shall be rounded at
the heel to fit the fillet of the outside angle. All splices shall develop full
stress in the members connected through bolts. Butt joint as well as lap

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 25 of 190


Volume-V

joint splices shall be made as above and as close to the main panel as
possible.
2.18.5 Joints shall be designed and detailed to avoid eccentricity as
far as possible. The use of gusset plates for joining tower members
shall be avoided as far as possible. However, where the connections are
such that the eliminations of the gusset plates would result in eccentric
joints, gusset plates and spacer plates may be used in conformity with
modern practice.
2.18.6 The tower structures shall be accurately fabricated to bolt
together easily at site without any undue strain on the bolts.
2.18.7 No angle member shall have two leg flanges brought
together by closing the angle.
2.18.8 The diameter of the hole shall be equal to the diameter of
the bolt plus 1.5 mm.
2.18.9 All similar parts shall be made strictly
interchangeable. All steel section before any work is done on them
shall be carefully leveled, straightened and made true to detailed
drawings by methods which will not damage the materials so that when
assembled the adjacent matching surfaces are in close contact
throughout. No rough edges shall be permitted in the entire structures.
Hammering is not permitted for straightening.
2.18.10 Cutting may be done by shearing, cropping, flame
cutting or sawing. The surface so cut shall be cleaned smooth,
reasonably square and free from deformation and distortion.

2.19 BENDING :
2.19.1 Mild steel angle sections up to 75x75 mm (up to 6mm
thick) shall bent cold up to and including bend angle of 10° Angles.
Above 75x75mm (thickness up to 6mm) and up to and including
100x100 mm (thickness up to 8 mm) may also be bent cold up to the
bend angle of 5 Deg. All other angle sections and bend angles not
covered above shall be bent hot.
2.19.2 All plates up to 12mm thickness shall be bent cold up to a
maximum bend angle of 15 Deg. Plates of thickness more than 12mm
with bends greater than 15 Degree shall be bent hot.
2.19.3 All hot bend material shall be air-cooled. The bends shall
be of even profile and free from any surface damages.

2.20 DRILLING AND PUNCHING :


2.20.1 The holes in the member shall either be drilled or punched
with a jig; the former process will be preferred.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 26 of 190


Volume-V

2.20.2 Punching may be adopted for sections upto 12 mm


thickness. For thicker sections drilling shall be done.
2.20.3 The holes shall be punched/drilled after bending
and related position of these holes shall be maintained with the use
of proper templates/jigs and fixtures.
2.20.4 The holes shall be perfectly circular and no tolerance in this
respect is permissible. The holes shall be perpendicular to the plate and
angle flanges.
2.20.5 Holes must be square with the plates or angles and have
their walls parallel.
2.20.6 All burrs left by drills or punch shall be removed completely.
When the tower members are in positions, the holes shall be truly
opposite to each other. Drilling or ramming to enlarge defective holes
shall not be permitted.
2.20.7 The minimum spacing of bolt and edge distance shall be as
under: -

(a) For 16 mm dia bolt edge distance of 20 mm from hole


center to rolled or swaned edge and 23mm from hole center
to sheared or flame cut edge, hole center to hole center
distance minimum 40mm (the hole size being 17.5mm).

(b) The gap between the edges of the connected members in


butt joint shall not be more than 6mm and less than 4mm.

(c) The bolt gauge distance in flanges of angle


sections shall generally be in accordance with
Table XXXI of SF6 (1)-1961-ISI “Hand Book for structural
Engineers-Structural Steel Sections (Revised).”

2.21 TOLERANCES :
2.21.1 The maximum allowable difference in the diameter of the hole
on the two sides of the plate or angle shall not exceed 0.8 mm on
diameter. The allowable taper in drilled/punched hole shall not exceed
0.8 mm on diameter.
2.21.2 The tolerance cumulative or between consecutive holes
shall be within +/-0.5mm.
2.21.3 The tolerance on the overall length of member shall be
within +/- 1.6 mm.
2.21.4 The tolerance on gauge distance shall be within +/- 0.5mm.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 27 of 190


Volume-V

2.21.5 Rolling and weight tolerance of steel sections shall be as per


Indian Standard: 1852 or equivalent International Standard and Indian
Standard: 808 or equivalent International Standard.

2.22 MARKING :
Every member shall be distinctly given punch mark similar to those
given in structural drawings. The mark shall be given with marking
dies of minimum 18 mm size and this mark shall be legible. Letter
XMPTBA, XMPTBB and XMPTBC for 220kV and XMPTEA, XMPTEB and
XMPTEC for 132kV shall precede erection mark where ‘X’ stands for
manufacturer’s name, ‘MPT’ stands for Madhya Pradesh Power
Transmission Company and BA, BB & BC stands for B0, B30 & B60 type
towers and EA, EB & EC stands for E0, E30 & E60 type towers
respectively. For other types of towers, similar marking scheme shall
be followed and shall be conveyed to successful bidder.

2.23 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM :


The contractor shall submit the Quality Assurance Programme as
specified in clause 1.12 Section-1 of the biding document. A copy of the
accepted Quality Assurance Plan must be available at the
manufacturer’s works of the Plant for reviewing by inspecting officer of
the employer.

2.24 INSPECTION OF PROTOTYPES :


2.24.1 Proto type of each type of structure/extensions shall be
offered by the successful bidder for inspection within three month’s
time from the date of contract.
2.24.2 Notwithstanding any thing covered in the drawings and
other details furnished by the Employer, the successful bidder shall
make minor modifications, if any, in length, size, notching etc.
according to the proto assembly which are necessary for easy assembly
of the structure.

2.25 INSPECTION :
2.25.1 As specified in clause 1.13 Section-1 of the biding
document, Plant to be supplied will be subject to inspection and
approval by the Employer's representative before despatch.
2.25.2 Each consignment ready for transportation shall be offered
to the Employer for inspection before dispatch giving a minimum time
of not less than fifteen days. Only complete sets of towers/extensions
shall be offered for inspection. All materials constituting towers (Steel
parts, Bolts & nuts, spring and pack washers, earthing sets) shall be
offered simultaneously. Samples of fabricated tower materials and
accessories shall be subjected to tests as per relevant Indian Standard
or equivalent International Standard. The Employer shall be kept

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 28 of 190


Volume-V

informed about the source of procurement of raw-steel, particularly


through re-rollers. The Employer reserves right to inspect and get the
samples of raw-steel tested as per Indian Standard-2062 and relevant
standards or equivalent International Standard. The cost of testing
shall be borne by the bidder.
2.25.3 The Contractor shall keep the Employer informed in
advance of the time of starting and of the progress of manufacture and
fabrication of structures at various stages.
2.25.4 In case, any member of the structure is not found to
comply with the relevant drawing, it shall be liable for rejection even
after receipt.
2.25.5 Defects, which may appear during fabrication, shall be
made good. Any member once rejected shall be cut into pieces in front
of the Employer’s representative so that it is not offered again by
mistake.

2.26 GENERAL GUIDE-LINE FOR INSPECTION :


2.26.1 Fabricated Structure Members :
(i) Visual examination and quantity verification of offered lot.
(ii) Sample selection from the offered lot at a ratio of 40 MT
(or part thereof) 1 no. each for all tests.
(iii) Dimension, fabrication and trueness verification of
structure member from fabrication sketch.
(iv) Galvanising test of each sample i.e. dip test, hammer test
and mass of zinc test.
(v) Random verification of Zinc coating of galvanized surface
by Alko-meter.
(vi) Tensile test and bend test of each sample.
(vii) Chemical composition test of at least two samples per
offered lot of 50 MT for inspection.
(viii) Verification of manufacturer’s test certificate for mild steel
used in structure members.
2.26.2 Bolts-Nuts, Washer, Accessories, Attachments etc.: (To be
carried out at manufacturers works of these items)
(i) Visual examination and quantity verification of offered lot.
(ii) Sample selection from the offered lot as per relevant Indian
Standard for each item.
(iii) Dimension, fabrication and trueness verification from
fabrication sketch.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 29 of 190


Volume-V

(iv) Galvanising test of each sample.


(v) Other acceptance tests for respective items as per relevant
Indian standard.
2.26.3 The supplier shall submit the factory test certificates of
bought out accessories at the time of acceptance tests of towers.
2.26.4 Since at the time of inspection only fabricated tower
members and accessories will be verified, acceptance of any lot shall in
no way relieve the bidder of his responsibility to meet all technical
requirements of this specification for fabricated towers. In case any
shortcoming is noticed at the time of actual assembly and erection, the
Employer may reject any part or item or accessory and the contractor
will have to assume the responsibility for free replacement/rectification
of such defects.

2.27 PACKING AND MARKING ON PACKING :


2.27.1 The material shall be boxed or bundled for transport in the
following manner:
(i) Angle shall be packed in bundles securely wrapped four times
around at each end and over 900 mm with No.9 SWG steel wire
with ends twisted tightly. Gross weight of any bundle shall not
be less than 450 Kg and more than 2000 Kg. The bundle shall
be in complete Tower form only.
(ii) Cleat angles, brackets, filler plates and similar small loose pieces
shall be nested and bolted together through holes and wrapped
around at least four times with No.9 SWG wire with ends twisted
tightly or packed in wooden crates. Gross weight of each bundle
shall not exceed 200 Kg.
(iii) Correct number of bolts, nuts and washers required for
structures shall be packed in heavy gunny bags accurately
tagged in accordance with the contents and a number of bags
packed in a solid box of 22mm thick lumber with paneled ends to
be accurately nailed and further reinforced with 22 mm x 75 mm
Batons round the sides and at the ends with 25 mm x No.18
SWG iron band stretched entirely around the batons with ends
overlapping at least 150mm. Gross weight of each box shall not
exceed 200 Kg.
(iv) Packing list incorporating all relevant details e.g. quantity of
structures (complete sets), number and size of steel sections,
quantity of nuts, bolts, washers etc. shall be forwarded along
with each consignment.
(v) In the nutshell the packing arrangement should be such that all
lots of one particular type of structure are identifiable at site for
the purpose of allocation for a particular work. In case more than

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 30 of 190


Volume-V

one structure of a particular type is delivered in area store/work


site, combined packing arrangement by way of clubbing
members of similar type (for more than one structure) in a
combined package should not be done. Uniform packing
procedure for each structure should be adopted.
2.27.2 All above packing are subject to the approval of the
Employer or his appointed representatives.
2.27.3 Each bundle or packing shall have the following marks:
(i) The name of the consignee (as per dispatch instructions given by
the Employer).
(ii) Ultimate destination as required by the Employer.
(iii) The relevant marks and number of structure members or
reference or bolts, nuts and small components like gusset plats,
various attachment, etc. for easy identification.
2.27.4 The marking shall be stenciled and indelibly inked on the
top members in the bundles, on wooden boxes and also on gunny bas
containing smaller components.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 31 of 190


Volume-V

SECTION-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONDUCTOR
3.01 STANDARDS:

This section provides for standard design, manufacture, stage testing,


inspection and testing before despatch, packing and delivery of Steel
Cored Aluminium Conductors specified hereunder for their satisfactory
operation. The power conductors shall conform to the following Indian
Standards, which shall mean latest revisions, amendments/changes
adopted and published, unless otherwise specified hereinbefore:

Sr. Indian Standards Title


No. or any Equivalent
International
Standard

1 IS:209 -1990 Specification for Zinc


2 IS:398 Part I to Part Specification for Aluminium
V Conductors for overhead
(as relevant) Transmission purpose
3 IS:1778 Reels and drums for Bare wires

4 IS:1521 Method of Tensile Testing of Steel


wire
5 IS:2629 -1990 Recommended practice for Hot Dip
Galvanising Iron and Steel
6 IS:2633 -1990 Method of Testing Uniformity of
Zinc coating of Zinc coated
Articles.
7 IS:4826 Galvanised coating on Round Steel
wire
8 IS:6745 -1990 Method of Determination of weight
of Zinc coating of zinc coated Iron
and Steel Articles
9 IS:8263 Method of Radio Interference Tests
10 IS:1841 EC Grade Aluminium Rod produced
by rolling
11 IS:5484 EC grade Aluminium Rod produced
by continuous casting and rolling
12 IS: 2141 -1990 Method of Elongation test of steel
wire

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 32 of 190


Volume-V

3.02 PARAMETERS :

Sr. No. Details of Stranded ACSR ACSR


Conductor Zebra Panther

3.02.01 Principal Parameters of Stranded Conductor:

a) No. of Strands Aluminium- Aluminium-


54 30
Steel –7 Steel-7
i. Steel Centre 1 1
ii. 1st Steel Layer 6 6
iii. 1st Aluminium Layer 12 12
iv. 2nd Aluminium Layer 18 18
v. 3rd Aluminium Layer 24 -
b) Sectional Area of Aluminium 428.9 212.10
(Sq.mm)
c) Total Sectional Area (Sq.mm) 484.50 261.60
d) Overall diameter(mm) 28.62 21.00
e) Approximate weight (Kg/Km ) 1621 976
f) Calculated D.C. Resistance at 0.06915 0.139
20 Deg.C (Ohm/Km)
g) Minimum UTS (kN) 130.32 89.67
h) Modulus of Elasticity 69 80
GN/SqMtr

3.02.02 The details of Aluminium Strand are as follows :

a) Minimum breaking load of 1.29 1.17


strand Before stranding (kN)
b) Minimum breaking load of 1.23 1.11
strand after stranding (kN)
c) Maximum D.C. resistance of 3.651 4.107
strand at 20 deg.C (Ohm/Km)
d) Nominal Strand Dia 3.18 3.00
e) Max. Strand Dia 3.21 3.03
f) Min. Strand Dia 3.18 3.00
g) Mass (Kg/Km) of Strand at 21.47 19.11

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 33 of 190


Volume-V

Nominal dia

3.02.03 The details of Steel Strand are as follows:

a) Minimum breaking load of 10.43 9.29


strand Before stranding (kN)
b) Minimum breaking load of 9.91 8.83
strand after stranding (kN)
c) Nominal Strand Dia 3.18 3.00
d) Maximum Strand Dia 3.24 3.06
e) Minimum Strand Dia 3.18 3.00
f) Mass (Kg/Km) of Strand at 61.95 55.18
Nom. dia
g) Zinc coating testing 3 dips of 1 3 dips of 1
min. each min.each
h) Wt. Of Zinc Coating 260gms/sq. 260gms/sq.
metre Metre

3.03 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS : MATERIAL AND


WORKMANSHIP (FOR ACSR ZEBRA & ACSR PANTHER):

3.03.01 Materials:

The conductors shall be manufactured from EC grade aluminium rods


suitably hard-drawn on wire drawing machines. The aluminium rods
used shall comply with IS: 1841 and IS: 5484 or any equivalent
International Standard. The mechanical and electrical properties of
aluminium wire shall comply with the requirements given in relevant
standard.

3.03.02 Physical constants for Hard-drawn Aluminium:

3.03.02.1 Resistivity:

The resistivity of aluminium depends upon its purity and its physical
condition. For the purpose of this specification the maximum value
permitted is 0.28264 Ohm sq.mm/mt. at 20° C and this value has been
used for calculation of the maximum permissible value of resistance.
NOTE: It is not intended to check the resistivity from the measured
values of resistance.

3.03.02.2 Density:

At a temperature of 20° C the density of hard drawn aluminium has


been taken as 2.703 g/cm.3

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 34 of 190


Volume-V

3.03.02.3 Constant-Mass Temperature Co-efficient of


Resistance:

At a temperature of 20°C, the constant-mass temperature co-efficient


of resistance of hard drawn aluminium measured between two potential
points rigidly fixed to the wire, the metal being allowed to expand
freely, has been taken as 0.004 per degree Celsius.
3.03.02.4 Co-efficient of Linear Expansion:
The co-efficient of linear expansion of hard-drawn aluminium at 0° C
has been taken as 23.0 x 10 -6 per ° C. This value holds good for all
practical purposes over the range of temperature from 0 ° C to highest
safe operating temperature.
3.03.03 Galvanised steel wire shall be drawn from high carbon steel
rods produced by either acidic or basic open hearth process, electric
furnace process or basic oxygen process. The mechanical and electrical
properties of wire shall comply with the requirements given in relevant
standard. The chemical composition of high carbon steel wires is given
below for guidance only.
Element Percentage Composition
Carbon 0.5 to 0.85
Maganese 0.50 to 1.10
Phosphorous Not more than 0.035
Sulphur Not more than 0.045
Silicon 0.10 to 0.35
3.03.03.1 Physical constants for Galvanised steel wires:
3.03.03.1.1 Density :
At a temperature of 20° C, the density of galvanized steel wire is to be
taken as 7.80 g/Cm3.
3.03.03.1.2 Coefficient of Linear Expansion :
In order to obtain uniformity in calculation a value of 11.5 x 10 -6 per °
C may be taken as the value for the co-efficient of Linear Expansion of
galvanized steel wires used for the cores of steel-reinforced aluminium
conductors.
3.03.03.1.3 The zinc used for galvanizing shall be electrolytic
high-grade Zinc not less than 99.95 percent purity. It shall conform to
and satisfy all the requirements of IS: 209. Galvanising may be done
either by hot process or electrolytic process. Minimum weight of Zinc
coating shall be 260 g/sq. metre. Neutral grease may be applied
between the layers of wire.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 35 of 190


Volume-V

3.03.03.1.4 Freedom From Defects:


The wires shall be smooth and free from all imperfections such as spills,
slag inclusion, die marks, scratches, fittings, blow-holes, projections,
looseness, overlapping of strands, chipping of aluminium layers etc. and
all such other defects which may hamper the mechanical and electrical
properties of the conductor. Special care should be taken to keep away
dirt, grit etc. during stranding.
3.04 Wire Sizes
3.04.01 Nominal Size:
The aluminium and galvanized steel wires for the stranded conductor
covered by this standard shall have diameters specified in clause
3.02.02 & 3.02.03. The diameter of the steel wires shall be measured
over the zinc coating.
3.04.02 Tolerances on Nominal Size :
Tolerance of + 1% is permitted on the nominal diameter of
Aluminium Wires of Panther and Zebra Conductor and a tolerance of +
2 % is permitted on the nominal diameter of Galvanised Steel Core
Wire.
3.05 JOINTS IN WIRES:
3.05.01 Aluminium Wires:
No joints shall be permitted in the aluminium wires in the outermost
layer of the ACSR Conductor. Joints in the inner layers are permitted, in
addition to those made in the base rod or wire before final drawing, but
no two such joints shall be less than 15 mtr. apart in the complete
stranded conductor. Such joints shall be made only by cold pressure
butt-welding. It may please be noted that Joints are not permitted in
the outermost layer of the conductor in order to ensure a smooth
conductor finish and reduce radio interference levels and corona losses
on extra high voltage lines.
3.05.02 Galvanised Steel Wires:
There shall be no joints except those made in the base rods or wires
before final drawing, in steel wires forming the core of the steel-
reinforced aluminium conductor. Joints are not permitted in the steel
wires after final drawing also in order to avoid reduction in the breaking
strength of the conductor that may occur as a result of failure of the
joints.

3.06 STRANDING :
3.06.01 The wires used in the construction of galvanized steel
reinforced aluminium conductor, before stranding, shall satisfy all the
relevant requirements of this specification.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 36 of 190


Volume-V

3.06.02 The lay ratio of the different layers shall be within the limits
given in the Table below:-

Type of Ratio of Lay Ratios Lay Ratios for Aluminium wires (3


conductor Alu. wire of Steel Alu. Wire Layer Conductors)
diameter core 6
to steel wire layer Layer
Outermost immediately Innermost
wire layer Layer
diameter beneath
outer most
layer

Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.

Panther
1 13 28 10 14 10 16 - -
AL -30 Wire
ST. - 7 Wire
Zebra
1 13 28 10 14 10 16 10 17
AL -54 Wire
ST. - 7 Wire
NOTE : For the purpose of calculation, the mean lay ratio shall
be taken as the arithmetic mean of the relevant
minimum and maximum values given in this table.
3.06.03 In all constructions, the successive layers shall have opposite
directions of lay, the outermost layer being right-handed. The wires in
each layer shall be evenly and closely stranded.
3.06.04 In conductors having multiple layers of aluminium wires, the
lay ratio of any aluminium layer shall not be greater than the lay ratio
of the aluminium layer immediately beneath it.
3.06.05 The finished Conductor shall have a smooth surface without
any surface cut, abrasion, scuff marks and shall be free from dirt, grit,
etc. even if the damage to conductor is acceptable from mechanical
considerations. It will not be acceptable from electrical considerations,
and full care should be taken not to supply damaged conductor.
Projections of more than 2 mils shall not be acceptable. Any such
damage shall be properly rectified or new conductor supplied.
3.06.06 Failure of any sample to meet the above requirements shall be
sufficient cause for rejection of the lengths of conductor represented by
the sample. Particular care shall, therefore, be taken during
manufacture, handling, packing and transportation of the conductor, to
see that the surface is not dented, cut or damaged in any way.
3.07 STANDARD LENGTH :
3.07.01 The standard length of conductor shall be 1500 metres. A
tolerance of +/-5% on the standard length offered by the Contractor
shall be permitted. All lengths outside this limit of tolerance shall be
treated as random lengths.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 37 of 190


Volume-V

3.07.02 Contractor shall also indicate the maximum single length,


above the standard length, they can manufacture. This is required for
special stretches like river crossing etc.
3.08 GALVANISING:
3.08.01 All the wires of Iron & steel strand shall be galvanized in
accordance with IS-2629-1990. ‘Recommended practice for hot dip
galvanizing of Iron and Steel’ or some other authoritative equivalent
standard.
3.09 TESTS :
3.09.01 The conductor offered shall be type tested as per the relevant
standards. Further the acceptance, routine tests and tests during
manufacture shall be carried out on the conductor.
3.09.02 Acceptance tests shall mean those tests, which are to be
carried out on samples taken from each lot offered for pre-despatch
inspection, for the purpose of acceptance of that lot.
3.09.03 Routine tests shall mean those tests which are to be carried
out on each strand/spool/length of the conductor to check requirements
which are likely to vary during production.
3.09.04 Tests during manufacture shall mean those tests, which are to
be carried out during the process of manufacture and end inspection by
the Contractor to ensure the desired quality of the end product to be
supplied by him.
3.09.05 The norms and procedure of sampling for these tests will be as
per the Quality Assurance Programme to be mutually agreed to by the
Contractor and the Employer.
3.09.06 The standards to which these tests will be carried out are listed
in para 3.01. Where a particular test is a specific requirement of this
specification, the norms and procedures of the test shall be as mutually
agreed to between the Contractor and the Employer in the Quality
Assurance Programme.
3.09.07 For all type and acceptance tests, the acceptance values shall
be the values guaranteed by the Contractor in the “Technical
Questionnaire” or the acceptance value specified in this specification,
whichever is more stringent for that particular test.
3.09.08 Type Tests :
The Conductor offered shall be fully type tested for the following tests
as per the relevant International/Indian Standard and the bidder shall
furnish the report along with the offer.

a) UTS test on stranded conductor


b) DC resistance test on stranded conductor
c) Stress-strain test on composite conductor

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 38 of 190


Volume-V

3.09.09 Acceptance Tests :


a) Visual and dimensional check
b) Visual check for joints, scratches etc. and lengths of
conductor
c) Dimensional check on steel and aluminium strands
d) Check for lay ratios of various layers
e) Galvanising test on steel strands
f) Torsion and Elongation test on steel wire
g) Breaking load test on steel and aluminium strands
h) Wrap test on steel and aluminium strands
i) DC resistance test on aluminium strands
j) UTS test on welded joint of aluminium strand
NOTE: All the above tests except test mentioned at (j) shall be carried
out on aluminium and steel strands after stranding only.
3.09.10 Routine Test :
a) Check to ensure that the joints are as per specification.
b) Check that there are no cuts, fins etc. on the strands.
c) Check that drums are as per specifications.
d) All acceptance tests as mentioned in Clause 3.09.09 above
shall be carried out on each coil.
3.09.11 Tests During Manufacture :
a) Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanizing
b) Chemical analysis of aluminium for making aluminium
strands
c) Chemical analysis of steel used for making steel strands
3.09.12 Additional Tests:
The Employer reserves the right of having at his own expenses any
other test(s) of reasonable nature carried out at Contractor’s premises,
at site, or in any other place in addition to the aforesaid type,
acceptance and routine tests to satisfy himself that the material comply
with the specification.
3.09.13 Test Reports
(a) Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the
Contractor at his works for periodic inspection by the
Employer’s representative.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 39 of 190


Volume-V

(b) Test Certificates of test during manufacture shall be


maintained by the Contractor. These shall be produced for
verification as and when desired by the Employer.
3.09.14 Test Facilities
The following additional test facilities shall be available at Contractor’s
Works.
(a) Calibration of various testing and measuring equipment
including tensile testing machine, resistance measurement
facilities, burette, thermometer, barometer etc.
(b) Standard resistance for calibration of resistance bridges.
(c) Finished conductor shall be checked for length verification
and surface finish on separate rewinding machine at
reduced speed (variable from 8 to 16 metres per minute).
The rewinding facilities shall have appropriate clutch system
and free of vibrations, jerks etc. with transverse layering
facilities.

3.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM

The contractor shall submit the Quality Assurance Programme as


specified in clause 1.12 Section-1 of the biding document. A copy of the
accepted Quality Assurance Plan must be available at the
manufacturer’s works of the Plant for reviewing by inspecting officer of
the employer.

3.11 INSPECTION :

3.11.01 As specified in clause 1.13 Section-1 of the biding document,


Plant to be supplied will be subject to inspection and approval by the
Employer's representative before despatch.

3.11.02 At least 5% of the total number of drums subject to minimum


of two in any lot put up for inspection, shall be selected at random to
ascertain the length of conductor by following method:

“At the works of the manufacturer the conductor shall be


transferred from one drum to another at the same time measuring its
length with the help of graduated pulley and Cyclometer. The difference
in the average length thus obtained and as declared by the Contractor
in the packing list shall be applied to all the drums if the conductor is
found short during checking”

3.11.03 The supplier shall submit the factory test certificates of raw
materials & bought out accessories at the time of acceptance tests of
the Conductor.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 40 of 190


Volume-V

3.12 PACKING AND FORWARDING :

3.12.01 The conductor shall be supplied in non-returnable strong


wooden drums provided with lagging of adequate strength, to protect
the conductor against all damage and displacement during transit,
storage and subsequent handling and stringing operations in the field.
The drums shall generally conform to IS: 1778 except otherwise
specified hereinafter.
3.12.02 The drums shall be suitable for wheel mounting and for jetting
off the conductor under a minimum controlled tension of the order of
5kN.
3.12.03 The standard drum drawings are enclosed. However,
Contractor should submit the proposed drum drawings along with the
bid. The same shall be in line with the requirements of standard
drawings and as stated herein. The Contractor shall submit four copies
of fully dimensioned drawing of the drum he wishes to supply, for
Employer’s approval, before taking up manufacturing of conductor.
3.12.04 All wooden components shall be manufactured out of seasoned
soft wood free from such defects that may materially weaken the
component part of the drums. Preservative treatment for anti-termite
/anti-fungus (Aldrine/Aldruse) shall be applied to the entire drum with
preservatives of a quality which is not chemically harmful to the
conductor.
3.12.05 The flanges shall be of two/three ply construction with each
ply at right angles to the other and nailed together. Further the outer
face of the flange shall be reinforced with the circumferential battens,
fixing in octagonal shape. The nails shall be driven from the inside face
of flange, punched and then clenched on the outer face. The tolerance
in thickness of each ply shall be +/- 3 mm only. There shall be at least
3 nails per plank of ply with maximum nail spacing of 75 mm. Where a
slot is cut in the flange to receive the inner end of the conductor, the
entrance shall be in line with the periphery of the barrel. Spindle hole
shall be provided at the centers of the planks of the plies and spindle
plates with 102 mm dia. Holes shall be fitted on either side of both the
flanges.
3.12.06 The wooden battens used for making the barrel of the
conductor shall be of segmental type. These shall be nailed to the
barrel supports with at least two nails. The battens shall be closely
butted and shall provide a round barrel with smooth external surface.
The edges of the battens shall be rounded or chamfered to avoid
damage to the conductor.
3.12.07 Barrel studs shall be used for construction of drums. The
flanges shall be holed and the barrel supports slotted to receive
them. The barrel studs shall be threaded over a length on either end,
sufficient to accommodate washers, spindle plates and nuts for fixing

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 41 of 190


Volume-V

flanges at the required spacing. Barrel studs should be tack welded with
the nuts after tightening.
3.12.08 Normally, the nuts on the studs shall stand protrude of the
flanges. All the nails used on the inner surface of the flanges and the
drum barrel shall be counter sunk. The ends of barrel shall generally be
flushed with the top of the nuts.
3.12.09 The inner cheek of the flanges and drum barrel surface shall
be painted with bitumen based paint.
3.12.10 Before reeling, cardboard or double corrugated or thick
bituminised waterproof bamboo paper shall be secured to the drum
barrel and inside of flanges or the drum by means of a suitable
commercial adhesive material. The paper should be dried before use.
Medium grade craft paper shall be used in between the layer of the
conductor/Earth wire /OPGW. After reeling the conductor the exposed
surface of the outer layer of conductor shall be wrapped with thin
polythene sheet across the flanges to preserve the conductor from dirt,
grit and damage during transportation and handling and also to prevent
ingress of rain water during storage/transport.
3.12.11 Minimum space of 125 mm shall be provided between the
inner surface of the external protective layer and outer layer of the
conductor.
3.12.12 Each batten shall be securely nailed across grains as far as
possible to the flange edges with at least 2 nails per end. The length of
the nails shall not be less than twice the thickness of the battens. The
nail shall not protrude above the general surface and shall not have
exposed sharp edges or allow the battens to be released due to
corrosion.
3.12.13 Outside the protective layer, there shall be minimum of two
binder consisting of hoop iron/galvanized steel wire. Each protective
layer shall have two recess to accommodate the binders.
3.12.14 The conductor ends shall be properly sealed and secured with
the help of U-nails on one side of the flanges. The end securing shall be
done by taking out at least 500 mm of steel core on either ends by U-
nails. The composite conductor shall be binded by use of galvanized
steel wire/aluminum wire at three locations at least 75 mm apart or
more covered with PVC adhesive tape so as to avoid loosening of
conductor layers in transit and handling.
3.12.15 Only one length of conductor shall be wound on each drum.
3.13 MARKING :
Each drum shall have the following information stenciled on it in
indelible ink along with other essential data:
i. Contract

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 42 of 190


Volume-V

ii. Name and address of consignee


iii. Manufacturer’s name and address
iv. Drum number
v. Size of conductor
vi. Length of conductor in metres
vii. Gross weight of drum with conductor
viii. Weight of empty drum with protective lagging
ix. Arrow marking for unwinding
3.14 END SEALING:
Both the ends of each length of conductor should be provided with non-
destructive type metal crimped or epoxy capped seals with punching
embossing/ engraving of manufacturer’s monogram and drum number.
***

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 43 of 190


Volume-V

SECTION- 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR
HIGH TENSILE GALVANISED STEEL EARTH WIRE

4.01 STANDARDS:
The High Tensile Galvanised Steel Earth Wire shall conform to the
following Indian Standards, which shall mean latest revisions,
amendments/changes adopted and published, unless otherwise
specified hereinbefore.
Indian Standards
S. Title
or any Equivalent
No.
International
Standard
1 IS:209 -1992 Specification for Zinc
2 IS:2141 -1992 Specification for Earth wire for
overhead Transmission purpose
3 IS:1778 Reels and drums for Bare wires
4 IS:1521 Method of Tensile Testing of Steel
wire
5 IS:2629 -1992 Recommended practice for Hot Dip
Galvanising Iron and Steel
6 IS:2633 -1992 Method of Testing Uniformity of
Zinc coating of Zinc coated Articles.
7 IS:4826 Galvanised coating on Round Steel
wire
8 IS:6745 -1992 Method of Determination of weight
of Zinc coating of zinc coated Iron
and Steel Articles
9 IS: 12776 Method of Testing of Earth wire

4.02 PARAMETERS:

4.02.01 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS OF EARTH WIRE:

The standard technical particulars of 7/3.66mm galvanized steel


earth wire shall be as follows:-

a. The details of Steel strand:

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 44 of 190


Volume-V

i. Material Steel
ii. Stranding 7
iii. Weight per Km 583 Kgs
iv. Dia. of wire 3.66 mm
v Tolerance 2%
vi Minimum elongation in 100 mm 5 mm
length
vii Minimum breaking strength per 1000 Kg
strand
viii Minimum tensile strength 95 Kg./mm2
ix D.C. resistance at 20 Deg. C 17.15 Ohms/Km

b. The details of Stranded Earth Wire :


i. Maximum Length of Lay 198
ii. Minimum Length of Lay 165
iii. Minimum breaking load 6972 Kgs
iv. Overall diameter 10.98mm
v Modulus of elasticity 1.933 x 106
2
Kg./cm
vi Co-efficient of linear expansion 11.50 x 10- 6

per Deg.C
2
vii Weight of zinc coating on wire 260 gms./ m
(Min.)
viii No. of one minute dip and half 3 one minute
minute dip respectively and 1 half
minute
ix Calculated d.c. Resistance at 20 2.5 Ohms per
Deg.C Km

4.03 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT : MATERIAL AND


WORKMANSHIP FOR EARTH WIRE:
4.03.01 The steel wire (strands) used in manufacture of galvanized
steel earth wire shall be drawn from steel wire rod produced by either
acid or basic open hearth process or by the electric furnace process or
basic oxygen process. The steel wire shall not have sulphur and
phosphorous contents exceeding 0.045% each. The carbon content
shall not exceed 0.55%. The steel produced by bassemer process shall
not be used for drawing of steel wire strands. The finished earth wire
shall have minimum brittleness as it will be subjected to continuous
vibration while in use on line.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 45 of 190


Volume-V

4.03.02 The steel wire shall be hot dip galvanized and shall have
zinc coating of minimum 260 gram per sq. meter of the uncoated wire
surface. The zinc coating shall be smooth and continuous of uniform
thickness, free from imperfections not consistent with good commercial
practice and shall meet the test requirement. The zinc used in
galvanizing of earth wire shall be as per IS: 209-1992.
4.03.03 All the steel wires shall be circular, smooth, uniform and
free from imperfections, such as spills and splits, die marks scratches,
abrasions, cuts and kinks etc. drawing and after stranding.
4.03.04 The steel wires, after galvanizing shall be bright in
appearance, smooth and free from all defects like flux, ash, cross
inclusions, bare and black spots, pimples, lumpiness in runs, rust,
stains, bulky white deposits and blisters.
4.03.05 To avoid susceptibility towards wet storage stains (white
rust) the stranded earth wire shall be provided with a protective coating
of boiled linseed oil.
4.03.06 The finished earth wire shall have a smooth surface without
any surface cuts, abrasions, scuff marks and shall be free from dirt, grit
etc.
4.03.07 Failure of any sample to meet the above requirements shall
be sufficient cause for rejection of the lot of earth wire represented by
the sample, particular care shall therefore be taken during
manufacture, handling, packing and transportation of the earth wire so
that it is not dented, cut or damaged in any way.

4.04 SIZE AND PROPERTIES:


4.04.01 The earth wire size, physical properties, tolerance in
diameter of individual strands and length of lay of the strand shall be as
given above.
4.04.02 The wires shall be so stranded together that when an
evenly distributed pulls is applied at the end of completed strands,
each wire will take an equal share of the pull.
4.04.03 The earth wire shall be supplied in the standard lengths
which shall not be less than 3 Km. Not less than 95% of the total
quantity of the earth wire shall be supplied in standard lengths. The
quantity of earth wire in length shorter than standard one shall not
exceeds 5% of the total quantity to be supplied. Further, no single
earth wire length in respect of such 5% (maximum) supply in random
lengths shall be shorter than 50% of the standard length.
4.04.04 The length of the stranded wire shall be supplied without
joints in the individual wires comprising it, excluding welds made in
base rod before it is drawn.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 46 of 190


Volume-V

4.04.05 Each coil be warranted to contain no welds, joints or splice


other than in the base rod before it is drawn.

4.05 GALVANISING AND OILING:


4.05.01 All the wires of the strand shall be galvanized in accordance
with IS-2629-1990. Recommended practice for Hot dip galvanizing of
Iron and Steel of some other authoritative equivalent standard.
4.05.02 The galvanized earth wire after stranding operation shall
have dipped in boiled linseed oil before winding it on drums.
4.06 TEST FOR EARTH WIRE :
4.06.01 Earth wire shall be subjected, before despatch from the
works to tests as specified in the IS-2141, IS 1521, IS 1755 & IS
4826 or any other authoritative equivalent standard.
4.06.02 All the drums of galvanized steel stranded earth wire of the
same grade, diameter and construction, manufactured under similar
condition shall be grouped to constitute one lot.
4.06.03 Samples from each lot shall be tested for ascertaining the
conformity to the requirements of the earth wire specified herein. The
drums selected shall be tested for length of the lay and diameter of
individual strands etc. The lot shall be declared conforming to the
requirement of these characteristics if all the samples are found
satisfactory. One test specimen from each wire of the strand shall now
be drawn from every selected drum and subjected to chemical analysis,
tensile tests, ductility test, elongation test and coating test. One test
specimen, of the completed strand from each drum shall be subjected
to tensile strength. The lot shall be declared conforming to the
requirements of these characteristics, if the entire test specimen
satisfies the relevant requirement.
4.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM
The contractor shall submit the Quality Assurance Programme as
specified in clause 1.12 Section-1 of the biding document. A copy of the
accepted Quality Assurance Plan must be available at the
manufacturer’s works of the Plant for reviewing by inspecting officer of
the employer.

4.08 INSPECTION :
4.08.01 As specified in clause 1.13 Section-1 of the biding
document, Plant to be supplied will be subject to inspection and
approval by the Employer's representative before despatch.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 47 of 190


Volume-V

4.08.02 At least 5% of the total number of drums subject to


minimum of two in any lot put up for inspection, shall be selected at
random to ascertain the length of earth wire by following method:
“At the works of the manufacturer of the earth wire, the earth
wire shall be transferred from one drum to another at the same
time measuring its length with the help of graduated pulley and
Cyclometer. The difference in the average length thus obtained
and as declared by the Contractor in the packing list shall be
applied to all the drums if the conductor/earth wire is found
short during checking.”
4.08.03 The supplier shall submit the factory test certificates of raw
materials & bought out accessories at the time of acceptance tests of
the earth wire.
4.09 PACKING AND FORWARDING:
4.09.01 The earth wire shall be supplied in strong wooden drums
provided with lagging of adequate strength, to protect the
conductor/earth wire against all damage and displacement during
transit, storage and subsequent handling and stringing operations in
the field. The drums shall generally conform to IS: 1778 except
otherwise specified hereinafter.
4.09.02 The drums shall be suitable for wheel mounting and for
jetting off the conductor/earth wire under a minimum controlled
tension of the order of 5kN.
4.09.03 The standard drum drawings are enclosed. However,
Contractor should submit the proposed drum drawings along with the
bid. The same shall be in line with the requirements of standard
drawings and as stated herein. The Contractor shall submit four copies
of fully dimensioned drawing of the drum he wishes to supply, for
Employer’s approval, before taking up manufacturing of earth wire.
4.09.04 All wooden components shall be manufactured out of
seasoned soft wood free from such defects that may materially
weaken the component part of the drums. Preservative treatment for
anti-termite /anti-fungus (Aldrine/Aldruse) shall be applied to the entire
drum with preservatives of a quality which is not harmful to the earth
wire.
4.09.05 The flanges shall be of two/three ply construction with each
ply at right angles to the other and nailed together. Further the outer
face of the flange shall be reinforced with the circumferential battens,
fixing in octagonal shape. The nails shall be driven from the inside face
of flange, punched and then clenched on the outer face. The tolerance
in thickness of each ply shall be +/- 3 mm only. There shall be at least
3 nails per plank of ply with maximum nail spacing of 75 mm. Where a
slot is cut in the flange to receive the inner end of the conductor/earth
wire, the entrance shall be in line with the periphery of the barrel.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 48 of 190


Volume-V

Spindle hole shall be provided at the centers of the planks of the plies
and spindle plates with 102 mm dia. Holes shall be fitted on either side
of both the flanges.
4.09.06 The wooden battens used for making the barrel of the earth
wire shall be of segmental type. These shall be nailed to the barrel
supports with at least two nails. The battens shall be closely butted and
shall provide a round barrel with smooth external surface. The edges of
the battens shall be rounded or chamfered to avoid damage to the
earth wire.
4.09.07 Barrel studs shall be used for construction of drums. The
flanges shall be holed and the barrel supports slotted to receive
them. The barrel studs shall be threaded over a length on either end,
sufficient to accommodate washers, spindle plates and nuts for fixing
flanges at the required spacing. Barrel studs should be tack welded with
the nuts after tightening.
4.09.08 Normally, the nuts on the studs shall stand protrude of the
flanges. All the nails used on the inner surface of the flanges and the
drum barrel shall be counter sunk. The ends of barrel shall generally be
flushed with the top of the nuts.
4.09.09 The inner cheek of the flanges and drum barrel surface shall
be painted with bitumen-based paint.
4.09.10 Before reeling, cardboard or double corrugated or thick
bituminised waterproof bamboo paper shall be secured to the drum
barrel and inside of flanges or the drum by means of a suitable
commercial adhesive material. The paper should be dried before use.
Medium grade craft paper shall be used in between the layer of the
conductor/earth wire. After reeling the earth wire the exposed surface
of the outer layer of earth wire shall be wrapped with thin polythene
sheet across the flanges to preserve the conductor/earth wire from dirt,
grit and damage during transportation and handling and also to prevent
ingress of rain water during storage/transport.
4.09.11 Minimum space of 125 mm shall be provided between the
inner surface of the external protective layer and outer layer of the
earth wire.
4.09.12 Each batten shall be securely nailed across grains as far as
possible to the flange edges with at least 2 nails per end. The length of
the nails shall not be less than twice the thickness of the battens. The
nail shall not protrude above the general surface and shall not have
exposed sharp edges or allow the battens to be released due to
corrosion.
4.09.13 Outside the protective layer, there shall be minimum of two
binders consisting of hoop iron/galvanized steel wire. Each protective
layer shall have two recesses to accommodate the binders.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 49 of 190


Volume-V

4.09.14 The earth wire ends shall be properly sealed and secured
with the help of U-nails on one side of the flanges. The end securing
shall be done by taking out at least 500 mm of steel wire on either end
by U-nails. The earth wire shall be binded by use of galvanized steel
wire/aluminum wire at three locations at least 75 mm apart or more
covered with PVC adhesive tape so as to avoid loosening of earth wire
layers in transit and handling.
4.09.15 Only one length of earth wire shall be wound on each drum.
4.10 MARKING :
Each drum shall have the following information stenciled on it
in indelible ink along with other essential data:
(i) Order Number and date.
(ii) Name and address of consignee
(iii) Manufacturer’s name and address
(iv) Drum number
(v) Size of earth wire (7/3.66mm)
(vi) Length of earth wire in meters
(vii) Gross weight of drum with earth wire
(viii) Weight of empty drum with protective lagging
(ix) Arrow marking for unwinding
4.11 END SEALING :
Both the ends of each length of earth wire should be provided with non-
destructive type metal crimped or epoxy capped seals with punching
embossing/ engraving of manufacturer’s monogram and drum number.
***

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 50 of 190


Volume-V

SECTION- 5
Part A
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR DISC INSULATORS
5.01 STANDARDS

This section provides for the design, manufacture, stage testing and
inspection and testing before dispatch packing and delivery of disc
insulators as per technical requirements furnished in this section.
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification, the rating as
well as performance & testing of the disc insulators shall conform but
not limited to the latest revision & amendments available at the time of
placement of order of all the relevant standards as listed hereunder,
except as modified in this document.

S. Indian Title
No Standard
1 IS:209-1992 Specification for Zinc
2 IS:206-1991 Method for Chemical Analysis of Slab
Zinc
3 IS:731-1991 Porcelain insulators for overhead power
lines with a nominal voltage greater
4 IS:2071 Method of High Voltage Testing
Part(I)-1993

Part(II)-1991
5 IS:2121 Specification of Conductors and Earth
wire Accessories for Overhead Power
Lines.
Part(I)
Armour Rods, Binding Wires & Tapes for
Conductors
6 IS:2486 Specification for insulator fittings for
overhead power lines with a nominal
voltage greater than 1000V
Part I-1993 General Requirements & Tests
Part II-1989
Dimensional Requirements
Part III -
Locking Devices
1991
7 IS:2629-1990 Recommended practice for Hot Dip
Galvanization for iron & steel
8 IS:2633-1992 Testing for Uniformity of Coating of Zinc
coated articles
9 IS:3188-1988 Dimensions for Disc Insulators

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 51 of 190


Volume-V

10 IS:6745-1990 Determination of Weight of Zinc coating


on Zinc coated iron and steel articles
11 IS : 8263-1990 Methods of RIV Test of HV Insulators
12 IS:8269-1990 Methods for Switching impulse test on
HV insulators

5.02 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS

5.02.01 DETAILS OF DISC INSULATORS

i) The insulator strings shall consist of standard discs for a three


phase 50 Hz, effectively earthed 220KV/132KV transmission
system in a moderately polluted atmosphere. The discs shall be
cap and pin, ball and socket type.

ii) The specified values and disc dimensions, impulse and power
frequency voltages, electromechanical strength [EMS] of
individual insulator units are as under. The values given are
minimum which apply to all cases. Specified withstand and
flashover voltages are referred to standard atmospheric
condition.

5.02.02 CHARACTERISTICS OF DISC INSULATORS

The disc insulators should have the following particulars and


characteristics:

S.No Particulars Disc Insulators


70KN 90kN 160kN
EMS EMS EMS
i Diameter of the disc (mm) 255 255 280
ii Spacing of the disc (mm) 145 145 170
iii Size and designation of pin- 16 mm 16 mm 20 mm
ball shank
iv Creepage distance (mm) 320 320 330
(minimum)
v Power frequency one 70 75 75
minute dry withstand
voltage kV (rms)
vi Power frequency one 40 45 45
minute wet withstand
voltage kV (rms)
vii Power frequency puncture 120 125 125
withstand voltage kV (rms)
viii Minimum dry impulse 110 110 120
withstand voltage 1.2x50
micro second wave, positive

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 52 of 190


Volume-V

and negative Kv Peak)


ix Maximum Radio 50 50 50
interference
voltage with 10 kV RMS to
ground. (microvolts)
x Minimum corona extinction 9 9 18
voltage kV(rms)

5.03 SPECIFICATION DRAWINGS


The specification drawing in respect of the disc insulators indicated
above is attached with this specification. The specification drawing is
attached herewith for information and guidance of the Contractor only.
The drawings to be furnished by the Contractor shall be as per his own
design and manufacture and shall be distinct and separate from these
specification drawings.
The drawing shall include but not limited to the following
information:-
a) Shell diameter and ball to ball spacing with manufacturing
tolerances.
b) Minimum creepage distance with positive tolerance.
c) Protected creepage distance
d) Eccentricity of the disc
i) Axial run out
ii) Radial run out
e) Unit mechanical and electrical characteristics
f) Size and weight of ball & socket parts
g) Weight of unit insulator disc
h) Materials
i) Identification mark
j) Manufacturer’s catalogue number.

After placement of order, the Contractor shall submit full


dimensioned manufacturing drawing of insulator cap, pin &
insulator shell in six copies to the Employer for reference &
record.

5.04 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

5.04.01 Porcelain
The porcelain used in the manufacture of the shells shall be ivory white,
nonporous of high dielectric, mechanical and thermal strength, free
from internal stresses, blisters, laminations, voids, foreign matter,
imperfections or other defects which might render it in any way
unsuitable for insulator shells. Porcelain shall remain unaffected by

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 53 of 190


Volume-V

climatic conditions, ozone, acid, alkalizes, zinc or dust. The


manufacturing shall be by the wet process and impervious character
obtained by thorough verification.
5.04.02 Porcelain Glaze
Surfaces to come in contact with cement shall be made rough by sand
glazing. All other exposed surfaces shall be glazed with ceramic
materials having the same temperature coefficient of expansion as that
of the insulator shell. The thickness of the glaze shall be uniform
throughout and the colour of the glaze shall be brown. The glaze shall
have a visible luster, smooth on surface and be subject to satisfactory
performance under extreme tropical climatic weather conditions and
prevent ageing of the porcelain. The glaze shall remain under
compression on the porcelain body throughout the working temperature
range.
5.04.03 METAL PARTS

5.04.03.1 Cap and Ball Pins


Ball pins shall be made with drop forged steel and caps with malleable
cast iron. They shall be in one single piece and duly hot dip galvanized.
They shall not contain parts or pieces joined together, welded, shrink
fitted or by any other process from more than one piece of material.
The pins shall be of high tensile steel, drop forged and heat-treated.
The caps shall be cast with good quality black hearth malleable cast
iron and annealed. Galvanising shall be by the hot dip process with a
heavy coating of zinc of very high purity. The Contractor shall specify
the grade, composition and mechanical properties of steel used for caps
and pins.
5.04.03.2 Security Clips
The security clips shall be made of phosphor bronze or of stainless
steel.2.5% extra security clip shall be provided.

5.05 FILLER MATERIAL


Cement to be used as a filler material shall be quick setting, fast curing
Portland cement. It shall not cause fracture by expansion or loosening
by contraction. Cement shall not react chemically with metal parts in
contact with it and its thickness shall be as small and as uniform as
possible.
The insulator design shall be such that the insulating medium shall not
directly engage with hard metal. The surfaces of porcelain and hard
metal should be coated with resilient paint to offset the effect of
difference in thermal expansions of these materials.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 54 of 190


Volume-V

5.06 MATERIAL DESIGN AND WORKMANSHIP

5.06.01 GENERAL

(i) All raw materials to be used in the manufacture of these


insulators shall be subject to strict raw material quality
control and to stage testing/quality control during
manufacturing stage to ensure the quality of the final end
product. Manufacturing shall conform to the best engineering
practices adopted in the field of extra high voltage
transmission. Bidders shall therefore offer insulators as are
guaranteed by them for satisfactory performance on
220KV/132KV Transmission lines.

(ii) The design, manufacturing, process and material control at


various stages be such as to give maximum working load,
highest mobility, best resistance to corrosion, good finish,
elimination of sharp edges and corners to limit corona and
radio interference voltages.

5.06.02 INSULATOR SHELL


The design of the insulator shells shall be such that stresses due to
expansion and contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to
deterioration. Shells with cracks shall be eliminated by temperature
cycle test followed by mallet test. Shells shall be dried under controlled
conditions of humidity and temperature.
5.06.03 METAL PARTS

(i) The pin and cap shall be designed such that it will not
transmit the mechanical stresses to the shell by
compression and develop uniform mechanical strength in
the insulator. The cap shall be circular with the inner and
outer surfaces concentric and of such design that it will not
yield or distort under loaded conditions. The head portion of
the pin ball shall be suitably designed so that when the
insulator is under tension the stresses are uniformly
distributed over the pinhole portion of the shell. The pin ball
shall move freely in the cap socket either during assembly
of a string or during erection of a string or when a string is
placed in position.

(ii) Metal caps shall be free from cracks, seams, shrinks, air
holes, blow holes and rough edges. All metal surfaces shall
be perfectly smooth with no projecting parts or
irregularities, which may cause corona. All load bearing
surfaces shall be smooth and uniform so as to distribute the

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 55 of 190


Volume-V

loading stresses uniformly. Pins shall not show any


microscopically visible cracks, inclusions and voids.

5.06.04 GALVANISING
All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with the
latest edition of IS: 2629. The zinc to be used for galvanizing shall
conform to grade Zn 99.95 as per IS: 209. The Zinc coating shall be
uniform, smoothly adherent, reasonably bright, continuous and free
from impurities such as flux, ash, rust stains, bulky white deposits and
blisters. Before ball fittings are galvanized, all die flashing on the shank
and on the bearing surface of the ball shall be carefully removed
without reducing the designed dimensional requirements.
5.06.05 SECURITY CLIPS (LOCKING DEVICES)
The security clips to be used as a locking device for ball and socket
coupling shall be ‘R’ shaped hump type to provide for positive locking of
the coupling as per IS:2486 (Part IV). The legs of the security clips
shall allow for spreading after installation to prevent complete
withdrawal from the socket. The locking device shall be resilient,
corrosion resistant and of sufficient mechanical strength. There shall be
no possibility of the locking device to be displaced or be capable of
rotation when placed in position and under no circumstances shall it
allow separation of insulator units and fittings. ‘W’ type security clips
are also acceptable. The hole for the security clip could be countersunk
and the clip shall be of such design that the eye of the clip may be
engaged by a hot line clip puller to provide for disengagement under
energized conditions. The force required for pulling the clip into its
unlocked position shall not be less than 50 N (5 kgs) or more than, 500
N (50 kgs).
5.06.06 BALL AND SOCKET DESIGNATION
The dimensions of the balls and sockets for 70 KN & 90 KN discs shall
be of 16 mm and for 160KN discs shall be of 20 mm designation in
accordance with the standard dimensions stated in IS:2486 (Part II).

5.07 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCE OF DISC INSULATOR


It shall be ensured that the dimensions of the disc insulators are within
the limits specified below:
a. Diameter of Disc (mm)

Rating Standard Maximum Minimum


160 KN Disc 280 293 267
90 KN Disc 255 266 244
70 KN Disc 255 266 244

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 56 of 190


Volume-V

b. Ball to Ball Spacing between Discs (mm)

Rating Standard Maximum Maximum

160 KN Disc 170 175 165


90 KN Disc 145 149 141
70 KN Disc 145 149 141

5.08 INTERCHANGEABILITY
The insulators inclusive of the ball and socket fittings shall be of
standard design suitable for use with hardware fittings of any make
conforming to relevant Indian Standards.
5.09 SUITABILITY FOR LIVE LINE MAINTENANCE

The insulators shall be compatible for use with hot line or live line
maintenance techniques so that usual hot line operations can be carried
out with ease, speed and safety.

Contractors shall indicate the methods generally adopted in routine hot


and cold line maintenance of EHV lines for similar insulators supplied by
them. Contractors shall also indicate the recommended periodicity of
such maintenance.

5.10 FREEDOM FROM DEFECTS

Insulators shall have none of the following defects:


i) Ball pin shake
ii) Cementing defects near the pin like small blow holes, small
hair cracks, lumps, etc.
iii) Sand fall ferro particle defects on the surface of the
insulator.
iv) Shell eccentricity

5.11 INSULATOR STRINGS:

5.11.01 TYPE AND RATING


The insulator strings shall be formed with standard discs described in
this specification for use on 3 phase, 220kV/132kV, 50Hz effectively
earthed systems in a moderately polluted atmosphere. Suspension
insulator strings for use with suspension towers are to be fitted with
discs of 70 kN EMS rating while tension insulator strings for use with
Anchor/Tension towers are to be fitted with discs of 90 kN & 160 kN
EMS rating.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 57 of 190


Volume-V

The Bidder may also use Long Rod Porcelain Insulators String or
Long Rod Polymer Insulators in place of Disc Insulator Strings.
The Long Rod Porcelain Insulators or Long Rod Polymer
Insulators shall have technical specification equivalent to or
better than the technical specification of Disc Insulator Strings.
It may please be noted that in a particular work, the bidder will
have to use any one type of Insulators and combination of two
different types of Insulators in one particular work will not be
allowed.
5.11.02 STRING SIZE
The size of the disc insulator, the number to be used in different types
of strings and their electro-mechanical strength shall be as follows:

S. Size of No. of Electro


Type of String
No disc standard mechanical
. insulator discs strength of
(mm) insulator
string (kN)
a) Single Suspension for 220/132KV 255x145 13/9 70

b) Double Suspension for 255x145 2x13/2x9 2x70


220KV/132KV
c) Single Tension for 220KV 280x170 14 160
d) Double Tension for 220KV 280x170 2x14 2x160
e) Single Tension for 132KV 255x145 10 90
f) Double Tension for 132KV 255x145 2x10 2x90

5.11.03 STRING CHARACTERISTICS :

5.11.03.1 The characteristics of the complete string shall be as


follows :

S. Characteristics Single/Double Single/Double


NO. Suspension Suspension
220kV 132kV 220kV 132kV

1 No. of Standard Discs 1x13 1x9 1x14 1x10


2x13 2x9 2x14 2x10
2 Nominal diameter of discs 255 255 280 255
3 Power frequency 460 280 490 300
Withstand voltage (wet)
kV (rms)
4 Lighting impulse withstand 1200 800 1200 800
voltage (dry)(kVp)

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 58 of 190


Volume-V

S. Characteristics Single/Double Single/Double


NO. Suspension Suspension
220kV 132kV 220kV 132kV

5 Switching surge Withstand 900 350 900 350


voltage (Dry & wet) (kVp)
6 Mechanical failing Load 7000/ 7000/ 16500/ 9000/
(kgf) 14000 14000 33000 18000

7 Pollution Moderately polluted Moderately polluted


8 No deformation load (kgf) 4690/ 4690/ 11055/ 6030/
9380 9380 22110 12060
9 Corona Extinction voltage 176 - 176 -
(KV rms)

5.11.03.2 Insulator units after assembly shall be concentric and


coaxial within limits as permitted by Indian standards.

5.11.03.3 The string design shall be such that when units are
coupled together there shall be contact between the shell
of one unit and metal of the next adjacent unit.

5.12 TESTS :
5.12.01 The Disc insulators offered should be fully type tested as per
the relevant standards. The following tests shall be carried out on the
insulator string and also on unit disc insulators.
5.12.02 Acceptance Tests shall mean those tests which are to be
carried out on samples taken from each lot offered for pre-despatch
inspection for the purpose of acceptance of the lot.
5.12.03 Routine Tests shall mean those tests, which are to be carried
out on each insulator to check the requirements which are likely to vary
during production.
5.12.04 Stage tests during manufacture shall mean those tests which
are to be carried out during the process of manufacture to ensure
quality control such that the end product is of the designed quality
conforming to the intent of this specification.
5.12.05 The norms and procedure of sampling for the above tests
shall be as per the relevant Indian Standard or other internationally
accepted standards.
5.12.06 The standards according to which these tests are to be
carried out are listed against each test. Where a particular test is a
specific requirement of this specification, the norms and procedure for
the same shall be as specified in Appendix-I attached hereto or as
mutually agreed to between the Contractor and the Employer in the
Quality Assurance Programme.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 59 of 190


Volume-V

5.12.07 For all type and acceptance tests, the acceptance values
shall be the value guaranteed by the Contractor in the “Technical
Questionnaire” or the acceptance value specified in this specification or
the relevant standard whichever is more stringent for that particular
test.

5.13 DETAILS OF TYPE TESTS :

5.13.01 The Disc insulators offered shall be fully type tested for the
following tests as per relevant International/Indian Standard and the
bidder shall furnish type test reports along with the offer.
a) Visible discharge test IS:731
b) Impulse voltage withstand test IS:731
c) Wet power frequency voltage IS:731
withstand test
d) Verification of dimension test IS:731
e) Temperature cycle test IS:731
f) Electro-Mechanical failing load test IS:731
g) Puncture test IS:731
h) Porosity test IS:731
i) Galvanising test IS:731
j) 24 hours mechanical failing load test IS:731
k) Metallurgical test IS:2108 &
IS:2004

5.14 DETAILS OF ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TESTS :

5.14.01 All Acceptance and Routine tests as stipulated herein shall


be carried out by the Contractor in the presence of Employer’s
representative. Immediately after finalisation of the programme of
acceptance/routine testing, the Contractor shall give sufficient advance
intimation to the Employer, to enable him to depute his representative
for witnessing the test.
5.14.02 For String Insulator Units following Acceptance & Routine
tests shall be conducted:
(A) Acceptance tests:

a) Verification of dimensions IS:731


b) Temperature cycle test IS:731
c) Galvanising test IS:731
d) Mechanical performance test IEC:575
e) Test on locking device for ball and socket IEC:372/IS-

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 60 of 190


Volume-V

coupling 2486(part-IV)
f) Eccentricity test As per
Specification
g) Electro-mechanical strength test
h) Puncture test IS-731
i) Porosity test

(B) Routine tests:

a) Visual Inspection IS-731


b) Mechanical routine test
c) Electrical routine test IEC:383

5.15 Tests during Manufacture (STAGE TESTS)

On all components as applicable

a) Chemical analysis of Zinc used for


galvanizing
b) Chemical analysis, mechanical and
metallographic test and magnetic particle
inspection for malleable castings
As per this
c) Chemical analysis, hardness test and Specification
magnetic particle inspection for forgings
d) Crack detection test for metal parts

5.16 ADDITIONAL TESTS :


The Employer reserves the right for carrying out any other tests of a
reasonable nature at the works of the Contractor/laboratory or at any
other recognized laboratory / research institute in addition to the above
mentioned type, acceptance and routine tests at the cost of the
Employer to satisfy that the material complies with the intent of this
specification.

5.17 COORDINATION FOR TESTING:

For 220KV/132KV insulator strings, the Contractor is required to


produce type test reports to the satisfaction of the Employer. However,
in case the Employer desires, the Contractor shall conduct all the type
tests on the complete string with relevant hardware fittings.
Responsibility of arranging required hardwares for the purpose of type
testing will remain with the Contractor.

5.18 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM :

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 61 of 190


Volume-V

The contractor shall submit the Quality Assurance Programme as


specified in clause 1.12 Section-1 of the biding document. A copy of the
accepted Quality Assurance Plan must be available at the
manufacturer’s works of the Plant for reviewing by inspecting officer of
the employer.

5.19 INSPECTION :

5.19.01 As specified in clause 1.13 Section-1 of the biding document,


Plant to be supplied will be subject to inspection and approval by the
Employer's representative before despatch.
5.19.02 The acceptance of any quantity of insulators shall in no way
relieve the successful Contractor of his responsibility for meeting all the
requirement of this specification and shall not prevent subsequent
rejection, if such disc insulators are later found to be defective.
5.19.03 The Contractor shall submit the routine test certificates of
bought out items and raw material at the time of routine testing of the
insulator.

5.20 IDENTIFICATION MARKING :

i) Each disc insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked


with the trade mark of the manufacturer, the month and
year of manufacture, the guaranteed combined mechanical
and electrical strength in kilo-newtons abbreviated by ‘KN’
to facilitate easy identification and proper use.

ii) The marking shall be on porcelain shell of insulators. The


marking shall be printed and not impressed/embossed and
same shall be applied before firing.

iii) One 10mm thick ring of good quality paint shall be marked
on the cap of each insulator of particular strength for easy
identification of the type of insulator. The paint shall not
have any deteriorating effect on the insulator performance.
Following codes shall be used as identification mark:-
For 70kN disc insulator – Green
For 90kN disc insulator – Blue
For 160kN disc insulator – Red

5.21 DOCUMENTATION

The Contractor shall furnish full description and illustrated


catalogues of insulators offered, alongwith the bid. The supplier
shall also furnish alongwith the bid the outline drawing of each

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 62 of 190


Volume-V

insulator unit including cross-sectional view of the shell. The


drawing shall include the following information :

i) Shell diameter and unit spacing with manufacturing


tolerance.
ii) Creepage distance.
iii) Unit mechanical and electrical characteristics as also for the
complete string-suspension and tension.
iv) Size and weight of ball and socket part.
v) Weight of unit insulator disc.
vi) Materials for the disc, cap and pin.
vii) Identification mark.
viii) Manufacturer’s catalogue number.
ix) Brief installation instructions.
x) Relevant technical details of significance.

5.22 PACKING & FORWARDING :

i) All disc insulators shall be packed in strong seasoned


wooden crates. The gross weight of the crates alongwith
disc insulators shall not normally exceed 100 kg. to avoid
handling problem.
ii) The packing shall be of sufficient strength to withstand
rough handling during transit, storage at site and
subsequent handling in the field.
iii) Suitable cushioning, protective padding, or dunnage or
spacers shall be provided to prevent damage or
deformation during transit and handling.
iv) All packing cases shall be marked legibly and correctly so as
to ensure safe arrival at their destination and avoid the
possibility of goods being lost or wrongly dispatched on
account of faulty packing and faulty or illegible markings.
Each wooden case/crate shall have all the markings
stenciled on it in indelible ink.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 63 of 190


Volume-V

Appendix-I
TEST DETAILS

1. Voltage Distribution Test:


The voltage across each insulator unit shall be measured by sphere gap
method. The result obtained shall be converted into percentage and
proportionate correction be applied so as to give a total of 100%
distribution. The voltage across any disc shall not exceed 9% for
suspension insulator strings and for double tension insulator strings.
The total of the voltage distribution of all discs so computed shall be
within 95% and 105%. If not, the test shall be repeated. The
proportions correction shall be made on the values so as to give a total
of 100% distribution.
2. Mechanical Strength Test:
The complete insulator string alongwith its hardware fittings excluding
arcing horn, corona control ring/grading ring and suspension
assembly/dead end assembly shall be subjected to a load equal to 50%
of the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength (UTS) which shall be
increased at steady rate to 67% of the minimum UTS specified. The
load shall be held for five minutes and then removed. After removal of
the load, the string components shall not show any visual deformation
and it shall be possible to disassemble them by hand. Hand tools may
be used to remove cotter pins and loosen the nuts initially. The string
shall then be reassembled and loaded to 50% of UTS and the load shall
be further increased at a steady rate till the specified minimum UTS and
held for one minute. No fracture should occur during this period. The
applied load shall then be increased until the failing load is reached and
the value recorded.
3. Vibration Test:
The suspension string shall be tested in suspension mode, and tension
string in tension mode itself in laboratory span of minimum 30 metres.
In the case of suspension string a load equal to 600 kg shall be applied
along the axis of the suspension string by means of turn buckle. The
insulator string alongwith hardware fittings and two sub-conductors
(each tensioned at 4500 kg) shall be secured with clamps. The system
shall be suitable to maintain constant tension on each sub-conductors
throughout the duration of test. Vibration Dampers shall not be used on
the test span. Both the sub-conductors shall be vertically vibrated
simultaneously at one of the resonance frequencies of the insulator
string (more than 10 Hz) by means of vibration inducing equipment.
The amplitude of vibration at the antinode point nearest to the string
shall be measured and the same shall not be less than + 120/f , f
being the frequency of vibration. The insulator string shall be vibrated
for five million cycles then rotated by 90 deg. and again vibrated for 5

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 64 of 190


Volume-V

million cycles without any failure. After the test, the disc insulators
shall be examined for looseness of pins and cap or any crack in the
cement. The hardware fittings shall be examined for fatigue failure and
mechanical strength test. There shall be no deterioration of properties
of hardware components and disc insulators after the vibration test.
The disc insulators shall be subjected to the following tests as per
relevant standards:

S. Test Percentage of
No. discs to be
tested

a) Temperature cycle test followed by 60


mechanical performance test

b) Puncture test (for porcelain 40


insulator only)

If the results of the second test show a porcelain shell rupture,


the production does not comply with this specification.

4. Chemical Analysis of Zinc used for Galvanising:


Samples taken from the zinc ingot shall be chemically analysed as per
IS:209. The purity of zinc shall not less than 99.95%.
5. Tests for Forgings:
The chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection
for forgings, will be as per the internationally recognized procedures for
these tests. The sampling will be based on heat number and heat
treatment batch. The details regarding test will be as discussed and
mutually agreed to by the Contractor and Employer in Quality
Assurance Programme.
6. Test on Castings:
The chemical analysis, mechanical and metallographic tests and
magnetic particle inspection for castings will be as per the
internationally recognized procedures for these tests. The samplings
will be based on heat number and heat treatment batch. The details
regarding test will be as discussed and mutually agreed to by the
Contractor and Employer in Quality Assurance Programme.
7. Eccentricity Test:
The insulator shall be vertically mounted on a fixture using dummy pin
and socket. A vertical scale with horizontal slider shall be used for the
axial run out. The pointer shall be positioned in contact with the
bottom of the outermost petticot of the disc. The disc insulators shall
be rotated with reference to the fixture and the slider shall be allowed
to move up and down on the scale but always maintaining contact with

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 65 of 190


Volume-V

the bottom of the outer most petticot. After one full rotation of the
disc, the maximum and minimum position the slider has reached on the
scale can be found out. Difference between the above two readings
shall satisfy the guaranteed value for axial run out. Similarly using a
horizontal scale with vertical slider the radial run out shall be measured.
The slider shall be positioned on the scale to establish contact with the
circumference of the disc insulator and disc insulator rotated on its
fixture always maintaining the contact. After one full rotation the
maximum and minimum position of the slider reached on the scale are
found out. The difference between the above readings shall satisfy the
guaranteed value for radial run out.
8. Crack Detection Test:
Crack detection test shall be carried out on each ball and pin before
assembly of disc unit. The manufacturer shall maintain complete record
of having conducted such tests on each and every piece of ball pin. The
Contractor shall furnish full details of the equipment available with him
for crack test and also indicate the test procedure in detail.
SYSTEM PARTICUALRS
S.No. PARTICULARS Electrical System Data
1 System A.C. A.C. A.C.
3phase 3phase 3phase
2 Line voltage (kV rms) 220 132 400
3 Max.voltage (kV rms) 245 145 420
4 Frequency 50Hz. 50Hz. 50 Hz
5 Neutral grounding system effectively effectively effectively
earthed earthed earthed
6 Lightning impulse with- 1050 550 1425
stand voltage(dry &
wet)(kVp)
7 Power frequency 395 230 630
withstand voltage (wet)
(kVp)
8 Switching surge 650 325 1050
withstand voltage (wet)
(kVp)
9 Short circuit level (kA) 40 40 40
10 Minimum corona - - 320
extinction voltage at 50
Hz AC system dry
condition (Kv rms)
11 Radio interference - - 500
voltage at one MHz for
phase to earth voltage of
266KV dry
conditions(Microvolt)

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 66 of 190


Volume-V

Part B
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR POLYMER
INSULATORS

5.23 STANDARDS

5.23.01 Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification,


the rating as well as performance & testing of the Polymer Insulators
shall conform but not limited to the latest revision & amendments
available at the time of placement of order of all the relevant standards
as listed hereunder, except as modified in this document.

S. Indian Title International


No Standard Standard
1 IS:731 Porcelain insulators for IEC:61109-
overhead power lines with a 1992
nominal voltage greater
than 1000V
2 Verification of Dimensions of IEC:61109
Polymer Insulators
3 IS:13134 Guide for the selection of
insulators in respect of IEC : 60815
polluted conditions
4 IS:2071 Method of High Voltage IEC:60060-1
Part(I), II, III Testing
5 Characteristics of string IEC : 60433
insulator units of the long rod
type
6 IS:2486 Specification for insulator IEC-60575
fittings for overhead power IEC-60120
lines with a nominal voltage
greater than 1000V-General
Requirements , Tests,
Dimensional Requirements, IEC:60372
Locking Devices
7 Hydrophobicity classification STRI guide
guide 1.92/1
8 Standard for insulators– ANSI C29 13-
Composite-Distribution Dead- 2000
end type
9 IS : 8263 Methods of RIV Test of HV IEC:60487
Insulators

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 67 of 190


Volume-V

S. Indian Title Internation


No Standard al Standard
10 Standard specification for ASTMD 578-
glass fiber strands 05
11 Standard test method for ASTME 1131-
compositional analysis by 03
Thermo gravimetry
12 IS:8269 Methods for Switching IEC:60506
impulse test on HV insulators
13 IS:2629 Recommended practice for ISO:1461(E)
Hot Dip Galvanisation for iron
& steel
14 IS:2633 Testing for Uniformity of
Coating of Zinc coated
articles
15 IS:6745 Determination of Weight of BS:443-1969
Zinc coating on Zinc coated ISO 1460-
iron and steel articles 1973
16 IS : 4759 Hot dip zinc coatings on ISO :
structural steel & other allied 1459,ISO :
products 1461
17 IS : 4699 Specification for refined
secondary zinc
IS : 3203 Methods of testing of local ISO : 2178
18 thickness of electroplated
coatings
19 IS:209 Specification for Zinc BS:3436

20 IS:206 Method for Chemical Analysis BS:3436


of Slab Zinc

The standards mentioned above are available from:

Reference Name and Address


Abbreviation
BS British Standards,
British Standards Institution
101, Pentonvile Road,
N - 19-ND, UK
IEC International Electro technical Commission,
Bureau Central de la Commission,
electro Technique international,
1 Rue de verembe,

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 68 of 190


Volume-V

Geneva, SWITZERLAND
BIS/IS Beureau Of Indian Standards.
Manak Bhavan,
9, Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg,
New Delhi - 110001. INDIA
ISO International Organisation for
Standardization.
Danish Board of Standardization
Danish Standardizing Sraat,
Aurehoegvej-12
DK-2900, Heeleprup, DENMARK
STRI guide 1.92/1 STRI, Sweden, Website : www.stri.se

NEMA/ANSI C29 13- National Electric Manufacture Association,


2000 155, East 44th Street, New York, NY: 10017
U.S.A
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials,
1916 Race St. Phelledelphia, PA19103
U.S.A.

5.23.02 Material meeting with the requirements of other


authoritative standards, which ensure equal or better performance than
the standards mentioned above, shall also be considered. When the
material offered by the bidder conforms to other standards, salient
points of difference between standards adopted & the standards
specified in this specification shall be clearly brought out in the relevant
schedules. Three copies of such standards with authentic translation in
English shall be furnished along with the bid.

5.24 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

The insulators shall be suitable for being installed directly in air


with Power ACSR conductors of Double Circuit Double Strung
transmission lines. The materials offered shall be suitable for
operation in tropical climate & shall be subject to the sun & inclement
weather and shall be able to withstand wide range of temperature
variations. The topography & climatic conditions in general are as
under:-

1 Location in the state of MADHYA PRADESH


2 Maximum ambient air 50
temperature (0C)
3 Minimum temperature in shade 1
(0C )

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 69 of 190


Volume-V

4 Maximum relative humidity (%) 95(sometimes


approaches
saturation)
5 Average daily ambient air 40° Centigrade
temperature (0C )
6 ISOCERANIC Level (days/year) 50
(Average number of thunder
storm days)
7 Average rainfall(mm) 1250
8 Maximum wind pressure ( kg/ 50
square meter)
9 Maximum Altitudes above mean 1000
sea level (meters)
10 Seismic level(Horizontal 0.3
acceleration) (g)

NOTE:- Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust


and fungus growth. The climatic conditions are also prone to
wide variations in ambient conditions. Stroke is also present
in the atmosphere. Heavy lightening also occurs during June
to October.

5.25 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS

5.25.01 DETAILS OF POLYMER INSULATORS

A. The Polymer insulator shall be suitable for a three phase 50 Hz,


effectively earthed 400 KV, 220 KV and 132 KV transmission
system in a moderately polluted atmosphere. They shall be ball
and socket type.

B. The specified values and dimensions, impulse and power


frequency voltages, electromechanical strength [EMS] of Polymer
insulators are as under. The values given are minimum which
apply to all cases. Specified withstand and flashover voltages are
referred to standard atmospheric condition.

S.No Particulars Value

400 KV POLYMER 220 KV POLYMER 132 KV POLYMER


INSULATORS INSULATORS INSULATORS

Suspen- Tension Suspen- Tension Suspen- Tension


sion sion sion
120 KN 160 KN 70KN 160 KN 70 KN 90 KN
i Size and 20 20 16 mm 20 16 mm 16 mm
designation of mm mm mm
ball & socket

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 70 of 190


Volume-V

ii Creep-age 13020 13020 7595 7595 4495 4495


distance (mm)
(minimum)
iii Power frequency 720 720 510 510 325 325
one minute dry
withstand voltage
kV (rms)
iv Power frequency 680 680 460 460 275 275
one minute wet
withstand voltage
kV (rms)
v Visible discharge 266 266 154 154 105 105
Test voltage kV
(rms)
vi Minimum dry 1550 1550 1050 1050 650 650
impulse withstand
voltage 1.2x50
micro second
wave, positive
and negative Kv
Peak)
vi Nominal length 3335 4080 1885 2380 1305 mm 1450
(Insulation mm mm mm mm mm
Spacing) ( mm)

C. Polymer Insulators shall have sheds with good self-cleaning


properties. Insulator shed profile, spacing, projection etc., and
selection in respect of polluted conditions shall be generally in
accordance with the recommendation of IEC-60815/IS : 13134

D. Dimensional Tolerance of Composite Insulators

The tolerances on all dimensions e.g. diameter, length and


creepage distance shall be allowed as follows in line with-IEC
61109 :
± (0.04d + 1.5)mm when d300mm
± (0.025d+6)mm when d>300mm

Where, d being the dimensions in millimeters for diameter, length


or creepage distance as the case may be.

However, no negative tolerance shall be applicable to creepage


distance

5.26 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

5.26.01 Core:
The core shall be glass-fiber reinforced epoxy resin rod (FRP) of
high strength. Both, glass fiber and resin shall be optimized in the FRP
rod. Glass fibers with low content in alkalies shall be boron free E glass

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 71 of 190


Volume-V

or Boron free electrically corrosion resistance (ECR) glass. Use of resin


with hydrolysis trend due to water penetration should be prevented i. e.
matrix of the FRP rod shall be Hydrolysis resistant. Suitability of Epoxy
matrix as well as interface between matrix and fibers is to be
considered as design parameter to prevent brittle fracture. The FRP rod
should be void free and shall be manufactured through Pultrusion
process.

5.26.02 Housing (Sheath):


The core of the Polymer insulator shall be completely covered by
a continuous housing consisting of a sheath-weathershed. For moulding
of entire weathershed structure on to the rod in a one shot moulding
process to be employed to avoid multiple interfaces. Hardware i. e.
metal fittings may be installed on the rod prior to moulding of the shed
controlling moulding lines. The base polymer shall be 100% Silicon
Rubber prior to the addition of reinforcing fillers. The thickness of
compounding material on core should be minimum 3 mm. Manufacturer
should furnish a description of its Quality Assurance Programme
including fabrication, testing and inspection for any material (i.e.
rubber), components(i.e. rod) or hardware (i.e. end fittings). The
manufacturer has had fabricated by others should also be included.
Manufacturing methods and material composition documentation will be
a part of Technical Bid to be submitted along with offer. Insulator
should have hermetically sealed structure in which the housing material
is moulded to cover the interface between the end fittings and the FRP
rod. This seal should never be broken during testing or otherwise.

5.26.03 End fittings:


The Polymer insulators shall be socket and ball type with the
necessary coupling arrangement such that pin shall move freely in the
socket but do not get disengaged while in service under various
operating and atmospheric conditions.
The socket & ball type metal end fittings shall be designed to transmit
the mechanical load to the core & the end fittings shall maintain
uniform and consistent mechanical strength Material and methods used
in the fabrication of metal parts shall be selected to provide good
toughness and ductility. Metal end fittings shall be made from a quality
malleable cast iron or forged steel or Spheroidal Graphite Iron(SGI) and
shall be hot dipped galvanized in accordance with IS 2629. Metal end
fittings shall be uniform and without sharp edges or corners and shall
be free of cracks, flakes, slivers, slag, blow-holes shrinkage defects and
localized porosity. The attachment to the FRP rod shall be performed
with a symmetrically controlled crimping method control by acquistic
method that compresses the metal radically onto the rod without
damage to the rod fibers or resin matrix while providing a strength
equal to or greater than the defined and specified ultimate strength to
the insulator. The material used in fittings shall be corrosion resistant.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 72 of 190


Volume-V

Nominal dimensions of the pin, ball and socket interior shall be in


accordance with the standard . No joints in ball & socket or pin will be
allowed. Outer portion of ball or socket should be Zinc sleeved with
minimum 99.95% purity of electrolytic high grade Zinc. The finished
surface shall be smooth and shall have a good performance The surface
shall not crack or get chipped due to ageing effect under normal and
abnormal service conditions or while handling during transit or erection.
The design of the fittings and the insulators shall be such that there is
no local corona formation or discharges likely to cause the interference
to either sound or vision transmission.

5.26.04 GRADING RINGS


Grading rings shall be provided when system voltages are equal to or
greater than 220 KV. For 220 KV transmission, grading ring is to be
provided at the energized end only. For 400 KV transmission , grading
ring is to be provided at both ends of the insulators.

All grading rings and brackets shall be designed as an integral part of


the insulator assembly with a positive mounting system that allows
mounting in one position . The design of the grading ring shall be such
that ring can only be mounted with its orientation towards the weather
sheds for maximum RIV and
Corona control . Grading rings shall be designed in such a manner that
the rings can be readily installed and removed with hot line tools
without disassembling any other part of the insulator assembly .

Grading ring height (is the distance from the end of the end fitting to
the top of corona ring) should be so selected that maximum field
minimizes and uniformly distributed along the insulator. Manufacturer
should provide reports of successful electric field modeling testing for
the specific insulator design. The EFM should be three dimensional with
result containing drawing depicting the electric field in various colours ,
each of a different voltage level. The result of this study should show
that the voltage field surrounding the polymer insulators is optimum
along the entire length of the insulator , with the effected hot end of
the insulator being a critical location . The threshold at which corona
may or may not be present should be defined as a figure in KV/mm for
the designed insulator.

5.27 VERIFICATION OF HOUSING MATERIAL

The manufacturer should provide written verification about housing


material, for which base polymer shall be 100% Silicon Rubber prior to
the addition of reinforcing fillers considered will provide satisfactory
performance in the particular environment It shall meet following
requirements Be homogenous, impermeable, with no fissures, bubbles
and strange materials inclusions. Be designed in order to avoid

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 73 of 190


Volume-V

formation of localized discharges and to prevent interfaces humid


penetration. Be resistant to corona, UV radiation, ozone, atmospheric
contamination, water penetration and power arcs.

5.28 BALL AND SOCKET DESIGNATION

The dimensions of the Ball and Socket shall be 16mm designation for
70KN and 90KN Polymer insulators and 20 mm designation for 120
KN and 160 KN Polymer insulators in accordance with the standard
dimensions stated in IEC:60120/IS:2486(Part-II)

5.29 MARKINGS:

5.29.01 Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked with the
following details as per IEC – 61109.
a. Name or trademark of the manufacturer.
b. Voltage and Type.
c. Month and year of manufacturing.
d. Minimum failing load / guaranteed mechanical strength in kilo
Newton followed by the word ‘KN’ to facilitate easy
identification.
e. Country of manufacture

5.29.02 One 10 mm thick ring of suitable quality of paint shall be


marked on the end fitting of particular strength for easy
identification of Polymer insulators. The paint shall not have
any deteriorating effect on the insulator performance.
Following codes shall be used as identification mark :
For 70KN Polymer insulator : Green
For 90KN Polymer insulator : Blue
For 120KN Polymer insulator : Yellow
For 160KN Polymer insulator : Red.

5.30 MATERIAL DESIGN AND WORKMANSHIP

5.30.01 GENERAL

(i) All raw materials to be used in the manufacture of these


insulators shall be subject to strict raw material quality control
and to stage testing/quality control during manufacturing stage
to ensure the quality of the final end product. Manufacturing
shall conform to the best engineering practices adopted in the
field of high voltage transmission. Bidders shall therefore offer
insulators as are guaranteed by them for satisfactory
performance on 400KV/220 KV and 132kV Transmission lines.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 74 of 190


Volume-V

(ii) The design, manufacturing, process and material control at


various stages be such as to give maximum working load,
highest mobility, best resistance to corrosion, good finish,
elimination of sharp edges and corners to limit corona and radio
interference voltages.

5.30.02 GALVANISING
All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with
the latest edition of IS:2629. The zinc to be used for
galvanizing shall conform to grade Zn 99.5 as per IS:209. The
Zinc coating shall be uniform, smoothly adherent, reasonably
bright, continuous and free from impurities such as flux, ash,
rust stains, bulky white deposits and blisters. Before ball fittings
are galvanized, all die flashing on the shank and on the bearing
surface of the ball shall be carefully removed without reducing
the designed dimensional requirements.

5.30.03 INTERCHANGEABILITY

The Polymer insulators inclusive of the ball and socket fittings


shall be of standard design suitable for use with hardware
fittings of any make conforming to relevant Indian Standards.

5.30.04 CORONA AND RADIO INTERFERENCE VOLTAGE (RIV)


PERFORMANCE

All surfaces shall be even, smooth, without cuts, abrasions or


projections. No part shall be subjected to excessive localized
pressure. The metal parts shall not produce any noise
generating corona under all operating conditions.

5.31 SUITABILITY FOR LIVE LINE MAINTENANCE

5.31.01 The Polymer insulators shall be compatible for use with hot
line or live line maintenance techniques so that usual hot line
operations can be carried out with ease, speed and safety.

5.31.02 Suppliers shall indicate the methods generally adopted in


routine hot and cold line maintenance of EHV lines for similar Polymer
insulators supplied by them. Suppliers shall also indicate the
recommended periodicity of such maintenance.

5.32 TESTS

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 75 of 190


Volume-V

The following tests shall be carried out on the Polymer insulator:

5.32.01 TYPE TESTS

This shall mean those tests which are to be carried out to prove
the design, process of manufacture and general conformity of the
material and product with the intents of this specification. These tests
shall be conducted on a representative number of samples prior to
commencement of commercial production.

5.32.02 ACCEPTANCE TESTS

This shall mean those tests which are to be carried out on


samples taken from each lot offered for pre-despatch inspection for the
purpose of acceptance of the lot.

5.32.03 ROUTINE TESTS


This shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out on each
Polymer insulator to check the requirements, which are likely to vary
during production.

5.32.04 STAGE TESTS DURING MANUFACTURE

Stage tests during manufacture shall mean those tests, which are
to be carried out during the process of manufacture to ensure quality
control such that the end product is of the designed quality conforming
to the intent of this specification.

5.32.05 TEST VALUES

For all type and acceptance tests, the acceptance values shall be
the value guaranteed by the Supplier in the guaranteed technical
particulars or the acceptance value specified in this specification or the
relevant standard whichever is more stringent for that particular test.

5.32.06 TEST PROCEDURES AND SAMPLING NORMS

5.32.06.1 The norms and procedure of sampling for the above tests
shall be as per the relevant Indian Standard or other Internationally
accepted standards. This will be discussed and mutually agreed to
between the successful Supplier and Purchaser before placement of
order. The standards and norms according to which these tests are to
be carried out are listed against each test. Where a particular test is a

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 76 of 190


Volume-V

specific requirement of this specification the norms and procedure for


the same shall be as mutually agreed to between the successful
supplier and purchaser in the quality assurance programme. The
supplier shall offer at least three times the quantity of material required
for conducting all the type tests for sample selection. Before sample
selection, the supplier shall be required to conduct all the acceptance
test successfully in presence of purchaser’s representative.

5.32.06.2 TYPE TESTS

(A) The following type tests shall be conducted on all types of the
Polymer insulator with hardware fittings :

a) Power frequency voltage withstand test with


corona control rings and arcing horn under
(dry/wet) conditions
b) Power frequency voltage flash over test with
corona control rings and arcing horn under
(dry/wet) conditions
c) Power frequency voltage flash over test
without corona control rings and arcing
horn under (dry/wet) conditions
d) Switching surge voltage withstand test
under wet condition.
e) Impulse voltage withstand test under dry
condition.
f) Voltage Distribution test
g) Impulse voltage flash over test under dry
condition
h) Corona and RIV Test under dry condition.
i) Mechanical strength test
j) Vibration test.
k) Power Arc Test
l) Salt fog pollution withstand Test

(B) On composite Insulator Unit:-

1. Tests on interface and connection of metal fittings

(a) Dry Power frequency Voltage Test


(b) Sudden Load Release Test
(c) Thermal Mechanical Test
(d) Steep Front Impulse Voltage Test
(e) Dry Power frequency Voltage Test

2. Assembled Core Load Time Test

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 77 of 190


Volume-V

(a) Determination of the Average failing load of the core of the


assembled unit
(b) Control of slope of the strength time curve of the insulator

3. Accelerated Ageing Test of 5000 hours


4. Flammability Test
5. Recovery of Hydrophobic Test
6. Mechanical Load Time Test
7. Brittle Fracture resistance test
8. Test of Housing, Tracking and Erosion Test
9. Test for the Core Material
- Dye Penetration Test
- Water diffusion Test

5.32.07 ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TESTS

On Polymer Insulators following Acceptance & Routine tests shall


be conducted:

(A) Acceptance tests:

a) Verification of IEC:61109-1992
dimensions
b) Verification of Locking
System
c) Galvanising test IS-731
d) Verification of specified IEC:575
Mechanical Load
e) Recovery of As per annex-A
Hydrophobicity

(B) Routine tests:

a) Visual Inspection IS-731


b) Mechanical routine test
c) Electrical routine test IEC:383

5.32.08 Tests during Manufacture (STAGE TESTS)

On all components as applicable

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 78 of 190


Volume-V

a) Chemical analysis of Zinc used for galvanizing

b) Chemical analysis, mechanical and metallographic


test and magnetic particle inspection for malleable
castings

c) Chemical analysis, hardness test and magnetic


particle inspection for forgings

d) Crack detection test for metal parts

5.32.09 ADDITIONAL TESTS

The purchaser reserves the right for carrying out any other tests
of a reasonable nature at the works of the Supplier/laboratory or at any
other recognized laboratory / research institute in addition to the above
mentioned type, acceptance and routine tests at the cost of the
Purchaser to satisfy that the material complies with the intent of this
specification.

5.32.10 COORDINATION FOR TESTING:

For polymer insulator strings, the Supplier is required to produce


type test reports to the satisfaction of the Purchaser. However, in case
the Purchaser desires, the Supplier shall conduct all the type tests on
the complete string with relevant hardware fittings. Responsibility of
arranging required hardwares for the purpose of type testing will
remain with the insulator Supplier.

5.32.11 TEST SCHEDULE

5.32.11.1 TYPE TESTS


The material offered shall be fully type tested as per this
specification and the Supplier shall furnish four sets of type test reports
alongwith the offer. These tests must not have been conducted earlier
than five years.

For any change in the design/type ,already type tested and the
design/type offered against this bid, the purchaser reserves the right to
demand repetition of some or all type tests without any extra cost.

5.32.11.2 ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TESTS

All Acceptance and Routine tests as stipulated herein shall be


carried out by the Supplier in the presence of Purchaser’s
representative.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 79 of 190


Volume-V

Immediately after finalization of the programme of


acceptance/routine testing, the Supplier shall give sufficient
advance intimation to the Purchaser, to enable him to depute
his representative for witnessing the test.

5.33 INSPECTION

i) Purchaser and its representatives shall at all times be


entitled to have access to the works and to all places of
manufactures where insulators are manufactured and the
successful Supplier shall afford all facilities to them for
unrestricted inspection of the works, inspection of material,
inspection of manufacturing process of insulators and for
conducting necessary tests as specified herein.

ii) The successful Supplier shall keep the Purchaser informed


in advance of the time of starting and progress of
manufacture of insulators in its various stages so that
arrangements could be made for inspection.

iii) No material shall be despatched from its point of


manufacture unless the material has been satisfactorily
inspected and tested.

iv) The acceptance of any quantity of insulators shall in no way


relieve the successful Supplier of his responsibility for
meeting all the requirement of this specification and shall
not prevent subsequent rejection, if such insulators are
later found to be defective.

5.34 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN

5.34.01 The Supplier hereunder shall invariably furnish following


information alongwith his offer, failing which the offer shall
be liable for rejection. Information shall be separately given
for individual type of material offered.

i) Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of


sub-suppliers for the raw material, list of standards
according to which the raw material are tested, list of tests,
normally carried out on raw material in presence of
Supplier’s representative, copies of test certificates.

ii) Information and copies of test certificates as in (i) above in


respect of bought out items.

iii) List of manufacturing facilities available.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 80 of 190


Volume-V

iv) Level of automation achieved and list of areas where


manual processing exists.

v) List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage


inspections are normally carried out in quality control and
details of such test and inspections.

vi) Special features provided in Polymer insulators to make it


maintenance free.

vii) List of testing equipment available with the Supplier for final
testing of Polymer insulators specified and test plant
limitation, if any, vis-a-vis the type, special, acceptance and
routine tests specified in the relevant standards.

5.34.02 The successful Supplier shall within 30 days of placement of


order submit the following information to the Purchaser.

i) List of raw material as well as bought out accessories and


the name of material as well as bought out accessories and
the names of sub-suppliers selected from those furnished
alongwith the offer.

ii) Type test certificates of the raw material and bought out
accessories.

iii) Quality assurance plan (QAP) with hold points for


Purchaser’s inspection. The QAP and Purchaser’s hold
points shall be discussed between the Purchaser and the
Supplier before the QAP is finalized.

5.34.03 The successful Supplier shall submit the routine test


certificates of bought out items and raw material at the
time of routine testing of the insulator.\

5.35 DOCUMENTATION

5.35.01 The Supplier shall furnish full description and illustrated


catalogues of insulators offered, alongwith the bid. The
supplier shall also furnish alongwith the bid the outline
drawing of Polymer insulator unit including cross-sectional
view. The drawing shall include the following information:

i) Shed diameter and unit spacing with manufacturing


tolerance.
ii) Creepage distance.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 81 of 190


Volume-V

iii) Unit mechanical and electrical characteristics for the


complete string-suspension and tension. unit
iv) Size and weight of ball and socket part.
v) Weight of Polymer unit.
vi) Materials for the cap and pin.
vii) Identification mark.
viii) Manufacturer’s catalogue number.
ix) Brief installation instructions.
x) Relevant technical details of significance.

5.35.02 TEST REPORTS

i) Four copies of type test reports shall be furnished to the


Purchaser within one month of conducting the tests. One
copy will be returned duly certified by the Purchaser to the
Supplier within three weeks thereafter and on receipt of
the same Supplier shall commence with the commercial
production of the Polymer insulators.

ii) Four copies of acceptance test reports shall be furnished to


the Purchaser. One copy will be returned, duly certified by
the Purchaser and only thereafter shall the materials be
despatched.

iii) All records of routine test reports shall be maintained by the


Supplier at his works for periodic inspection by the
Purchaser.

iv) All test reports of tests conducted during manufacture shall


be maintained by the Supplier. These shall be produced for
verification as and when requested for by the Purchaser.

5.36 GUARANTEED PARTICULARS AND PERFORMANCE


GUARANTEE:

(i) The bidder shall furnish all relevant technical guaranteed


particulars of the long rod Polymer Insulators offered. Offers
without such details may not be considered.

(ii) The Polymer Insulators shall be guaranteed for satisfactory


performance for a period of 24 months from the date of
commissioning of line. Any defect due to faulty material or
workmanship found during guarantee period shall be rectified free
of cost to the MPPTCL. The replacement will have to be organized
expeditiously and within one month from the date of intimation.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 82 of 190


Volume-V

The manufacturer shall also guarantee that there


shall not be any failure/decapping/ breaking of insulators on
line under normal operating condition. In the event of any
failure/decapping/ breaking of insulators during first ten years
of service, the manufacturer shall supply to the
owner/purchaser free of cost spare insulators equal to 10 times
the failed quantity. Further , in case of decapping/breaking and
subsequent line drop , during the first ten years of service , the
manufacturer shall also have to pay Rs. 1,00,000/-(Rs. One
Lakh only) per dropped string towards expenditure to be
incurred by MPPTCL for the line repair.

(iii) In case, the replacement of defective material is not made within


one month then apart from operating clause of Penalty, the
MPPTCL may also take suitable penal action against the
contractor, which may include encashing the Performance
Security to the extent required besides debarring the contractor
and the manufacturer from all future business with the MPPTCL
for a period which will be at the discretion of MPPTCL.

(iv) The defective/ rejected material shall be collected by the


contractor from Trans. Stores/Site within one month from the
date of intimation at your own cost.

(v) The bidder shall indicate the facilities available at the


manufacturer’s works to carry out the tests as per relevant ISS.
Supplies shall be subject to testing as per IS.

5.37 PACKING & FORWARDING

i) All Polymer insulators shall be packed in suitable


PVC/Plastic tubes/any other suitable packing. The packing
shall provide protection against rodents. The supplier shall
furnish detailed design of the packing. For marine
transportation crates shall be palleted.
ii) The packing shall be of sufficient strength to withstand
rough handling during transit, storage at site and
subsequent handling in the field.

iii) Suitable cushioning, protective padding, or dunnage or


spacers shall be provided to prevent damage or
deformation during transit and handling.

iv) All packing cases shall be marked legibly and correctly so as


to ensure safe arrival at their destination and avoid the
possibility of goods being lost or wrongly dispatched on
account of faulty packing and faulty or illegible markings.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 83 of 190


Volume-V

Each case/crate shall have all the markings stenciled on it


in indelible ink.

v) The supplier shall guarantee the adequacy of the packing


and shall be responsible for any loss or damage during
transportation handling, storage and installation due to
improper packing indelible ink.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 84 of 190


Volume-V

ANNEXURE-II

1.0 Tests on Complete composite Insulator with Hardware


Fittings.

1.1 Salt - fog pollution withstand test

This test shall be carried out in accordance with IEC-60507. The


salimity level for composite long rod insulators shall be 80 Kg /
m3 NACL.

2.0 Composite Long rod Insulator Units

2.1 Brittle Fracture Resistance Test.

Assembled core load time test with container that contains in-
HNO3 concentric acid this is applied at the naked rod. The rod
should be held at 80% of SML for the duration of the test. The rod
should not fail within the 96 hour test duration.

2.2 Recovery of Hydrophobicity Test

(1) The surface of selected samples shall be cleaned with isopropyl


alcohol. Allow the surface to dry and spray with water. Record the
HC classification. Dry the sample surface

(2) Treat the surface with corona discharges to destroy the


hydrophobicity. This can be done utilizing a high frequency corona
tester. Holding the electrode approximately 3 mm from the
sample surface slowly move the electrode over an area
approximately 1’’ x 1’’. Continue treating this area for 2-3
minutes, operating the tester at maximum output.

(3) Immediately after the corona treatment, spray the surface with
water and record the HC classification. The surface should be
hydrophilic with an HC value of 6 to 7. If not, dry the surface and
repeat the corona treatment for a longer time until an HC of 6 or
7 is obtained. Dry the sample surface.

(4) Allow the sample to recover and repeat the hydrophobicity


measurement at several time intervals. Silicone rubber should
recover to HC 1 – HC 2 within 24 to 48 hours, depending on the
material and the intensity of the corona treatment.

3.0 Test on All components (As applicable).

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 85 of 190


Volume-V

3.1 Chemical Analysis of Zinc used for Galvanizing.


Samples taken from the zinc ingot shall be chemically analysed as
per IS 209-1979. The purity of zinc shall not be less than
99.95%.

3.2 Tests for Forgings.

The chemical analysis hardness tests and magnetic particle


inspection for forgings, will be as per the internationally
recognized procedures for these tests. The sampling will be based
on heat number and heat treatment batch. The details regarding
test will be as discussed and mutually agreed to by the Supplier
and Owner in Quality Assurance Programme.

3.3 Tests on Castings.

The chemical analysis, mechanical and metallographic tests and


magnetic, particle inspection for castings will be as per the
internationally recognized Procedures for these tests. The
samplings will be based on heat number and heat treatment
batch. The details regarding test will be as discussed and
mutually agreed to by the Supplier and Owner in Quality
Assurance Programme.

4.0 Power Arc Test:

Three insulators having any one design of end fittings shall be


tested for power arc endurance while tensioned horizontally at
3000lb. An arc shall be initiated across the insulator by means of
a Copper shorting fuse wire. The arc shall burn 15 to 30 cycles
and its current magnitude is determined by ampere- time
product(IxT) equal to a minimum of 150kA cycles. Each insulator
is only acceptable if there is no exposure of the core, no
mechanical separation of the insulator, and no cracks in the
housing .

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 86 of 190


Volume-V

SECTION- 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR HARDWARE FITTINGS
FOR 220/132 KV LINES

6.01 STANDARDS:

This section provides for the Design, manufacturing, stage testing,


inspection and testing before despatch, packing and delivery of
Hardware fittings for Insulator string suitable for Conductor and Earth
wire for use on 132 KV/220KV transmission lines. The material and
services under this specification shall be performed as per the
requirements of the latest revisions and amendments available at the
time of placement of order of all the relevant Indian Standards/Codes
listed here under or equivalent International Standards, except as
modified in this document:

S. Indian Title
No Standard
1 IS:209-1992 Specification for Zinc Ingot
2 IS:206 – Tee and Strap Hinges
1992
3 IS:7814- Phosphor Bronze Sheet and Strip
1985
4 IS:2071 Method of high voltage testing
5 IS:731 Porcelain Insulator for Overhead Power Lines
with a Nominal Voltage Greater than 1000 V.
6 IS:961 Structural Steel
7 IS:1385 Phosphor Bronze Rods & Bar Sheet and Strips
and Wire
8 IS:2004 Carbon Steel Forgings for General Engineering
Purpose
9 IS:2107 White Hearth Malleable Iron Castings
10 IS:2108 Black Hearth Malleable Iron Castings
11 IS:2121(Part Specification for Conductors and Earth wire
-I & II) Accessories for Overhead Power Line, Armour
Rods Binding Wires and Tapes for Conductor
12 IS:2486 Specification for Insulator Fittings for
Overhead Power Lines with a Nominal Voltage
Greater than 1000 V.
13 IS:2629 Recommended Practice for Hot Dip
Galvanization of Iron and Steel.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 87 of 190


Volume-V

S. Indian Title
No Standard
14 IS:2633 Testing of Uniformity of Coating of Zinc coated
Articles
15 IS:3138 Hexagon Bolts and Nuts
16 IS:6639 Hexagon Bolts for Steel Structures
17 IS:6745 Determination of Weight of Zinc Coating on
Zinc Coated Iron and Steel Articles
18 IS:3188 Characteristic of String Insulators Units
19 IS:4218 ISO Metric screw Threads
20 IS:4172 Dimensions for Radii under the Heads of Bolts
& Screws
21 IS:4206 Dimensions for nominal lengths and Thread
length for Screws and Studs (with
amendment)
22 IS:4759 Hot Dip Zinc Coatings on Structural Steel and
other Allied Products
23 IS:1573 Electroplated Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel
24 IS: 398 Specification for Aluminium Conductor Steel
Reinforced for overhead transmission purpose.
25 IS: 1327- Methods for determination of weight of tin
1966 Coating on Tin Plates
26 IS: 4826- Hot Dip Galvanised Coating on Round Steel
1979 Wires
27 IS: 1363 Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws & Nuts.
28 IS: 1367 Technical supply conditions for threaded Steel
Fasteners
29 IS: 9708 Stockbridge Vibration Dampers for Overhead
Power lines.
30 IS: 8263 Method of Radio Interference Tests on High
Voltage Insulators.
31 IS:10162 Spacers and Spacer Dampers for twin
horizontal bundle Conductors.
32 IS: 2004 Carbon Steel Forgings for general engineering
purposes.
33 BS:970 General Instructions and Testing Procedures
(Part-I) Specific Requirements for Carbon and Carbon
Manganese Alloy and Stainless Steels.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 88 of 190


Volume-V

6.02 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:

6.02.01 Details of Hardware Fittings:


The Hardware fittings shall meet the technical requirement as per
clause 6.3 and also general arrangement drawings of Hardware fittings
attached herewith. Hardware fittings shall be suitable for single/double
suspension Insulator strings and single/double tension Insulator strings.
Each Hardware fitting shall be supplied complete in all respect and shall
include all components, which are required for making complete set.

The hardware fittings for lines shall be suitable for ACSR Conductor and
Earth wire as per technical parameters indicated in Annexure-3

6.03 INSULATOR STRING CHARACTERISTICS:

6.03.01 The complete insulator string including Hardware fittings


shall have the following characteristics:

S. Characteristics Single/Double Single/Double


NO. Suspension Suspension
220kV 132kV 220kV 132kV

1 No. of Standard Discs 1x13 1x9 1x14 1x10


2x13 2x9 2x14 2x10
2 Nominal diameter of 255 255 280 255
discs
3 Power frequency 460 280 490 300
Withstand voltage
(wet) kV (rms)
4 Lighting impulse 1200 800 1200 800
withstand
voltage
(dry)(kVp)
5 Switching surge 900 350 900 350
Withstand
voltage (Dry & wet)
(kVp)
6 Mechanical failing 7000/ 7000/ 16500/ 9000/
Load (kgf) 14000 14000 33000 18000
7 Pollution Moderately Moderately
polluted polluted
8 No deformation load 4690/ 4690/ 11055/ 6030/
(kgf) 9380 9380 22110 12060

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 89 of 190


Volume-V

9 Corona Extinction 176 - 176 -


voltage (KV rms)

6.03.02 The Insulator string Hardware fittings and Earth wire


assemblies shall comply and conform to the above requirement.

6.04 BALL AND SOCKET DIMENSIONS:


The Ball and Socket for Hardware fittings shall necessarily conform to
the dimensions as stipulated in the Indian Standards. The Ball and
Socket dimensions of the Hardware sets to be used with 7000 kg and
9100 kg Electro Mechanical strength Disc Insulators shall conform to
designation 16mm/16mm-B in accordance with IS:2486(Part-II) or
equivalent International Standard. The Ball and Socket dimension of
Hardware to be used with 11500 Kg & 16,500 kg Electro Mechanical
strength disc insulator shall conform to designation 20mm in accordance
with IS-2486:(Part-II) or equivalent International Standard. The Bidder
shall offer full detail of locking device in accordance with IS 2486:(Part-
III) or equivalent International Standard along with test reports, gauges
and adherence to Standards for Tests on Locking Devices in line with
IS:2486 (Part-IV) or equivalent International Standard.

6.05 REQUIRED GUARANTEED STRENGTH OF HARDWARE OF


INSULATOR STRINGS:

6.05.01 The Hardwares and Clamps of 132kV/220kV single


suspension and double suspension strings suitable for Panther ACSR
and Zebra ACSR for transmission line and shall have the ultimate
breaking strength of not less than 7,000 kgs.

6.05.02 The slipping strength of the suspension clamp shall not be


less than 15% and more than 20% of the Conductor strength with
which it is to be used.

6.05.03 The Hardware and Compression Clamp of single and double


tension strings suitable for Panther ACSR shall have ultimate breaking
strength of not less than 9,100 kgs. The slipping strength of
Compression Clamp shall not be less than 95% of the ultimate breaking
strength of Panther ACSR.

6.05.04 The Hardware and Compression Clamp of single & double


tension strings suitable for Zebra ACSR for 220kV transmission line
shall have ultimate breaking strength of not less than 16500 kgs. The
Compression Clamp shall have slipping strength not less than 95% of
breaking strength of Zebra ACSR.

6.05.05 Each individual Hardware component of double suspension


and double tension strings such as ball-clevis, socket clevis etc. shall

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 90 of 190


Volume-V

have minimum breaking strength as specified for respective single


suspension and tension string respectively.

6.06 PARTICULARS OF HARDWARE FITTINGS:

Each Hardware fitting for the transmission line shall be complete in all
respect and Bidder should furnish complete drawings and technical
particulars of the items of hardware fittings. The Hardware fittings
should normally comprise items conforming to enclosed drawing as
under: -

6.06.01 Single Suspension Hardware Fitting With AGS Type


Clamp:

Single suspension Hardware string shall comprise of one Ball Hook, one
Socket Eye Horn holder, one line side Arcing Horn and one Suspension
Clamp of AGS type with armour rod suitable for respective sizes of
Conductors.

6.06.02 Double Suspension String Hardware Fittings With AGS


Type Clamp:
The double suspension string Hardware fittings shall comprise of one
Ball Hook, one Socket Clevis, one Top Yoke Plate, two Ball Clevis, two
Socket Clevis, one bottom Yoke Plate, two line side Arcing Horns, one
Clevis Eye and one AGS type Suspension Clamp suitable for respective
sizes of Conductors.

6.06.03 Single Tension String Hardware Fittings:


Single tension string Hardware shall comprise of one `D’ Shackle, one
Ball Link, one Forged Steel Socket, Socket Clevis Horn holder, one line
side Arcing Horn and one Tension Clamp of compression type having
before and after compression dimensions strictly as shown in enclosed
Appendix-2.

6.06.04 Double Tension String Hardware Fittings:


The double tension string Hardware shall comprise of two `D’ shackle,
one chain link one top yoke plate, two ball clevis, two socket clevis,
one bottom yoke plate, one line side arcing horn, one clevis and a
compression type dead-end Clamp having `before and after
compression’ dimensions strictly as shown in enclosed Appendix-2.

6.07 EARTH WIRE ASSEMBLIES:


6.07.01 Earth Wire Suspension Assembly With Preformed
Armour Rods:

This shall comprise of AGS type Suspension Clamp of heat-treated


malleable iron, one Chain Link and one ‘D’ Shackle. The entire
assembly shall be hot dip galvanized complete with minor accessories.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 91 of 190


Volume-V

The breaking strength of all the Hardware items of the assembly shall
not be less than 7000 kgs. The complete assembly of suspension
clamp shall be guaranteed for slip strength of not less han 15 KN & not
more than 19 KN. The strength of the Earth wire has been specified in
Annexure-3. The suspension assembly shall be supplied with armour
rod for Earth wire.

6.07.02 Earth Wire Tension Assembly:

The Earth wire tension assembly shall have minimum breaking strength
equal to that of the Earth Wire. The slipping strength of the
Compression Clamp shall not be less than 95% of the breaking
strength of Earth Wire. The strain assembly of the Earth wire for
transmission line shall comprise of compression type dead end Clamp
and two `D’ Shackles complete with minor accessories such as pins,
bolts & nuts etc. Strain assembly shall be hot dip galvanized and made
inherently resistant to the atmosphere corrosion. The dead end Clamp
of the assembly shall be of compression type. The tension clamp shall
be attached to the horizontal strain plate of the tower body by means
of a “D” shackle. “D” shackle shall be suitable for attaching the tension
clamp to strain plate of towers having 8mm thickness with a hole of
21.5 mm diameter. The tension clamp body shall be made out of steel
of 304 L grade or equivalent with Brinnel Hardness not exceeding 200.
The complete assembly shall also include one 12.5mm dia, 45 mm long
HRH MS Bolt hot dip galvanized with nuts and lock washers for
attaching G.I. earth bond. A detailed drawing giving dimensional details
of the complete assembly shall accompany the tender. After
compression, dimensions of the joint shall be as indicated in enclosed
Appendix-2.

6.08 DETAILS OF COMPONENTS OF HARDWARE FITTINGS:

6.08.01 Armour Grip Suspension Clamp (AGS):

AGS fitting shall consist of 2 Neoprene Halves, a set of Helical rods


made of Aluminium alloy, two Aluminium halves casting having inner
profile matching with the profile of the Armour rod cage and jointed by
supporting strap made of Aluminium alloy.
The Contractor should give complete data on the reduction of the
dynamic stresses of the Conductor at the point of AGS support
compared to that of bare clamp used with preformed types of Armour
rods.

The Contractor will be required to prove the comparative performance


in regard to the dynamic flexural stress pattern on the vibrating

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 92 of 190


Volume-V

Conductor on the tensioned span with actual tests on the AGS unit
compared to the normal bare clamp with Armour rods. Suitable curves
should be furnished for the same and also actual reports on the stress/
strain determinations. The Contractor should give the guaranteed
value of the power loss of the AGS units to be supplied by them
supported by a test certificate of any reputed laboratory of the country.
Suitable curves should be furnished for the power loss due to AGS unit
as well as with the conventional envelope type of Suspension Clamps.

The housing supports and housing straps should provide positive stop
closure. AGS unit should have low rotational inertia, strut action of the
Armour Cage, resilient cushioning of the neoprene insert, immunity
from high compressive and flexural stress and wide area support.
Manufacturer is required to guarantee minimum fatigue life of the AGS
units and this would be established under actual tests on tensioned
Conductor span. The manufacturer is required to guarantee minimum
40 years life of the complete AGS units including Neoprene cushioning
and this should be established under actual test on a tensioned
Conductor span.

The rubber used with AGS unit must be capable of withstanding desired
long out-door performance including the variation of temperature from
00C to 750C. The Contractor will have to provide certificate from
reputed manufacturers that the rubber being supplied by them is
suitable for AGS fitting and must have tensile strength of 2000 PSI and
minimum ultimate elongation 300%.

The helical retaining rods required for AGS assembly shall be made of
Aluminium alloy of HE 20 grade as per IS-6051/1970 or equivalent
International Standard duly heat treated and shall be suitable to wrap a
desired size of Conductor. The tensile strength of the retaining rod
material should not be less than 50,000 PSI and the electrical
conductivity should not be less than 40% (IACS). The minimum
slipping strength of the complete fitting shall not be less than 15% and
more than 20% of the UTS of the cable on which it is to be used. The
Clamp shall be in 2 parts made of Aluminium and will have inner profile
matching with the profile of Armour rod. This Clamp should be made
by drop forging process. AGS assembly should be provided with the
forged steel socket eye to match with the suspension string and should
have UTS not less than 7,000 kgs.

IT IS ESSENTIAL FOR THE CONTRACTOR TO HAVE SUITABLE


HEAT TREATMENT FACILITIES FOR ALUMINIUM ALLOY WIRES
IN THE ARMOUR GRIP SUSPENSION UNITS. FORMED ROD
BASED ITEMS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE FROM
MANUFACTURERS WHO DO NOT HAVE NECESSARY TECHNOLOGY
FOR DEVELOPMENT OF ADEQUATE RESILIENCE, ELONGATION

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 93 of 190


Volume-V

UTS AND TWIST TEST FACILITIES BACKED WITH PROPER HEAT


TREATMENT SYSTEMS.

6.08.02 AGS Preformed Armour Rods:

The AGS Preformed Armour rods set suitable for ACSR Zebra/ Panther
conductor (as the case may be) shall be used to minimize the stress
developed in a conductor due to different static and dynamic loads
because of vibration due to wind, slipping of conductor from suspension
clamp as a result of unbalance conductor tension in adjacent span and
broken wire condition. It shall be made of Aluminium alloy of HE 20
grade as per IS-6051/1970 duly heat-treated. The aluminium alloy
wires (pre heat treated) for manufacturing of Armour rods can also be
used, however Contractor shall submit the test certificates in support of
their claim for using pre heat-treated wires. It shall also withstand
power arcs, chafing and abrasion from suspension clamp and localized
heating effects due to resistance losses of the conductor.

The pitch length of the rods shall be determined by the Contractor but
shall be less than that of the outer layer of ACSR conductor and the
same shall be accurately controlled to maintain uniformity and
consistently reproducible characteristics wholly independent of the skill
of lineman.

The preformed armour rod sets shall have right hand lay and the
inside diameter of the helices shall be less than the outside diameter of
the conductor to grip the same tightly. The surface of the armour rod
when fitted on the conductor shall be smooth and free from
projections, cuts and abrasions etc.

The length of each rod shall be as per drawing enclosed. The tolerance
in length of each rod shall be +/-25mm. The tolerance in length of the
rods in completed sets should be within 13 mm between the longest
and shortest rod. The ends of the armour rod shall be parrot billed.

The number of armour rods in each set shall be 11/12. The each rod
shall be marked in the middle with paint for easy applications on the
line.

The armour rod shall not loose their resilience even after five
applications. The conductivity of each rod of the set shall not be less
than 40% of the conductivity of International Annealed Copper
Standard (IACS). The minimum tensile strength of armour rod should
be 35 kg per sq.mm.

6.08.03 Strain Clamp:

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 94 of 190


Volume-V

The Strain Clamp shall be of the compression type for the specified size
of Conductor for 220/132KV lines. The outer sleeve of the Compression
Clamp and Jumper Terminal shall be of EC grade Aluminium 99.5%
pure tube formed by extrusion process and the inner sleeves shall be of
galvanized steel. The angle of jumper terminal to be mounted should
be 30 deg. with respect to the vertical line. The Compression Clamp
shall have slipping strength not less than 95% of the ultimate breaking
strength of Conductor with which it is to be used. The compression
dead end clamp for transmission line shall be manufactured out of
extruded Aluminium.

The resistance of the clamp when compressed on the conductor shall


not be more than 75% of the resistance of equivalent length of
conductor. Die compression line shall be clearly marked on each dead-
end assembly designed for continuous die compression and shall bear
the words “COMPRESS FIRST” suitably inscribed near the point on each
assembly where the compression begins. It shall bear identification
marks “COMPRESSION ZONE” and “NON COMPRESSION ZONE”
distinctly with arrow marks showing the direction of compressions and
knurling marks showing the ends of the Zones. Tapered aluminium
filler plugs shall also be provided at the line of demarcation between
Compression and Non-compression zone. The letters, numbers and
other marking on the finished clamp shall be distinct and legible.

6.08.04 Arcing Horn:


132/220kV Insulator strings for transmission line shall be provided with
Arcing Horns of different type as indicated in the enclosed drawings. In
case of 132 kV line, the Arcing Horn shall be made out of 25mm x 6mm
size flat. At the ends of flat, spherical ball of 38 mm dia. shall be
provided as shown in enclosed drawing. In case of 220kV Hardware
strings, the Arcing Horn shall be made out of 25mm dia steel pipe. The
dimension of the Arcing Horn shall be as indicated in the drawing.
However, the height of the Arcing Horn may be changed depending
upon the length of Socket Eye, Yoke Plate etc. Please note that Arcing
Horn shall be strictly according to above. Any other type of Arcing Horn
including graded type, may not be acceptable.

The designed fixture of the Arcing Horn with that of the string
Hardware of Yoke Plate shall be such that the possibility of relative
movement between the two, due to vibration of assembly in service is
altogether avoided. Making two bolt connections and providing a collar
to the Hardware item can achieve this. An additional nut should be
provided along with bolts and nuts to fix the Arcing Horn with Hardware
items. The provision of an additional nut will avoid the possibility of
relative movement between the Arcing Horn and the Hardware item,
due to vibration of string. The arrangement for fixing of Arcing Horn
shall be such that they do not get loose while in service. To achieve

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 95 of 190


Volume-V

this, they should have proper seat for the Arcing Horn and heat-treated
Belleville washers should be provided with the bolts.

6.08.05 Socket Eye & Ball Clevis:


The Socket Eye and Ball Clevis be made of forged steel as per the
drawing enclosed.

6.08.06 U Clevis:
These shall be made of forged steel complete with galvanised steel
rivets washer and Phosphorus Bronze/Stainless Steel pins.

6.08.07 Ball Fittings:


These shall be made of forged steel in one piece. They shall be
normalized to achieve the minimum breaking strength specified in the
respective drawings. Before galvanising of ball fittings, all die fleshing
on the shank and on the bearing surface of the ball shall be carefully
removed without reducing the dimension below the requirements. The
dimension of the ball & socket shall be 16mm/20mm designation in
accordance with standard dimensions stated in IS:2486 (Part-II).

6.08.08 Dimensions & Tolerances:

6.08.08.1 The dimensions and tolerances of pin balls and socket ends
shall conform to IS 2486 Part-II/IEC-120 and shall be checked
by the gauge therein after galvanizing.
6.08.08.2 The pin balls shall be checked with the applicable “GO”
gauges in at least two directions, one of which shall be across
the line of die flashing and the other 90 deg. to this line. “NO
GO” gauges shall not pass in any direction.
6.08.08.3 The bearing surfaces of balls and machined sockets, before
galvanizing shall not have surface roughness more than 250
micro inches.

6.08.08.4 The bearing surface of socket ends shall be uniform about


the entire circumference without depressions or high spots.
The internal contour of the socket ends shall be concentric with
the axis of fittings. The axis of the bearing surface of socket
ends shall be coaxial with the axis of fittings with no
appreciable tilting.

6.08.09 Socket Fittings:

Socket fittings shall be made of class IV steel as per IS:2004 or steel of


equivalent grade and shall be forged in one piece. They shall be
normalized to achieve the minimum breaking strength specified on the
respective drawings.

6.08.10 Security clip for Socket fittings:

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 96 of 190


Volume-V

6.08.10.1 Socket fittings shall be provided with R-shaped security clip


in accordance with IS:2486 (Part-III) to provide positive
locking against unintentional disengagement of socket from
the ball of the insulator. The security clip shall be humped to
maintain the clip in the locked position and shall have both
prongs spread to prevent complete withdrawal from the
socket. The clip end shall not project outside the recess of
socket when the clip is in locked position.
6.08.10.2 The hole for the security clip shall be on the side of the
socket opposite to the socket opening . The hole for the clip
shall be counter sunk. The clip eye shall be of such design
that the same may be engaged by a hotline clip puller to
provide for disengagement under energized conditions.
6.08.10.3 The force required to pull the clip to its unlocked position
shall not be less than 50 N or more than 500N.
6.08.10.4 The security clip shall be made of stainless steel of type
AISI 302 or 304 or phosphor bronze as per IS:7814.

6.08.11 Clevis-Eye:

These shall be forged steel of malleable cast iron and shall be complete
with galvanised pin with flat washer and split pin of Phosphorus
Bronze/Stainless Steel.

6.08.12 Yoke Plate:

6.08.12.1 The yoke plates/link plate shall be made of mild steel plate
as per IS: 2062 or equivalent standards. Shearing/cutting of
the plates shall be clean without drawn or ragged edges. If
the plates are flame cut, mechanical guides shall be used. It
shall be ensured that the grain flow of the yoke plate shall be
in the direction of the tensile load.
6.08.12.2 Holes shall be cylindrical clean cut and perpendicular to the
plane of the material. The periphery of the holes shall be free
from burrs.
6.08.12.3 All the corners and edges should be rounded off with a
radius of at least 3mm.
6.08.12.4 Design calculation is for bearing and tensile strength for
deciding the dimensions of yoke plate shall be furnished by the
Contractor. The holes provided for bolts in the yoke plate
should satisfy shear edge condition as per IS:800.
6.09 IMPORTANT CONDITIONS:

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 97 of 190


Volume-V

6.09.01 All Hardware items shall be complete with minor items such
as security clip, bolts, nuts, washer, split pins and inners etc.
6.09.02 Enclosed drawings show the attachment proposed to be
fitted on the towers. The Contractor shall be responsible for satisfying
him that the Insulator fittings offered are entirely suitable for the
proposed attachments and for the sizes of the Conductor specified.
6.09.03 All ferrous fittings (except those specified otherwise) shall
be hot dip galvanized, after all machining and fitting has been
completed, in accordance with relevant Indian Standard. All Hardware
items (other than clamps) and those specified otherwise should be
made of Drop Forged Steel. Socket items in forged steel must be
forged. All forgings supplied should be stress relieved and this
treatment should be done at the Contractor works. Forgings, which are
not stress relieved, will not be acceptable. The items like Yoke Plate,
Arcing Horn, Bolts and Nuts shall be of mild steel and rest of the items
shall be of forged steel.
6.09.04 All Bolts, Nuts and Screw heads shall have only wide worth
standard thread and of sizes indicated in the enclosed drawing. Bolts
head and Nuts shall be hexagonal. Where required, nuts shall be locked
in approved manner. The thread in Nuts shall be over tapped after
galvanizing and shall be cut before galvanizing. The threads shall not be
under cut. The Nuts should be tapped such that they are fit on the bolt
threads i.e. these should not have loose fitting.

6.10 LENGTH OF STRINGS:


6.10.01 The clearance to the tower steel parts under service
conditions of Insulator have been decided on the basis that the overall
length of 9 Disc for 132kV line and 13 Disc for 220kV line (both of 7000
kgs EMS for single suspension string) will not exceed the length as
indicated in the attached drawings. The dimension of the Disc for Ball
and Socket type will be 255mm (dia) x145mm (height) for 7000 kgs
EMS to be used with suspension strings on 132kV and 220kV lines.
6.10.02 In case of 132kV tension strings, 10 Disc insulators of 9100
kg EMS of size 255mm (dia) x 145mm (height) will be used. In case of
220kV tension strings, 14 Disc insulators of 16,500 kgs EMS of size
280mm (dia) x 170mm (height) will be used.

6.11 GALVANISING:
6.11.01 Hot dip galvanizing shall conform to Indian Standard
specification IS-2633 or equivalent International Standard. Galvanising
shall be uniform, free from blisters, and shall not peel off due to
abrasion, Zinc coating shall be thick enough to withstand 6 one minute
dips in Copper Sulphate solution (precee test) for all ferrous parts

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 98 of 190


Volume-V

except for threaded portions which shall withstand at least 4 one


minute dips.
6.11.02 The Contractor must emboss/engrave their name in each
forged steel item and Aluminium castings such as Ball Hook, Yoke Plate,
Socket Clevis, Clevis Eye, Clevis-Clevis, Anchor Shackle/D-Shackle,
Chain Link, Suspension Clamps of AGS type, Tension Clamps and Arcing
Horns.
6.12 TESTS :

6.12.01 The hardware fittings offered shall be type tested as per the
relevant standards. Further the acceptance, routine tests and tests
during manufacture shall be carried out on the conductor.
6.12.02 Acceptance tests shall mean those tests, which are to be
carried out on samples taken from each lot offered for pre-despatch
inspection, for the purpose of acceptance of that lot.
6.12.03 Routine tests shall mean those tests which are to be carried
out on each and every product so as to check with requirements which
are likely to vary during production.
6.12.04 Tests during manufacture shall mean those tests, which are
to be carried out during the process of manufacture and end inspection
by the Contractor to ensure the desired quality of the end product to be
supplied by him.
6.12.05 The norms and procedure of sampling for these tests will be
as per the Quality Assurance Programme to be mutually agreed to by
the Contractor and the Employer.
6.12.06 The standards to which these tests will be carried out are
listed in para 6.01. Where a particular test is a specific requirement of
this specification, the norms and procedures of the test shall be as
mutually agreed to between the Contractor and the Employer in the
Quality Assurance Programme.
6.12.07 For all type and acceptance tests, the acceptance values
shall be the values guaranteed by the Contractor in the “Technical
Questionnaire” or the acceptance value specified in this specification,
whichever is more stringent for that particular test.
6.13 ACCEPTANCE TEST/SAMPLE TESTS:

6.13.01 On both suspension and tension hardware fittings:


a. Visual Examination IS:2486 (Part-I)
b. Verification of dimensions IS:2486 (Part-I)
c. Galvanising test/Electroplating As per this
specification.
d. Mechanical strength test of welded joint As per this

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 99 of 190


Volume-V

specification.
e. Mechanical strength test for corona control BS:3288(Part-I)
rings.
f. Test on locking devices for ball & socket IEC:372(2)
coupling.
g. Mechanical strength test of each components As per this
excluding corona control ring and arcing horn. specification.

6.13.02 On suspension Hardware fittings only:


a. Clamp slip strength vs torque test for As per this
suspension clamp. specification.
b. Shore hardness test of elastomer cushion for
AG suspension clamp.
c. Bend test for armour rod set.
d. Re silence test for armour rods set. IS:2121 (Part-I)
e. Conductivity test for armour rods set

6.13.03 On tension hardware fittings only


a. Slip strength test for dead end assembly IS:2486 (Part-I)

6.13.04 Suspension hardware for Earth wire.


a. Visual examination
b. Dimensional verification.
c. Slip strength test.
d. Mechanical strength test on each component
e. Galvanising test
f. Mechanical strength test of welded joint

6.13.05 Tension hardware for Earth wire


a. Visual examination
b. Dimensional verification.
c. Slip strength test.
d. Electrical resistance test .

6.13.06 Test during manufacture.


a. On all components as applicable.
b. Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanizing
c. Chemical analysis, hardness test grain size
inclusion rating and magnetic particle
inspection for forgoing/castings.
d. Chemical analysis and proof load test
fabricated hardware.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 100 of 190


Volume-V

e. Tests on malleable castings forgings and


fabricated hardware’s.

6.14 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:

6.14.01 All the materials shall be of the latest design and conform
to the best modern practice adopted in the extra high voltage field. The
manufacturer shall supply only such material as guaranteed by him to
be satisfactory and suitable for 220/132kV Transmission lines.
6.14.02 The design, manufacturing process and quality control of all
the materials shall be such as to give maximum factor of safety,
maximum possible working load, highest mobility, elimination of sharp
edges and corners, best resistance to corrosion and a good finish.
6.14.03 All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised, after all
machining has been completed. Nuts may, however, be tapped
(threaded) after galvanising and the threads oiled. Spring washers
shall be electro galvanised. The bolts threads shall be under cut to take
care of increase in diameter due to galvanising. Galvanising shall be
done in accordance with IS:2629-1990 or equivalent International
Standard and satisfy the tests mentioned in IS:2633-1992 or equivalent
International Standard. Fasteners shall withstand four dips while spring
washers shall be guaranteed to withstand at least six dips each lasting
one minute under the standard precee test for galvanising.
6.14.04 The Zinc coating shall be perfectly adhere, of uniform
thickness, smooth, reasonably bright, continuous and free from
imperfections such as flux, ash, rust stains, bulky while deposits and
blisters. The Zinc used for galvanising shall be grade Zn. 99.95 as per
IS: 209-1992 or equivalent International Standard.
6.14.05 In case of castings, the same shall be free from all internal
defects like shrinkage, inclusion, blowholes, cracks etc.
6.14.06 All current carrying parts shall be so designed and
manufactured that contact resistance is reduced to minimum.
6.14.07 No item which would produce high electrical and mechanical
stresses in normal working shall have sharp ends or edges, abrasions or
projections and shall not cause any damage to the Conductor in any
way during erection or during continuous operation. The design of
adjacent metal parts and mating surfaces shall be such as to prevent
corrosion of the contact surface and no maintain good electrical contact
under service conditions.
6.14.08 Particular care shall be taken during manufacturing and
subsequent handling to ensure smooth surface free from abrasion or
dents.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 101 of 190


Volume-V

6.14.09 The fasteners shall conform to the requirement of IS: 6639-


1972 or equivalent International Standard. All fasteners and clamps
shall have locking arrangements to guard against vibration loosening.

6.15 IDENTIFICATION MARKING:


The main component of the material covered in the specification shall
be legibly and indelibly marked with the trademark of the
manufacturer, the month and year of manufacture, the guaranteed
combined mechanical and electrical strength in kilo-Newton
abbreviated by ‘kN’ to facilitate easy identification and proper use.
Marks shall be forged or stamped with a steel die before Galvanizing.
The marks shall be distinct, durable and conspicuous.
Embossing/Engraving should be done at the time of manufacturing
process itself, but before Galvanizing. Smaller component like bolts &
nuts, split pin and washers etc. may be excluded from this
requirement.

6.16 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM :


The contractor shall submit the Quality Assurance Programme as
specified in clause 1.12 Section-1 of the biding document. A copy of the
accepted Quality Assurance Plan must be available at the
manufacturer’s works of the Plant for reviewing by inspecting officer of
the employer.

6.16.01 INSPECTION :As specified in clause 1.13 Section-1 of the


biding document, Plant to be supplied will be subject to inspection and
approval by the Employer's representative before despatch.
6.16.02 The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for meeting all the
requirement of this specification and shall not prevent subsequent
rejection, if such materials are later found to be defective.
6.16.03 The supplier shall submit the factory test certificates of raw
materials & bought out accessories at the time of acceptance tests of
the material covered in the specification.
6.17 DOCUMENTATION & LIST OF DRAWINGS:
6.17.01 The detailed drawings of each component assembly
drawings and descriptive literature of the Hardware assembly shall be
submitted for approval of EMPLOYER. The detailed dimension drawings
for each and all-individual Hardware items such as clamps, U Clevis,
Socket Eye, Yoke Plate and Socket Clevis etc. shall also be submitted
separately. Test certificates for different tests conducted as per relevant
ISS, for all the offered items must also be submitted essentially.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 102 of 190


Volume-V

6.17.02 The bidder shall furnish full description, illustrated


catalogues and dimensional drawings, along with the bid. The drawing
shall include the following information:
(i) General outline & assembly drawings of all the items
/material covered in the specification.
(ii) Dimensions, unit spacings
(iii) Unit mechanical and electrical characteristics as also for the
complete assembly/set .
(iv) Weight of each component.
(v) Identification mark.
(vi) Material designation used for different components with
reference to Standards.
(vii) Fabrication details such as welds, finishes and coatings
(viii) Manufacturer’s catalogue number.
(ix) Brief installation instructions.
(x) Reference of type testing.
(xi) Relevant technical details of significance.

6.18 PACKING:

6.18.01 The material shall be packed in strong wooden boxes with


steel straps. The gross weight of packing shall be in range of 50 kgs to
200 kgs to avoid handling problem. The packing shall be strong
enough to withstand rough handling during transit or storage in the
field. All the packing cases shall be legibly marked to avoid possibility
of loss in transit. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage
during transit due to improper and inadequate packing and handling.
6.18.02 Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed
packing list showing following details:-
(i) The name of the consignees
(ii) Details of consignment.
(iii) Destination.
(iv) Total weight of consignment.
(v) Handling and unpacking instrumentation.
(vi) Bill of material indicating content of each
package.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 103 of 190


Volume-V

APPENDIX-2

BEFORE AND AFTER COMPRESSION DIMENSIONS OF


COMPRESSION TYPE DEAD-END CLAMPS AND REPAIR SLEEVE
FOR CONDUCTOR AND EARTH WIRE

Dimension after
Dimension before Length of sleeve Length of sleeve
compression (Flat
compression (Rod before after compression
Sl. to flat distance of
cross section) compression
Particular
No. hexagon)
Panth Zebr G/ W Panth Zebra G/ W Panth Zebr G/ W Panth Zebr G/ W
er a er er a er a
A Aluminium sleeve
a Inner 23 31 - - - -
dimension
(mm)
b Outer 38 48 - 32 40 - 610 711 - 660 763 -
dimension
(mm)
B Steel sleeve
a Inner 9.35 9.95 11.5 - - -
dimension
(mm)
b Outer 18 19.2 21 15 16.1 17.5 203 241 230 233 270 262
dimension
(mm)
C Repair sleeve
Outer 38 48 20.8 32 46 17.5 241 279 150 270 310 175
dimension
(mm)

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 104 of 190


Volume-V

SECTION- 7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ACCESSORIES FOR
220/132kV LINES

7.01 INDIAN STANDARDS/EQUIVALENT INTERNATIONAL


STANDARD:
This section provides for the Design, manufacturing, stage testing,
inspection and testing before despatch, packing and delivery of
Accessories suitable for Conductor and Earth wire for use on 132/220kV
transmission lines. The material and services under this specification
shall be performed as per the requirements of the latest revisions and
amendments available at the time of placement of order of all the
relevant Indian Standards/Codes listed here under or equivalent
International Standards, except as modified in this document:
S.No Indian Title
Standard/equivalent
International Standards
1 IS:209-1992 Specification for Zinc Ingot
2 IS:206 –1992 Tee and Strap Hinges
3 IS:7814-1985 Phosphor Bronze Sheet and Strip
4 IS:2071 Part-I, II & III Method of high voltage testing
5 IS:731 Porcelain Insulator for Overhead Power
Lines with a Nominal Voltage Greater
than 1000 V.
6 IS:961 Structural Steel
7 IS:1385 Phosphor Bronze Rods & Bar Sheet and
Strips and Wire
8 IS:2004 Carbon Steel Forgings for General
Engineering Purpose
9 IS:2107 White Hearth Malleable Iron Castings
10 IS:2108 Black Hearth Malleable Iron Castings
11 IS:2121(Part-I & II) Specification for Conductors and Earth
wire Accessories for Overhead Power Line,
Armour Rods Binding Wires and Tapes for
Conductor
12 IS:2486 Specification for Insulator Fittings for
Overhead Power Lines with a Nominal
Voltage Greater than 1000 V.
Part-I General Requirements and Tests
Part-II Dimensional Requirements
Part-III Locking Devices
Part-IV Tests for Locking Devices
13 IS:2629 Recommended Practice for Hot Dip
Galvanization of Iron and Steel.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 105 of 190


Volume-V

S.No Indian Title


Standard/equivalent
International Standards
14 IS:2633 Testing of Uniformity of Coating of Zinc
coated Articles
15 IS:3138 Hexagon Bolts and Nuts
16 IS:6639 Hexagon Bolts for Steel Structures
17 IS:6745 Determination of Weight of Zinc Coating
on Zinc Coated Iron and Steel Articles
18 IS:3188 Characteristic of String Insulators Units
19 IS:4218 Part-I to VI Isometric screw Threads
20 IS:4172 Dimensions for Radii under the Heads of
Bolts & Screws
21 IS:4206 Dimensions for nominal lengths and
Thread length for Screws and Studs
(with amendment)
22 IS:4759 Hot Dip Zinc Coatings on Structural Steel
and other Allied Products
23 IS:1573-1986 Electroplated Coatings of Zinc on Iron and
Steel
24 IS: 398 (Part-II & III) Specification for Aluminium Conductor
Steel Reinforced for overhead
transmission purpose.
25 IS: 1327-1966 Methods for determination of weight of tin
Coating on Tin Plates
26 IS: 4826-1979 Hot Dip Galvanised Coating on Round
Steel Wires
27 IS: 1363 Part-I to III Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws & Nuts.
28 IS: 1367 Technical supply conditions for threaded
Steel Fasteners.
IS: 1367 (Part-I) Introduction and General Information.
IS: 1367 (Part-II) Product Grades and Tolerances.
IS: 1367 (Part-III) Mechanical Properties and Test Methods
for Bolts, Screws and Studs with full
Load ability.
29 IS: 9708 Stockbridge Vibration Dampers for
Overhead Power lines.
30 IS: 8263 Method of Radio Interference Tests on
High Voltage Insulators.
31 IS:10162 Spacers and Spacer Dampers for twin
horizontal bundle Conductors.
32 IS: 2004 Carbon Steel Forgings for general
engineering purposes.
33 BS:970 (Part-I) General Instructions and Testing
Procedures Specific Requirements for
Carbon and Carbon Manganese Alloy and
Stainless Steels.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 106 of 190


Volume-V

7.02 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:


7.02.01 Bidders will have to furnish confirmation in regard to
compliance of our entire technical requirement. The bid should clearly
describe various technical particulars of the material as per details
given in this section. Based on above information all details required
should be furnished so that we may be able to examine whether the bid
submitted is technically acceptable or not.
7.02.02 Details of Accessories:
i. The Conductor Accessories shall be suitable for ACSR
Conductor as per technical parameters furnished in
Annexure-1.
ii. The Earth wire accessories shall be suitable for Earth wire
as per technical parameters furnished in Annexure-1.
7.03 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ACCESSORIES:
The technical requirements of the individual Accessories are as
under:

7.03.01 Mid Span Joints and Repair Sleeves:


i. The Mid Span Joints for Conductor & Earth wire shall be
compression type.
ii. The Conductor Mid Span Joints shall comprise of Aluminium
and Steel Sleeves. The Earth wire Mid Span Joints and Steel
Sleeves of Conductor Mid Span Joints shall be Hot dip
Galvanized. Sleeves shall be of circular shape suitable for
compression into hexagonal shape. The detailed drawing
showing the length of Sleeves, inner and outer cross sectional
dimension, before compression for Aluminium corresponding
dimensions of hexagon after compression for Aluminium and
Steel Sleeve shall be indicated. The Aluminium Sleeve shall be
of extruded Aluminium. The material of the Steel Sleeve shall
be specified.
iii. The Repair Sleeve of Conductor shall be in two halves
preferably of same shape, and this should be of extruded
Aluminium. The Repair Sleeve for Earth wire shall be single
piece and Hot dip Galvanized. Its material shall be specified.
The Repair Sleeves shall be of circular shape suitable for
compression into hexagonal shape.
iv. The steel and Aluminium Sleeves for Mid Span Joints as well
as Aluminium Repair Sleeves and Steel Repair Sleeves shall
have their outer dia tapered towards the two ends. Also the

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 107 of 190


Volume-V

inside of the Sleeves shall be well rounded off, so that there is


no sharp edge, which can cut the strands.
v. The compression type of Joints and Repair Sleeves shall be
circular shape suitable for compression into hexagonal shape.
The length of Sleeves before compression & cross-sectional
dimensions after compression and the cross sectional
dimensions between the flats of the opposite sides of the
hexagon & other dimensions are indicated in Appendix-2,
Section-6 in Volume-II of bid document.
vi. Other dimensions are indicated in the enclosed drawing.
vii. The Joints and Repair Sleeves shall conform to IS:2121/1981
or equivalent International Standard.
viii. The conductor compressed with mid span joint or with repair
sleeve shall not permit slipping of, damage to or failure of
complete conductor or any part thereof at a load of not less
than 95% of the ultimate tensile strength of the conductor.
ix. The electrical resistance of the joint/repaired portion of the
conductor shall not exceed 75% of the measured resistance of
equivalent length of conductor.
7.03.02 4R-VIBRATION DAMPERS FOR PANTHER & ZEBRA
ACSR:
7.03.02.1 Only Vibration Dampers having 4-resonance frequency
characteristic commonly called 4R Dampers shall be offered.
The Damper shall eliminate fatigue on the Conductor due to
vibration and damp-out the vibrations effectively, so that no
damage due to vibration is caused to Conductor and string.
7.03.02.2 The Dampers are to be used at all tension locations and
suspension locations. One or more Dampers are proposed to
be used on tension/suspension locations depending upon the
span. The Damper shall be such as to effectively damp out the
vibration on the conductor, so that the dynamic strain at the
suspension point with conventional type of Suspension Clamp
‘U’ bolt and keeper pieces, shall not exceed 150 micro strains.
Contractor shall recommend the number of Dampers required
to effectively damp out the vibration of the Conductor, so that
the dynamic strain at the suspension point with conventional
Suspension type Clamp shall not exceed 150 micro strains.
7.03.02.3 The requirement indicated in Schedule-I Ais based on use of
two Vibration Dampers per Conductor per span. However,
final requirement will depend upon Bidder’s recommendations
duly supported by literature. Contractor shall also recommend
the number of Dampers required to effectively damp out
Conductor vibration for different values of span lengths and

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 108 of 190


Volume-V

the distance for fixation. While working out Damper


Characteristics, it may be kept in view that on suspension
locations, preformed Armour rods are also to be fitted on the
conductor. Contractor shall given full details of the damper
characteristics and energy dissipation curves of the Damper
and shall also guarantee their effectiveness for damping
design.
7.03.02.4 The messenger cable shall be made of high strength steel
strands of spring steel with a minimum strength of 136 Kg/sq.
mm and preformed in order to prevent subsequent dropping of
weights in service. The Contractor shall indicate full technical
particulars of the messenger cable. The keeper pieces shall
have proper curvature and edges be rounded off so that it
shall have proper grip over the conductor without any damage
to conductor strands. Clamping bolts shall be provided with
self-locking nuts designed to prevent corroding of the threads
or loosening during service ensuring that no slippage occurs up
to specified longitudinal force on clamp along the conductor.
All ferrous parts including the messenger cable shall be
effectively sealed to prevent corrosion.
7.03.02.5 The collar for fixing the bolt shall be designed in such a way
that sufficient space is available for tightening the bolt through
spanner. Further bolt length be maintained in such a way that
it should not come out completely while affixing the clamp on
Conductor.
7.03.02.6 The Contractor shall specify the material used for the
Damper weight and shall confirm and explain, how constant
design characteristics will be maintained during production.
Fixing of the masses to the messenger cable shall be done by
pressing Aluminium Sleeves at each end of the messenger
cable under pressure. Each end should be sealed properly so
as to achieve prefect joint. The molten metal filling method
for attachment of messenger cable to counter weight is not
acceptable.
7.03.02.7 The Dampers shall meet the test requirements
specified hereunder:
The effectiveness of the Vibration Dampers shall be to reduce
the amplitude of vibration, when tested for span of 320 meters
for Panther and 335 meters for Zebra ACSR, tension taken as
25% of ultimate tensile strength in such a order that it limits
the dynamic strain in the Conductor below 150 micro strains
for 0 to 15 miles per hour wind condition in general and 2 to
10 miles per hour wind condition in particular condition,
conforming to as close as possible to the optimum damping
force requirement which the Contractor can predict and

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 109 of 190


Volume-V

furnish for the ranges of wind velocity and the conductor


tension.
7.03.02.8 The Contractor shall furnish the recommended spacing and
the basis including wind velocity range for selecting the
spacing. The results of the analysis shall account for the
following:
i. Prediction of (a) Amplitude (b) Frequency and (c) Vibration
energy levels of Aeolian vibration on Panther and Zebra
ACSR for spans of 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400,
450 and 500 meters.
ii. Test results for various frequency response characteristics
of Vibration Dampers such as vibration amplitude and phase
angle including power dissipation measured from its
hysteretic loops.
7.03.02.9 Maximum residual vibration must be of such an order that
the strain level does not exceed 150 micro strains.
7.03.02.10 The Vibration Dampers and their attachments shall have
smooth surface so that corona and radio interference voltage
levels are within specified limits.
7.03.02.11 All Ferrous parts shall be fully galvanized..
7.03.02.12 The Vibration Damper shall be capable of being installed
and removed from energized line by means of hot line tools
without completely separating components. The Damper
Assembly shall be electrically conductive. The transmission line
details are as under:-
S. Description Technical Particulars
No. 220kV 132 kV
1 Configuration Single ACSR Single ACSR
Zebra Panther
2 Span length in meters:
i. Ruling design span 350 350
ii. Maximum span 500 M 500 M
iii. Minimum span 100 100
3 Tensile load in Kg:
i. At minimum temp. of 0o C 4064 2794
and still air
ii. At every day temp. of 32o C 3329 2282
o rd
iii. At 0 C and 2/3 full wind 4360 3050
4 Nature of terrain Partly hilly, partly flat with
cultivated fields

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 110 of 190


Volume-V

S. Description Technical Particulars


No. 220kV 132 kV
5 Armour rods/AGS clamp AGS clamps
6 Maximum wind load 45 Kg/m2 Acting on full
projected area.
7 Max permissible dynamic 150 micro strains
strains

The Contractor shall recommend the number of vibration dampers of


the type offered and their points of fixation for spans of 100M to 1000M
in steps of 50M.
7.03.02.13 The other important features of vibration dampers as
regards to materials test, etc., are as under: -

Material:
i. Dampers - As per IS-9708/1993 or equivalent
International Standard.
ii. Clamp - Aluminium alloy
iii. Messenger cable - High strength steel wire with a
strength (kg/sq. mm) not less than the
strength of steel core of power
Conductor/Earth Wire.
iv. Weight - Cast Iron (Hot dip Galvanized)

Galvanising:

i. Spring washers - Electro Galvanized.

ii. Other Ferrous parts - Hot Dip Galvanized.


iii. Casting - As per IS:729-1961 or equivalent
International Standard.
iv. Wires - As per IS:326-1968 or equivalent
International Standard.
v. Bolts & Nuts - As per IS:5358-1969 or equivalent
International Standard.
Slip strength of Clamp:
i. Not less than 250 kg. When an untested Vibration Damper
is installed on Panther and Zebra ACSR Conductor.
ii. Not less than 200 kg. After conducting the fatigue test.
Maximum permissible dynamic strain - 150 micro strains.
on the Conductor with the Damper

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 111 of 190


Volume-V

Minimum number of cycles for fatigue - 10 millions


Performances.
Amplitude for fatigue test - ±1 mm at the highest
Resonant frequency.
Radio interference voltage at - Less than 500
microvolts.
266 kV (rms) phase to ground.

7.04 4R VIBRATION DAMPERS FOR 7/3.66MM 95 Kg PER MM2


QUALITY EARTH WIRE:
7.04.01 The design and general particulars of Vibration Damper for
Earth wire shall be the same as described for Dampers for Conductor,
Preformed Armour Rods will be used at Earth wire suspension locations.
The dynamic strain at suspension point shall not exceed 150 micro
strains.
7.04.02 The entire test as described for Vibration Dampers for
Conductor shall be carried out except for Magnetic Power Loss Test.
7.05 FLEXIBLE G.I. EARTH BONDS:
The flexible G.I. MS earth bond shall be made of flexible MS wire of size
37/7/0.417 with 9.81mm dia and area equivalent to 34 sq.mm. The
length of MS wire shall not be less than 500mm. Two steel connecting
lugs shall be press jointed to the either ends of the flexible MS cable.
One end of the lug shall have hole of 17.5mm size and another of
14.5mm. The complete assembly shall also include one 16mm dia
40mm long HRH M.S.Bolt hot dip galvanized with nut and lock washer.
7.06 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR “ CLAMPS ”
7.06.01 All the current carrying parts shall be designed and
manufactured to have minimum contact resistance. There shall not be
any sharp edges which may lead to accumulation of charge & electrical
breakdown. All corners/ edges shall be rounded.
7.06.02 The clamps shall be liberally designed and certain minimum
contact surface shall be provided.
7.06.03 The clamps and fittings shall be designed so that insulators
shall not be subject to any abnormal stresses due to thermal changes in
conductor.
7.06.04 All the clamps & fittings shall enable the connection to be as
short as possible. Wherever possible the clamps shall be two separate
halves. No “U” bolts shall be used. All components of like design shall
be inter-changeable
7.06.05 All nuts, bolts & washers shall be made of Hot dip
galvanized Mild Steel conforming to relevant ISS only.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 112 of 190


Volume-V

7.06.06 The clamp in all respect shall incorporate highest quality of


modern engineering design and workmanship. The specification is
merely for the guidance of the Contractor as has been clearly stated
earlier and it is not the intention to specify the details of design and
workmanship. The clamps shall be designed and manufactured in
accordance with the Contractor’s standard practices, when such
practices do not conflict with this specification.
7.06.07 The materials offered shall be complete with all components
and accessories which are necessary or useful for their satisfactory
performance and efficient maintenance. Such parts shall be deemed to
be within the scope of this specification whether specifically included or
not.
7.06.08 The design should be such that adequate clamping pressure
is obtained with the tightening of the nuts and the pressure should be
maintained throughout the service of the connector. In order to provide
for creep of Aluminium under pressure, it is essential that only Belleville
washers are used. This should be specifically confirmed and should also
indicate tightening torque required.
7.06.09 All clamps shall be suitable to carry safely the maximum
allowable current in the associated conductor and to withstand the
maximum loads occurring under adverse circumstances and operating
conditions. The maximum fault current is 40 KA rms for a period of 3
seconds. The temperature of the clamps and fittings shall never exceed
that of the associated conductor.
7.06.10 Fittings intended to connect two dissimilar metals shall be
designed to avoid harmful bimetallic corrosion under service condition,
by way of provision of best quality bimetallic strips.
7.06.11 The short circuit current shall be of the order of 40 KA for 3
seconds. The clamps should be suitable to withstand the short circuit
forces corresponding to this current.
7.06.12 The design of clamps should be such that proper space for
movement of normal quality single head spanner during tightening is
available. This is an important requirement and should be confirmed by
the Contractor.
7.07 Materials:
7.07.01 The Clamps & Connectors/Spacers shall be made of
materials listed below: -
i. For connecting ACSR conductor Aluminium alloy casting
conforming to designation A6 of IS:617.(Redesignation 4600)
ii. Bolts, Nuts, plain washers and spring washers for above
items shall be made of hot dip galvanized Mild Steel
conforming to relevant IS only.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 113 of 190


Volume-V

The Contractor shall ensure that the Alloy used assures good
stability and sound casting by proper fluidity. Proper
mechanical and physical strength characteristics should be
obtained corresponding to the standard requirements of the
Alloy specified.

7.07.02 The Contractor shall ensure that the Alloy used assures
good stability and sound casting by proper fluidity. Proper mechanical
and physical strength characteristics should be obtained corresponding
to the standard requirements of the Alloy specified.
7.07.03 The clamps bodies shall be made by gravity die-casting only
and thereafter given the appropriate heat treatment and precipitation
treatment. Clamps bodies made by sand casting shall not be accepted
in any case.

7.08 CASTINGS:
All casting shall be free from blow holes, surface, Blisters and shall be
rounded off.

7.09 CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS:


7.09.01 All sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded
off.
7.09.02 Thickness of the clamps shall not be less than 12mm
7.09.03 Bolts and nuts shall have hexagonal heads and threads as
per Indian Standard.
7.09.04 Flexible connectors, braids or laminated straps shall be
made from tinned copper strips or aluminium laminates depending
upon the clamp.
7.09.05 Size of terminal / conductor for which the clamps is suitable
shall be embossed on each component of the clamp.
7.09.06 Casting should be such that adequate free space for
placement and movement of spanners for tightening of nuts is
available.

7.10 BOLTS, NUTS & WASHERS:


These shall be as per Indian Standard and shall have tensile strength
and elongation as per grade 5.6. The Contractor should ensure proper
tightening either by use of Belleville or by the use of torque wrenches.

7.11 GALVANISING:
Hot dip galvanizing shall conform to Indian Standard specification IS-
2633 or equivalent International Standard. Galvanising shall be
uniform, free from blisters, and shall not peel off due to abrasion, Zinc

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 114 of 190


Volume-V

coating shall be thick enough to withstand 6 one minute dips in Copper


Sulphate solution (precee test) for all ferrous parts except for threaded
portions which shall withstand at least 4 one minute dips.
7.12 TESTS:
7.12.01 The hardware fittings offered shall be type tested as
per the relevant standards. Further the acceptance, routine tests
and tests during manufacture shall be carried out on the conductor.
7.12.02 Acceptance tests shall mean those tests, which are to be
carried out on samples taken from each lot offered for pre-despatch
inspection, for the purpose of acceptance of that lot.
7.12.03 Routine tests shall mean those tests which are to be carried
out on each and every product so as to check with requirements which
are likely to vary during production.
7.12.04 Tests during manufacture shall mean those tests, which are
to be carried out during the process of manufacture and end inspection
by the Contractor to ensure the desired quality of the end product to be
supplied by him.
7.12.05 The norms and procedure of sampling for these tests will be
as per the Quality Assurance Programme to be mutually agreed to by
the Contractor and the Employer.
7.12.06 The standards to which these tests will be carried out are
listed in para 6.01. Where a particular test is a specific requirement of
this specification, the norms and procedures of the test shall be as
mutually agreed to between the Contractor and the Employer in the
Quality Assurance Programme.
7.12.07 For all type and acceptance tests, the acceptance values
shall be the values guaranteed by the Contractor in the “Technical
Questionnaire” or the acceptance value specified in this specification,
whichever is more stringent for that particular test.

7.13 TYPE TESTS:

7.13.01 Flexible G.I. Bond for Earth wire:


Slip strength test

7.13.02 Mid span compression joint for conductor & Earth


wire.
i. Slip strength test
ii. Electrical Resistance test
As per IS 2121,2633
Iii Healing cycle test
6745
iv. Corona Extinction voltage
test dry.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 115 of 190


Volume-V

v. Radio interference voltage


test Dry.
vi. Galvanising test
7.13.03 Repair Sleeve for conductor:
i Electrical Resistance test.
ii. Corona Extinction Voltage test. As per IS 2121
iii. Radio Interference voltage test dry.
7.13.04 Vibration Damper for conductor & Earth wire
a. Chemical analysis of material
b. Dynamic Characteristic Test.
c. Vibration Analysis.
d. Clamp Slip test.
e. Fatigue Test.
f. Magnetic power loss test.
g. Corona extinction voltage test (Dry).
h. Radio interference voltage test (Dry).
i. Damper efficiency test.

NOTE: Tests mentioned at (f)(g)&(h) are not applicable to dampers


for Earth wire.

7.13.05 Clamps
(i) Tensile Test
(ii) Resistance Test
(iii) Temperature rise Test As per IS:5561
(iv) Short time current Test
(v) Dimensional Check
(vi) Galvanising Test

7.14 ACCEPTANCE TEST:

7.14.01 FLEXIBLE G.I. BOND:


a. Visual examination IS:2121
b. Dimensional verification
c. Slip strength test.

7.14.02 Midspan Compression Joint for Power


Conductor & Earth wire
i. Visual examination
ii. Dimensional verification.
iii. Galvanising Test
iv. Hardness test.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 116 of 190


Volume-V

v. Failing load test (test to be


conducted after 24 hours of
compression).
7.14.03 Repair Sleeves for Conductor.
i. Visual examination
ii. Dimensional verification.
7.14.04 Vibration Damper for power conductor/ Earth
wire.
i. Visual examination
ii. Dimensional verification.
iii. Galvanising Test
iv. Verification of resonance
frequencies
v. Clamp slip test
vi. Clamp bolt torque test
vii. Strength of messenger cable.
viii. Mass pull off test.
7.14.05 Clamps
i. Tensile Test
ii. Resistance Test
iii. Dimensional Check
iv. Galvanising Test
7.14.06 Test during manufacture.
i. On all components as applicable.
ii. Chemical analysis of zinc used for
galvanizing
iii. Chemical analysis, hardness test
grain size inclusion rating and
magnetic particle inspection for
forgoing/castings.
iv. Chemical analysis and proof load
test.
v. Tests on malleable castings
forgings and fabricated
hardware’s.
7.15 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP:
7.15.01 All the materials shall be of the latest design and conform
to the best modern practice adopted in the extra high voltage field.
The Contractor shall offer only such equipment as guaranteed by him to
be satisfactory and suitable for 220/132kV Transmission lines.
7.15.02 The design, manufacturing process and quality control of all
the materials shall be such as to give maximum factor of safety,

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 117 of 190


Volume-V

maximum possible working load, highest mobility, elimination of sharp


edges and corners, best resistance to corrosion and a good finish.
7.15.03 All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised, after all
machining has been completed. Nuts may, however, be tapped
(threaded) after galvanising and the threads oiled. Spring washers
shall be electro galvanised. The bolts threads shall be under cut to take
care of increase in diameter due to galvanising. Galvanising shall be
done in accordance with IS:2629-1966 or equivalent International
Standard and satisfy the tests mentioned in IS:2633-1972 or equivalent
International Standard. Fasteners shall withstand four dips while spring
washers shall be guaranteed to withstand at least six dips each lasting
one minute under the standard precee test for galvanising.
7.15.04 The Zinc coating shall be perfectly adhere, of uniform
thickness, smooth, reasonably bright, continuous and free from
imperfections such as flux, ash, rust stains, bulky while deposits and
blisters. The Zinc used for galvanising shall be grade Zn. 99.95 as per
IS: 209-1966 or equivalent International Standard.
7.15.05 In case of castings, the same shall be free from all internal
defects like shrinkage, inclusion, blowholes, cracks etc.
7.15.06 All current carrying parts shall be so designed and
manufactured that contact resistance is reduced to minimum.
7.15.07 No item which would produce high electrical and mechanical
stresses in normal working shall have sharp ends or edges, abrasions or
projections and shall not cause any damage to the Conductor in any
way during erection or during continuous operation. The design of
adjacent metal parts and mating surfaces shall be such as to prevent
corrosion of the contact surface and no maintain good electrical contact
under service conditions.
7.15.08 Particular care shall be taken during manufacturing and
subsequent handling to ensure smooth surface free from abrasion or
dents.
7.15.09 The fasteners shall conform to the requirement of IS: 6639-
1972 or equivalent International Standard. All fasteners and clamps
shall have locking arrangements to guard against vibration loosening.
7.16 IDENTIFICATION MARKING:
The main component of the material covered in the specification shall
be legibly and indelibly marked with the trademark of the
manufacturer, the month and year of manufacture, the guaranteed
combined mechanical and electrical strength in kilo-Newton
abbreviated by ‘kN’ to facilitate easy identification and proper use.
Marks shall be forged or stamped with a steel die before Galvanizing.
The marks shall be distinct, durable and conspicuous.
Embossing/Engraving should be done at the time of manufacturing
process itself, but before Galvanizing. Smaller component like bolts &

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 118 of 190


Volume-V

nuts, split pin and washers etc. may be excluded from this
requirement.

7.17 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM


The contractor shall submit the Quality Assurance Programme as
specified in clause 1.12 Section-1 of the biding document. A copy of the
accepted Quality Assurance Plan must be available at the
manufacturer’s works of the Plant for reviewing by inspecting officer of
the employer.
7.18 INSPECTION :

7.18.01 As specified in clause 1.13 Section-1 of the biding


document, Plant to be supplied will be subject to inspection and
approval by the Employer's representative before despatch.
7.18.02 At least 5% of the total number of drums subject to
minimum of two in any lot put up for inspection, shall be selected at
random to ascertain the length of conductor by following method:
“At the works of the manufacturer the conductor shall be
transferred from one drum to another at the same time measuring its
length with the help of graduated pulley and Cyclometer. The difference
in the average length thus obtained and as declared by the Contractor
in the packing list shall be applied to all the drums if the conductor is
found short during checking”
7.18.03 The supplier shall submit the factory test certificates of raw
materials & bought out accessories at the time of acceptance tests of
the Conductor.

7.19 DOCUMENTATION & LIST OF DRAWINGS

7.19.01 The Contractor shall submit the detailed drawings of the


Accessories offered and descriptive literature. The dimensional drawings
for compression type Mid Span Joint (Aluminium & Steel Sleeve),
compression type Repair Sleeve Preformed Armour rods for Conductor
& Earth wire and 4R Vibration Dampers etc. must be submitted. Test
certificates for different tests conducted as per relevant ISS, for all the
offered items must also be submitted essentially.

7.19.02 The bidder shall furnish full description, illustrated


catalogues and dimensional drawings of offered items ,along with the
bid.. The drawing shall include the following information:
a. General outline & assembly drawings of all the items
/material covered in the specification.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 119 of 190


Volume-V

b. Dimensions, unit spacing


c. Unit mechanical and electrical characteristics as also for the
complete assembly/set .
d. Weight of each component.
e. Identification mark.
f. Material designation used for different components with
reference to Standards.
g. Fabrication details such as welds, finishes and coatings
h. Manufacturer’s catalogue number.
i. Brief installation instructions.
j. Reference of type testing
k. Relevant technical details of significance.

7.20 PACKING:

7.20.01 The material shall be packed in strong wooden boxes with


steel straps. The gross weight of packing shall be in range of 50 kgs to
200 kgs to avoid handling problem. The packing shall be strong enough
to withstand rough handling during transit or storage in the field. All
the packing cases shall be legibly marked to avoid possibility of loss in
transit. The bidder shall be responsible for any damage during transit
due to improper and inadequate packing and handling.
7.20.02 Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed
packing list showing following details:-
(ii) The name of the consignees
(iii) Details of consignment.
(iv) Destination.
(v) Total weight of consignment.
(vi) Handling and unpacking instrumentation.
(vii) Bill of material indicating content of each package.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 120 of 190


Volume-V

SECTION- 8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR OPTICAL GROUND WIRE
(OPGW), ASSOCIATED HARDWARE & ACCESSORIES

8 STANDARDS:
8.01 Unless otherwise mentioned in the specification the offered
Optical Ground wire (OPGW) and associated Hardware shall be
manufactured, tested and supplied with all guaranteed technical
particulars generally confirming to meet the requirement of the
latest revisions of relevant standard of International Electro-
Technical Commission or equivalent National Standards of India.

S.
STANDARD TITLE
NO.
1 IEEE 1138 Standard Construction of Composite Fiber Optic
Ground wire (OPGW) for use on Electric Utility
Power Lines
2 ITUT G.652 For Optical Fibers
3 IEC 1396 Requirements and test methods for Optical
Ground wires (OPGW)
4 IEC 1089 Overhead electrical standard conductors

5 IS 2486 Metal fittings of Insulator for overhead power


lines with a nominal voltage greater than 1000V

6 IS 802 Code of practice for use of structural steel in


overhead transmission line
7 IS 875 Code of practice for design load for building &
structural
8 IEC794-1- Test Procedure
C10
9 IS 1804 Fibre cores for steel wire ropes

8.02 Tenderer shall clearly state the standards to which the equipment
offered by them conforms. In the event of offering of equipment
conforming to standards other than IS, the salient points of
comparison between standards adopted and the relevant IS shall
be indicated in the proposal alongwith copies of adopted
standards. It will be sole responsibility of the Tenderer to prove
that the salient features of offered equipment are equivalent or
better than standards specified above.

8.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENT FOR OPGW:

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 121 of 190


Volume-V

8.03.01 Fiber and Cladding


Each optical fiber shall consist of a core made of fused silica and the
cladding intimately surrounding the core shall be also fused silica. The
properties of optical fiber are shown in Annexure ‘D’.

8.03.02 Fiber Coating


The clad fiber core shall be coated with UV cured urethane acrylate
resin.

8.03.03 Optical Fiber Unit


OPGW cable construction shall comply with IEEE-1138, 2009. The cable
provided shall meet both the construction and performance
requirements such that the ground wire function, the optical fibre
integrity and optical transmission characteristics are suitable for the
intended purpose. The cable shall consist of optical fibre units as
defined in this specification. There shall be no factory splices within the
cable structure of a continuous cable length.
The composite fibre optic overhead ground wire shall be made up of
multiple buffer tubes embedded in a water tight aluminium/aluminium
alloy/stainless steel with aluminium coating protective central fibre optic
unit surrounded by concentric-lay stranded metallic wires in single or
multiple layers. Each buffer tube shall have maximum 12 no. of fibres.
The dual purpose of the composite cable is to provide the electrical and
physical characteristics of conventional overhead ground wire while
providing the optical transmission properties of optical fibre.
All optical fibre cabling including fibre itself and all associated installation
hardware shall have a minimum guaranteed design life span of 25 years.
Documentary evidence in support of guaranteed life span of cable and
fibre shall be submitted by the Contractor during detailed engineering.

8.03.04 Physical Characteristics


Dual-Window Single mode (DWSM), G.652D optical fibres shall be
provided in the fibre optic cables. DWSM optical fibres shall meet the
requirements defined in Table below.

8.03.05 Attenuation
The attenuation coefficient for wavelengths between 1525 nm and 1575
nm shall not exceed the attenuation coefficient at 1550 nm by more
than 0.05 dB/km. The attenuation coefficient for wavelengths between
1285 nm and 1330 nm shall not exceed the attenuation coefficient at
1310 nm by more than 0.05 dB/km. The attenuation of the fibre shall
be distributed uniformly throughout its length such that there are no
point discontinuities in excess of 0.10 dB. The fibre attenuation
characteristics specified in table below shall be "guaranteed" fibre
attenuation of any and every fibre reel.
The overall optical fibre path attenuation shall not be more than
calculated below:

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 122 of 190


Volume-V

Maximum attenuation 0.21 dB/km x total km + 0.05 dB/splice x no.


@ 1550nm : of splices + 0.5 dB/connector x no. of
connectors
Maximum attenuation 0.35 dB/km x total km + 0.05 dB/splice x no.
@ 1310nm: of splices + 0.5 dB/connector x no. of
connectors
DWSM OpticalFibre
Characteristics
Fibre Description: Dual-Window Single-Mode
Mode Field Diameter: 8.6 to 9.5 µm (± 0.6µm )
Cladding Diameter: 125.0 µm ± 1 µm
Mode field concentricity ≤ 0.6µm
error
Cladding non-circularity ≤ 1%
Cable Cut-off ≤ 1260 nm
Wavelength A,cc
1550 nm loss As per G.652 D
performance
Proof Test Level ≥ 0.69 Gpa
Attenuation Coefficient: @ 1310 nm ≤ 0.35 dB/km
@ 1550 nm ≤ 0.21 dB/km
Chromatic Dispersion; 18 ps/(nm x km) @ 1550 nm
Maximum: 3.5 ps/(nm x km) @ 1288-1339nm
5.3 ps/(nm x km) @ 1271-1360nm
Zero Dispersion 1300 to 1324nm
Wavelength: Zero 0.092 ps/(nm2xkm) maximum
Dispersion Slope:
½
Polarization mode < 0.2 ps/km^
dispersion coefficient
Temperature Induced attenuation < 0.05 dB (-60°C to
Dependence: +85°C )
Bend Performance: @ 1310 nm (75±2 mm dia Mandrel), 100
turns; Attenuation Rise ≤ 0.05 dB
@ 1550 nm (30±1 mm radius Mandrel),
100 turns; Attenuation Rise ≤ 0.05 dB @
1550 nm (32±0.5 mm dia Mandrel, 1 turn;
Attenuation Rise ≤ 0.50 dB

8.03.06 Fibre Optic Cable Construction


Overhead Fibre Optic Cables shall be OPGW (Optical Ground Wire). The
OPGW cable is proposed to be installed on the 132kV and 220kV EHV
transmission lines spread across the State of Madhya Pradesh in India.
The design of cable shall account for the varying operating and
environmental conditions that the cable shall experience while in

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 123 of 190


Volume-V

service. The OPGW cable to be supplied shall be designed to meet the


overall requirements of all the transmission lines. Normally the tower
span of the lines shall not exceed 525 m; however, some of the spans
may be up to around 1000 m or more. To meet the overall requirement
of all the transmission lines, the contractor may offer more than one
design without any additional cost, in case one type of offered OPGW
does not meet the requirements for using on spans more than 525m.

8.03.07 Optical Fibre Cable Link Lengths


The estimated optical fibre link lengths shall be as per transmission line
route length. However, the Contractor shall supply and install the
optical fibre cable as required based on detailed site survey to be
carried out by the Contractor during the project execution. The
Contractor shall verify the transmission line route length during the
survey and the Contract price shall be adjusted accordingly.
For the purpose of payment, the optical fibre link lengths are defined as
transmission line route lengths from Gantry at one terminating station
to the Gantry in the other terminating station. The actual cable lengths
to be delivered shall take into account various factors such as sag,
service loops, splicing, working lengths and wastage etc. and no
additional payment shall be payable in this regard. The unit rate for FO
cable quoted in the Bid price Schedules shall take into account all such
factors.

8.03.08 Optical Fibre Identification


Individual optical fibres within a fibre unit and fibre units shall be
identifiable in accordance with EIA/TIA 598 or IEC 60304 or Bellcore
GR-20 colour-coding scheme.
Colouring utilized for colour coding optical fibres shall be integrated into
the fibre coating and shall be homogenous. The colour shall not bleed
from one fibre to another and shall not fade during fibre preparation for
termination or splicing.
Each cable shall have traceability of each fibre back to the original fibre
manufacturer's fibre number and parameters of the fibre. If more than
the specified number of fibers is included in any cable, the spare fibers
shall be tested by the cable manufacturer and any defective fibres shall
be suitably bundled, tagged and identified at the factory by the vendor.

8.03.09 Buffer Tube


Loose tube construction shall be implemented. The individually coated
optical fibre(s) shall be surrounded by a buffer for protection from
physical damage during fabrication, installation and operation of the
cable. The fibre coating and buffer shall be strippable for splicing and
termination. Buffer tubes shall be filled with a water-blocking gel.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 124 of 190


Volume-V

8.03.10 Optical Fibre Strain


The fibre optic cable shall be designed such that the optical fibres
experience no strain under all loading conditions defined in IS 802. No
fibre strain condition shall apply even after a 25 year cable creep.

For the purpose of these specifications, the following definitions shall


apply:

 Maximum Working Tension (MWT) is defined as the maximum


cable tension at which there is no fibre strain.
 The no fibre strain condition is defined as fibre strain of less
than or equal to 0.05%, as determined by direct measurements
through IEC/ ETSI (FOTP) specified optical reflectometry
techniques.
 The Cable strain margin is defined as the maximum cable strain
at which there is no fibre strain.
 The cable Maximum Allowable Tension (MAT) is defined as the
maximum tension experienced by the Cable under the worst
case loading condition as defined in IS 802.
 The cable max strain is defined as the maximum strain
experienced by the Cable under the worst case loading
condition as defined in IS 802.
 The cable Every Day Tension (EDT) is defined as the maximum
cable tension on any span under normal conditions viz at 32 C
and no wind.
 The Ultimate /Rated Tensile Strength (UTS/ RTS/ breaking
strength) is defined as the maximum tensile load applied and
held constant for one minute at which the specimen shall not
break.

While preparing the Sag-tension charts for the OPGW cable the
following conditions shall be met:

 The Max Allowable Tension (MAT) / max strain shall be less


than or equal to the MWT/ Strain margin of the cable.
 The sag shall not exceed the earth wire sag in all conditions.
 The Max Allowable Tension shall also be less than or equal to
0.4 times the UTS of OPGW. However, Max Allowable Tension
up to 0.5 times the UTS of OPGW may be accepted, subject to
no fibre strain.
 The 25 year creep at 25% of UTS (creep test as per IEEE 1138)
shall be such that the 25 year creep plus the cable strain at Max
Allowable Tension (MAT) is less than or equal to the cable strain
margin.
 The everyday tension (EDT) shall not exceed 20% of the UTS for
the OPGW cable.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 125 of 190


Volume-V

The Sag-tension chart indicating the maximum tension, cable strain and
sag shall be submitted for the following conditions as specified in IS
802:1977/1995:-

a. 53 oC, no wind, no ice


b. 32 oC, no wind, no ice
c. 0 oC, no wind, no ice
d. 32 oC, full wind, no ice
e. 0 oC, 2/3rd / 36% of full wind (IS 802:1977/1995)

However, the same shall not be exceeding the limiting values as


under:-

S.N Particulars E Series B Series


o. (132 kV Towers) (220 kV Towers)
1. Wind Load 189 Kg/meter2 194 Kg/meter2
2. Design Span 350 meter 350 meter
3. Sag at 0°C with Nil Wind 4.835 meter 5.508 meter
4. Max Sag at 53°C with Full
6.19 meter 6.91 meter
Wind
5. Max Tension at 32°C with
3400 Kg 3300 Kg
Full Wind

The above cases shall be considered for the spans from 100 m to 525 M
or higher span length in the range of 50 m spans.

8.03.11 Cable Materials


The materials used for optical fibre cable construction, shall meet the
following requirements:

8.03.12 Filling Materials


The interstices of the fibre optic unit and cable shall be filled with a
suitable compound to prohibit any moisture ingress or any water
longitudinal migration within the fibre optic unit or along the fibre optic
cable. The water tightness of the cable shall meet or exceed the test
performance criteria as per IEC-60794-1-F-5.

The filling compound used shall be a non-toxic homogenous


waterproofing compound that is free of dirt and foreign matter, non-
hygroscopic, electrically nonconductive and non-nutritive to fungus. The
compound shall also be fully compatible with all cable components it
may come in contact with and shall inhibit the generation of hydrogen
within the cable.

The filling compound shall remain stable for ambient temp. between -
20°C and +65°C and shall not drip, flow or leak with age or at high

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 126 of 190


Volume-V

temperatures during short duration lightning strikes and short circuit


currents The filling compound shall meet the requirements of “Seepage
of Filling Compound test” as per EIA/TIA 455-81.

The waterproofing filling materials shall not affect fibre coating, colour
coding, or encapsulant commonly used in splice enclosures, shall be
dermatologically safe, non-staining and easily removable with a non-
toxic cleaning solvent.

8.03.13 Metallic Members


When the fibre optic cable design incorporates metallic elements in its
construction, all metallic elements shall be electrically continuous.

8.04 COMPLETED OPGW


The optical fiber unit shall be surrounded with a number of strands of
aluminium-clad steel wires. The direction of outermost layer shall be
left-handed (S direction).

8.04.01 Optical Ground Wire (OPGW)


OPGW cable construction shall comply with IEEE-1138-2009 and IEC
publication 1396. The cable provided shall meet both the construction
and performance requirements such that the ground wire function, the
optical fibre integrity and optical transmission characteristics are
suitable for the intended purpose.
The composite fibre optic overhead ground wire shall be made up of
buffered optical fibre units embedded in a water tight
aluminium/aluminium alloy/stainless steel protective central fibre optic
unit surrounded by concentric-lay stranded metallic wires in single or
multiple layers. However, other material may be accepted subject to
meeting the cable type-testing requirements as specified in the
technical specifications. The dual purpose of the composite cable is to
provide the electrical and physical characteristics of conventional
overhead ground wire while providing the optical transmission
properties of optical fibre.

8.04.02 Central Fibre Optic Unit


The central fibre optic unit shall be designed to house and protect
multiple buffered optical fibre units from damage due to forces such as
crushing, bending, twisting, tensile stress and moisture. The central
fibre optic unit and the outer stranded metallic conductors shall serve
together as an integral unit to protect the optical fibres from
degradation due to vibration and galloping, wind and ice loadings, wide
temperature variations, lightning and fault current, as well as
environmental effects which may produce hydrogen. The OPGW design
of dissimlar materials for stranded wires and tubes are not

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 127 of 190


Volume-V

allowed.Central fibre optic unit may be of aluminium/ aluminium alloy /


stainless steel tube. There shall be no exposed areas of tubing that can
make electrical contact either directly or indirectlly through moisture,
contamination, protrusions, etc with the surroundings stranded
wires.The tube may be fabricated as a seamless tube, seam welded, or
a tube without a welded seam.

8.04.03 Basic Construction


The cable construction shall conform to the applicable requirements of
Technical Specification, applicable clauses of IEC 61089 related to
stranded conductors and Table 8.04.05 OPGW Mechanical and
Electrical Characteristics. In addition, the basic construction shall
include bare concentric-lay-stranded metallic wires with the outer layer
having left hand lay. The wires may be of multiple layers with a
combination of various metallic wires within each layer. The direction of
lay for each successive layer shall be reversed.
The Wires shall be so stranded that when the complete OPGW is cut,
the indivisual wires can be readily regrouped and then held in place by
one hand.

8.04.04 Breaking Strength


The rated breaking strength of the completed OPGW shall be taken as
no more than 90 percent of the sum of the rated breaking strengths of
the individual wires, calculated from their nominal diameter and the
specified minimum tensile strength.
The rated breaking strength shall not include the strength of the optical
unit. The fibre optic unit shall not be considered a load bearing tension
member when determining the total rated breaking strength of the
composite conductor.

8.04.05 Electrical and Mechanical Requirements


Table below provides OPGW Electrical and Mechanical Requirements for
the minimum performance characteristics. Additionally, the OPGW
mechanical & electrical characteristics shall be similar to the electrical &
mechanical characteristics of the earthwire being replaced such that
there is no or minimal consequential increase in stresses on towers. The
existing earthwire parameters are listed in appendices. For the
purposes of determining the appropriate Max Working Tension limit for
the OPGW cable, IS 802:1995 and IS 875: 1987 shall be applied.
However the OPGW sag & tension charts shall be based on IS 802. For
the OPGW cable design selection and preparation of sag tension charts,
the limits specified in this section shall also be satisfied. The Bidder
shall submit sag-tension charts for the above cases with their bids.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 128 of 190


Volume-V

Table 8.04.05
OPGW Electrical and Mechanical Requirements

1 Everyday Tension at ≤ 20% of UTS of OPGW


32ºC, no wind:
2 D.C. Resistance at 20ºC: < 1.0 ohm/Km
Short Circuit Current: ≥6.32 kA for 1.0 second(for 220 kV
3 & above line)
≥5.6 kA for 1.0 second (for 132 kV &
above line)

8.04.06 Operating conditions


Since OPGW shall be located at the top of the EHV transmission line
support structure, it will be subjected to Aeolian vibration, Galloping
and Lightning strikes. It will also carry ground fault currents. Therefore,
its electrical and mechanical properties shall be the same or similar as
those required of conventional ground conductors.

8.04.07 Live Line Installation Suitability


OPGW shall be suitable for installation under live line condition, i.e. with
all circuits charged to the rated line voltage as specified in this section.

8.05 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR OPGW


ACCESSORIES:
Assemblies and Line Accessories

a. General

The OPGW assemblies and line accessories shall consist of the


hardware indicated herein. All hardware and accessories shall be
made of aluminium, aluminium alloy, malleable iron, steel (metal
mould of drop forging process), stainless steel, or non-ferrous metal,
unless otherwise specified. In addition, all hardware and accessories
shall have an ultimate tensile strength equal to or exceeding the
rated ultimate tensile strength of the overhead ground wire. All
metal shall be free from burrs, sharp edges, lumps and dross, and
shall be smooth, so that interconnecting parts will fit properly, and
so that the parts may be assembled and readily.

Unless otherwise specified, all ferrous metal shall be galvanized in


accordance with ASTM A153. Bolts and nuts shall be galvanized after
being threaded, and excessive zinc shall be removed; they shall run
freely (hand fit) for the entire length of the thread. Re-tapping of

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 129 of 190


Volume-V

nuts after galvanizing is permitted. Each piece of hardware shall be


permanently marked by casting or die-forging.
All bolts and other fasteners shall be installed according to
manufacturer’s recommendations. Materials not specifically covered
herein by detailed specifications shall be of standard commercial
quality suitable for the intended use. The Contractor shall determine
the most suitable type of clamp to be used at each and every
transmission tower location.

b. Suspension Assembly Clamps

Preformed armour grip suspension clamps and aluminum alloy


armour rods/reinforcing rods shall be used. The suspension clamps
shall ne designed to carry a vertical load of not less than 25KN. The
suspension clamps slippage shall occur between 12kN and 17kN as
measured.

The Contractor shall supply all the components of the suspension


assembly including shackles, bolts, nuts, washers, split pins, etc. the
total drop of the suspension assembly shall not exceed 150mm
(measured from the centre point of attachment to the centre point of
the OPGW). The design of the assembly shall be such that the
direction of run of the OPGW shall be the same as that of the
conductor.

c. Tension Clamps

All dead end clamp assemblies shall preferably be of performed


armoured grip type and shall include all necessary hardware for
attaching the assembly to the tower strain plates. Dead end clamps
shall allow the OPGW to pass through continuously without cable
cutting. The slip strength shall be rated not less than 95% of the
rated tensile strength of the OPGW.

d. Vibration dampers

Stockbridge type vibration dampers, suitable for use on the OPGW


shall be supplied. The dampers shall have an aluminum clamping
bolt, or other suitable device, on the galvanized wire between the
weights, and be suitable for attachment to the OPGW. The damper
clamp shall be designed to permit installation and removal using hot
line tools. Each damper weight, subject to the accumulation of
moisture, shall be provided with one drain hole positioned at the
bottom of the weight when the damper is installed in the vertical

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 130 of 190


Volume-V

plane. Damper weights shall be made of hot dip galvanized cast iron
or steel.

The Vibration analysis of the system, with and without damper and
dynamic characterstics of the damper as detailed in Technical
specification, shall have to be submitted. The Technical paticulars for
vibration analysis and damping design of the system are as follows:-

S.No. Description Technical Particulars


Span Lengths in meters
(i) Ruling design span: 350 meters
(ii) Maximum span: 1100 meters
(iii) Minimum Span: 100 meters
Cofiguration: As per Specifications
Tensile load in each: As per sag tension
calculations
Armour rods used: Standard performed
armour rods / AGS
Maximum Permissible dynamic +/- 150 micro strains
strain:

e. Armour Rods

The armor rods for the OPGW shall be of the preformed type. They
shall be smooth and free from corrosion, splitting, cracking, or any
other defects. They shall be designed to effectively protect the
OPGW from fatigue caused by vibration.

f. Down Lead Clamp

The tenderer should offer Down Lead Clamp suitable for OPGW & the
offered clamps should meet requirement stipulated in the relevant
standard. Details of Down Lead Clamp including drawing shall be
submitted with the offer.

g. Joint Box

The joint box shall be air-tight, water-proof. The cover shall be


securely fastened to the case by non-loosening fasteners. Both the
case and the cover shall be made of non-corrosive aluminum alloy or
hot dip galvanized steel or approved materials. The joint box shall be
sufficiently rugged and sturdy to withstand outdoor climatic and
environmental conditions. The joint box shall accommodate sheath
protected arc-fusion splices and up to 1.5 m of additional fiber on
each side of the splice; guides shall be provided to keep the extra
fiber well above the allowable bending radius of the fiber. The spliced

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 131 of 190


Volume-V

parts of the optical fiber within the joint box shall be reinforced and
free from tension after completion of the splicing.

The Supplier shall provide one set of terminating materials with


every joint box for optical fiber connection.

1. Way Joint Box for OPGW


This type of joint box shall be used to straight joint OPGW to
OPGW, or OPGW to approach cable. It shall be used at all
locations requiring such a device except those specified otherwise
in the text or drawings elsewhere in this specification.

2. Way Joint Box for OPGW and approach cable


This type of joint box shall be used to spur joint all fibers
contained in two OPGW cables to OPGW or one multi-core optical
fiber cable at each terminal station, repeater station, or other
location, as detailed in the text or drawings elsewhere in this
Specification.

h. Earth Bond

The Tenderer should offer Earth Bonds suitable for OPGW & the
offered Earth Bonds should meet requirement stipulated in the
relevant standard. Details of Earth Bonds including drawing shall be
submitted with the offer.

i. In-Line Fibre Optic Splice Enclosures

All in-line splices shall be encased in In-Line Fibre Optic Splice


Enclosures. Suitable splice enclosures shall be provided to encase
the optical cable splices in protective, moisture and dust free
environment. In line splice enclosures shall comply to ingress
protection class IP 66 or better. The splice enclosures shall be
designed for the storage and protection of 48 optical fibre splices
and equipped with sufficient number of splice trays for splicing all
fibres in the cable. In-line splice enclosures shall be suitable for
outdoor use with each of the cable types provided under this
contract. Splice enclosures shall be appropriate for mounting on EHV
transmission towers above anti-climb guard levels at about 10
metres from the ground level and shall accommodate pass-through
splicing. The properties of required for Splice Enclosures are shown
in Annexure ‘F’.

8.06 TEST FOR OPGW


TYPE TESTING/ FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS REQUIREMENTS

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 132 of 190


Volume-V

Wherever the referenced test procedures or the technical specifications


call for visual inspection for damage, the test report shall include a full
description of observed status of the sample. (Visually inspected
samples shall also be colour photographed and copies of colour
photographs shall be included in type test report)

8.06.01 Type Tests for Optical Fibres


The type tests listed below in Table 4.2 shall be conducted on DWSM
fibres. The tests specific to the cable type are listed in subsequent
sections.
Table 4.2
Type Tests For Optical Fibres
S. Acceptance Test
No. Test Name Criteria procedure
1 Attenuation

2 Attenuation Variation with


Wavelength
3 Attenuation at Water Peak
Temp. Cycling
4 (Temp dependence of
Attenuation)

5 Attenuation With Bending AS per AS per


(Bend Performance) Tender Tender
Specification Specification
6 Mode Field dia.
7 Chromatic Dispersion
8 Cladding Diameter

9 Point Discontinuities of
attenuation
10 Core -Clad concentricity error
11 Fibre Tensile Proof Testing

8.06.02 Type Tests For OPGW Cables


The type tests to be conducted on the OPGW cable are listed in Table
4.3: Type Tests for OPGW Cables. Unless specified otherwise in the
technical specifications or the referenced standards, the optical
attenuation of the specimen, measured during or after the test as
applicable, shall not increase by more than 0.05 dB/Km.

Table 4.3
Type tests for OPGW Cable

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 133 of 190


Volume-V

S.No. Test Name Test Test Procedure


Description
1 Water IEEE 1138 IEEE 1138, Section 5.1.1.1
Ingress Test Section 4.1.1.1 (IEC 794-1-F5 /EIA/TIA 455-82B)
IEEE 1138, Section 5.1.1.1
(IEC 794-1-F5 /EIA/TIA 455-82B),
Test duration : 24 hours

2 Seepage of IEEE 1138 IEEE 1138 Preconditioning period : 72


filling Section 4.1.1.2 Section 5.1.1.2 hours. Test duration : 24
compound (EIA/TIA 455- hours.
81B)
Short Circuit IEEE 1138 IEEE 1138 Fibre attenuation shall be
Test Section 4.1.1.3 Section 5.1.1.3 continuously monitored and
recorded through a digital
Or data logging system or
equivalent means.
A suitable temperature
sensor such as thermocouple
shall be used to monitor and
record the temperature
inside the OPGW tube in
addition to monitoring &
recording the temperatures
between the strands and
between optical tube and the
strand as required by IEEE
1138.
Test shall be conducted
with the tension clamps
proposed to be supplied. The
cable and the clamps shall be
visually inspected for
mechanical damage and
photographed after the test.

IEC 60794-1-2 Initial temperature during


(2003) the test shall be greater than
Method H1 or equal to ambient field
temperature. However,
maximum temperature
recorded on any component
of OPGW cable shall not
exceed the Short Circuit
transient peak temperature
guaranteed by the
Contractor during design.
4 Aeolian IEEE 1138 IEEE 1138 Fibre attenuation shall be
Vibration Section 4.1.1.4 Section 5.1.1.4 continuously monitored and
Test recorded through a digital
data logging system or
equivalent means.

The vibration frequency and


amplitude shall be monitored
and recorded continuously.
All fibres of the test cable

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 134 of 190


Volume-V

sample shall be spliced


together in serial for
attenuation monitoring.
Test shall be conducted with
the tension/suspension
clamps proposed to be
supplied. The cable and the
clamps shall be visually
inspected for mechanical
damage and photographed
after the test.
5 Galloping test IEEE 1138 IEEE 1138 Test shall be conducted with
Section 4.1.1.5 Section 5.1.1.5 the tension/suspension
clamps proposed to be
supplied. The cable and
clamps shall be visually
inspected for mechanical
damage and photographed
after the test. All fibres of
the test cable sample shall
be spliced together in serial
for attenuation monitoring.
6 Cable Bend Procedure 2 in IEC:794-1-E11 The short-term and long-
Test term bend tests shall be
conducted in accordance with
Procedure 2 in IEC:794-1-
E11 to determine the
minimum acceptable radius
of bending without any
increase in attenuation or
any other damage to the
fibre optic cable core such as
bird caging, deformation,
kinking and crimping.
Fibre attenuation shall be
7 Sheave Test IEEE 1138 IEEE 1138 continuously monitored &
Section 4.1.1.6 Section 5.1.1.6 recorded through a digital
Or data logging system or
IEC 60794-1-2 equivalent means. The
(2003) Sheave dia. Shall be based
on the pulling angle and the
Method E18B
minimum pulley dia
employed during installation.
All fibres of the test cable
sample shall be spliced
together in serial for
attenuation monitoring.
8 Crush Test IEEE 1138 IEEE 1138 The crush test shall be
Section 4.1.1.7 Section 5.1.1.7 carried out on a sample of
approximately one (1) metre
(IEC 794-1-E3/ long in accordance with
EIA/TIA 455- IEC:794-1-E3. A load equal
41B) to 1.3 times the weight of a
400-metre length of fibre
optic cable shall be applied
for a period of 10 minutes. A
permanent or temporarily

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 135 of 190


Volume-V

increase in optical
attenuation value greater
than 0.1dB change in sample
shall constitute failure. The
load shall be further
increased in small
increments until the
measured attenuation of the
optical waveguide fibres
increases and the failure load
recorded along with results.
9 Impact Test IEEE 1138 IEEE 1138, The impact test shall be
Section 4.1.1.7 Section 5.1.1.7 carried out in accordance
(IEC 794-1-E4/ with IEC:794-1-E4. Five
EIA/TIA 455- separate impacts of 0.1-
25B) 0.3kgm shall be applied. The
radius of the intermediate
piece shall be the reel drum
radius ± 10%. A permanent
or temporary increase in
optical attenuation value
greater than 0.1 dB/km
change in sample shall
constitute failure.
10 Creep Test IEEE 1138 IEEE 1138 As per Aluminium Association
Section 4.1.1.8 Section 5.1.1.8 Method , the best-fit straight
line shall be fitted to the
recorded creep data and
shall be extrapolated to 25
years. The strain margin of
the cable at the end of 25
years shall be calculated. The
time when the creep shall
achieve the strain margin
limits shall also be
calculated.
IEEE 1138 IEEE 1138
11 Fibre Strain
Section 4.1.1.9 Section 5.1.1.9
Test
12 Strain Margin IEEE 1138 IEEE 1138
Test Section Section 5.1.1.10
4.1.1.10
13 Stress strain IEEE 1138 IEEE 1138
Test Section Section 5.1.1.11
4.1.1.11
14 Cable Cut-off IEEE 1138 IEEE 1138
wavelength Section Section 5.1.1.12
Test 4.1.1.12
15 Temperature IEEE 1138 IEEE 1138
Cycling Test Section Section 5.1.1.13
4.1.1.13
16 Corrosion EIA/TIA 455-16A
(Salt Spray)
Test

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 136 of 190


Volume-V

17 Tensile IEC 794-1-E1 / The test shall be conducted on a sample of


Performance EIA/TIA 455- sufficient length in accordance with IEC:794-1-
Test 33A E1. The attenuation variation shall not exceed
0.05 dB/kM up to 90% of RTS of fibre optic
cable.
The load shall be increased at a steady rate up
to rated tensile strength and held for one (1)
minute. The fibre optic cable sample shall not
fail during the period. The applied load shall
then be increased until the failing load is
reached and the value recorded.
18 Fault IEEE Std. 4- Tension equal to 20% of the OPGW RTS shall be
Current/ 1978 applied to a sample with minimum length of 15
lightning Test m of cabled fibres and two separate 4/10 micro
second current impulses each having a peak
value of 150 KA and a negative polarity shall be
applied through a 1 cm gap. The attenuation
during the tests shall be continuously measured.
After the tests the same shall be visually
inspected. Any increase in optical waveguide
fibres attenuation measured at 1550 nm shall
constitute failure.

Fibre attenuation shall be continuously


monitored and recorded through a digital data
logging system or equivalent means.
The tensile performance test shall be repeated
on the sample subjected to the lightning arc
test.
IEC 60794-1- The cable construction shall be tested in
2(2003) accordance with Method H2

19 DC On a fibre optic cable sample of minimum 1 metre length, two


Resistance contact clamps shall be fixed with a predetermined bolt torque.
Test The resistance shall be measured by a Kelvin double bridge by
placing the clamps initially zero metre and subsequently one
metre apart. The tests shall be repeated at least five times and
the average value recorded after correcting at 20 C.

8.07 Type Test on OPGW Cable Fittings


The type tests to be conducted on the OPGW Cable fittings and
accessories are listed below:

8.07.01 Mechanical Strength Test for Suspension/Tension


Assembly
Applicable Standards: IS: 2486 / IEC: 61284 :1997.

8.07.01.1 Suspension Assembly


The armour rods /reinforcement rods are assembled on to the approved
OPGW using the Installation Instructions to check that the assembly is
correctly fitted and is the same that will be carried out during
installations.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 137 of 190


Volume-V

Part 1:
The suspension assembly shall be increased at a constant rate up to a
load equal to 50% of the specified minimum Failure Load increased and
held for one minute for the test rig to stabilise. The load shall then be
increased at a steady rate to 67% of the minimum Failure Load and
held for five minutes. The angle between the cable, the Suspension
Assembly and the horizontal shall not exceed 16o. This load shall then
be removed in a controlled manner and the Protection Splice
disassembled. Examination of all the components shall be made and
any evidence of visual deformation shall be documented.

Part 2:
The Suspension clamp shall then be placed in the testing machine. The
tensile load shall gradually be increased up shall gradually be increased
up to 50% of the specified Minimum Failure Load of the Suspension
Assembly and held for one minute for the Test Rig to stabilise and the
load shall be further increased at a steady rate until the specified
minimum Failure Load is reached and held for one minute. No
fracture should occur during this period. The applied load shall then be
increased until the failing load is reached and the value shall be
documented.

8.07.01.2 Tension Assembly


The Tension Assembly is correctly fitted and is the same that will be
carried out during installations.
Part 1:
The tension assembly (excluding tension clamp) shall be increased at a
constant rate up to a load equal to 50% of the specified minimum
Failure Load increased at a constant rate and held for one minute for
the test rig to stabilise. The load shall then be increased at a steady
rate to 67% of the minimum Failure Load and held for five minutes.
This load shall then removed in a controlled manner and the Tension
Assembly disassembled. Examination of the Tension Dead-End and
associated components shall be made and any evidence of visual
deformation shall be documented.

Part 2:
The Tension Dead-End and associated components shall then be
reassembled and bolts tightened as before. The tensile load shall
gradually be increased up shall gradually be increased up to 50% of the
specified Minimum Failure Load of the Tension Assembly and held for
one minute for the Test Rig to stabilise and the load shall be further
increased at a steady rate until the specified minimum Failure Load is
reached and held for one minute. No fracture should occur during this
period. The applied load shall then be increased until the failing load is
reached and the value shall be documented.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 138 of 190


Volume-V

Acceptance Criteria:

- No evidence of binding of the Nuts or Deformation of components at


end of part 1 of Test.

- No evidence of Fracture at the end of one minute at the minimum


failure load during Part 2 of the Test.

Any result outside these parameters shall constitute a failure.

8.07.02 Clamp Slip Strength Test for Suspension Assembly


The suspension assembly shall be vertically suspended by means of a
flexible attachment. A suitable length fibre optical cable shall be fixed in
the clamps. Once the Suspension Clamp has been assembled, the test
rig is tensioned to 1 kN and the position scale on the recorder ‘zeroed’.
The test rig is then tensioned to 2.5 kN and the relative positions of the
Reinforcing Rods, Armour Rods and Suspension Clamp shall be marked
by a suitable means to confirm any slippage after the test has been
completed. The relative positions of the helical Armour Rods and
associated Reinforcing Rods at each end shall be marked and also 2
mm relative position between clamp body and Armour Rods shall be
marked on one side. The load shall be increased to 12 kN at a loading
rate of 3 kN/min and held for one minute. At the end of this one minute
period, the relative displacement between clamp body and the armour
rods shall be observed. If the slippage is 2 mm or above, the test shall
be terminated. Otherwise, at the end of one minute the position of the
clamp body and 2 mm. relative positions between clamp body and
armour rods shall be marked on the other side. After the one minute
pause, the load shall be further increased at a loading rate of 3 kN/min,
and recording of load and displacement shall continue until either the
relative Position displacement between clamp body and armour rods
reaches more than 2 mm.or the load reaches the maximum slip load of
17 kN. On reaching either of the above values the test is terminated.
Visual examination of all paint marks shall be recorded, and a
measurement of any displacement recorded in the Table of Results.

Acceptance Criteria :

The Suspension Clamp has passed the Slip Test if the following
conditions are met :
 No slippage* shall occur at or below the specified minimum slip
load.

* Definition of no slippage in accordance with IEC 61284:1997 :-


Any relative movement less than 2 mm is accepted. The possible
couplings or elongations produced by the cable as a result of the
test itself are not regarded as slippage.
 Slippage shall occur between the specified maximum and minimum

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 139 of 190


Volume-V

slip load of 12 - 17 kN.


 There shall be no slippage of the Reinforcing Rods over the cable,
and no slippage of the Armour Rods over the Reinforcing Rods.
 The relative movement (i.e. more than 2 mm between Armour
Rods & Clamp body) between minimum 12 kN and maximum slip
17 kN, shall be considered as slip.
 The Armour Rods shall not be displaced from their original lay or
damaged**.

** Definition of no damage in accordance with convention


expressed in IEC 61284 : 1997 no damage, other than surface
flattening of the strands shall occur.
Any result outside these parameters is a failure.

8.07.03 Slip Strength Test of Tension Clamp


Tension clamps shall be fitted on a 8 m length of fibre optic cable on
both ends. The assembly shall be mounted on a tensile testing machine
and anchored in a manner similar to the arrangement to be used in
service. A tensile load shall gradually be applied up to 20 % of the RTS
of OPGW. Displacement transducers shall be installed to measure the
relative movement between the OPGW relative to the Reinforcing Rods
and Tension Dead -End relative to Reinforcing Rods. In addition,
suitable marking shall be made on the OPGW and Dead-End to confirm
grip. The load shall be gradually increased at a constant rate up to 50
% of the UTS and the position scale of the recorder is zeroed. The load
shall then gradually increased up to 95 % of the UTS and maintained
for one minute. After one minute pause, the load shall be slowly
released to zero and the marking examined and measured for any
relative movement.

Acceptance Criteria :

- No movement* shall occur between the OPGW and the Reinforcing


Rods, or between the Reinforcing Rods and the Dead-End assembly.
- No failure or damage or disturbance to the lay of the Tension Dead-
End, Reinforcing Rods or OPGW.
* Definition of no movement as defined in IEC 61284 : Any relative
movement less than 2 mm is accepted. The possible couplings or
elongations produced by the conductor as a result of the test itself are
not regarded as slippage.
Any result outside these parameters shall constitute a failure.

8.07.04 Grounding Clamp and Structure Mounting Clamp Fit Test


For structure mounting clamp, one series of tests shall be conducted
with two fibre optic cables installed, one series of tests with one fibre
optic cable installed in one groove, and one series of tests with one
fibre optic cable in the other groove. Each clamp shall be installed

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 140 of 190


Volume-V

including clamping compound as required on the fibre optic cable. The


nut shall be tightened on to the bolt by using torque wrench with a
torque of 5.5 kgm or supplier's recommended torque and the tightened
clamp shall be held for 10 minutes. After the test remove the fibre optic
cable and examine all its components for distortion, crushing or
breaking. Also the fibre optic cable shall be checked to ensure free
movement within the core using dial callipers to measure the diameter
of the core tube. The material shall be defined as failed if any visible
distortion, crushing, cracking or breaking of the core tube is observed
or the fibre optic cable within the core tube is not free to move, or
when the diameter of the core tube as measured at any location in the
clamped area is more than 0.5 mm larger or smaller of the core
diameter as measured outside the clamped area.

8.07.05 Structure Mounting Clamp Strength Test


The clamp and mounting assembly shall be assembled on a vertical 200
mm x 200 mm angle and a short length of fibre optic cable installed. A
vertical load of 200 kg shall be applied at the end of the mounting
clamp and held for 5 minutes. Subsequently, the load shall be increased
to 400 kg and held for 30 seconds. Any visible distortion, slipping or
breaking of any component of the mounting clamp or assembly shall
constitute failure.

8.07.05.1 Type Test on Vibration Damper

8.07.05.2 Dynamic Characteristic Test


The damper shall be mounted with its clamp tightened with torque
recommended by the manufacturer on shaker table capable of
simulating sinusoidal vibrations for Critical Aeolian Vibration frequency
band as determined through vibration analysis of undamped OPGW..
The damper assembly shall be vibrated vertically with a ±1 mm
amplitude from 5 to 15 Hz frequency and beyond 15 Hz at 0.5 mm to
determine following characteristics with the help of suitable recording
instruments.
(a) Force Vs frequency
(b) Phase angle Vs frequency
(c) Power dissipation Vs frequency
The Force Vs frequency curve shall not show steep peaks at resonance
frequencies and deep troughs between the resonance frequencies. The
resonance frequencies shall be suitably spread within the Aeolian
vibration frequency-band between the lower and upper dangerous
frequency limits determined by the vibration analysis of fibre optic cable
without dampers.
The above dynamic characteristics test shall be conducted on five
dampers. The variations between the samples tested shall conform to
the sample test limits.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 141 of 190


Volume-V

8.07.05.3 Vibration Analysis


The vibration analysis of the fibre optic cable shall be done with and
without damper installed on the span. The vibration analysis shall be
done on a digital computer using energy balance approach. The
following parameters shall be taken into account for the purpose of
analysis.

(a) The analysis shall be done for single fibre optic cable without
armour rods. The tension shall be taken as max Permissible
Every Day Tension (20% of UTS), for a span ranging from
100 m to 1100 m.

(b) The self damping factor and flexural stiffness (EI) for fibre
optic cable shall be calculated on the basis of experimental
results. The details to experimental analysis with these data
shall be furnished.

(c) Examine the Aeolian Vibration level of the fibre optic cable
with and without vibration damper installed at the
recommended location or wind velocity ranging from 0 to 30
Km per hour, predicting amplitude, frequency and vibration
energy input.

(d) From vibration analysis of fibre optic cable without damper,


antinode vibration amplitude and dynamic strain levels at
clamped span extremities as well as antinodes shall be
examined and thus lower and upper dangerous frequency
limits between which the Aeolian vibration levels exceed the
specified limits shall be determined.

(e) From vibration analysis of fibre optic cable with damper(s)


installed at the recommended location, the dynamic strain
level at the clamped span extremities, damper attachment
point and the antinodes on the fibre optic cable shall be
determined. In addition to above damper clamp vibration
amplitude and antinodes vibration amplitudes shall also be
examined.

(f) The dynamic strain levels at damper attachment point,


clamped span extremities and antinodes shall not exceed the
specified limits. The damper clamp vibration amplitude shall
not be more than that of the specified fatigue limits.

8.07.05.4 Vibration Damper Clamp Slip and Fatigue Tests

8.07.05.4.1 Test Set Up

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 142 of 190


Volume-V

The clamp slip and fatigue tests shall be conducted on a laboratory set
up with a minimum effective span length of 30m. The fibre optic cable
shall be tensioned at 15kN & shall not be equipped with protective
armour rods at any point.
Constant tension shall be maintained within the span by means of lever
arm arrangement. After the fibre optic cable has been tensioned,
clamps shall be installed to support the fibre optic cable at both ends
and thus influence of connecting hardware fittings are eliminated from
the free span. The clamps shall not be used for holding the tension on
the fibre optic cable. There shall be no loose parts, such as suspension
clamps, U bolts, on the test span supported between clamps mentioned
above. The span shall be equipped with vibration inducing equipment
suitable for producing steady standing vibration. The inducing
equipment shall have facilities for step less speed control as well as
step less amplitude arrangement. Equipment shall be available for
measuring the frequency, cumulative number of cycles and amplitude
of vibration at any point along the span.

8.07.05.4.2 Clamp Slip Test


The vibration damper shall be installed on the test span. The damper
clamp, after tightening with the manufacturer's specified tightening
torque, when subjected to a longitudinal pull of 2.5kN parallel to the
axis of fibre optic cable for a minimum duration of one minute shall not
slip, i.e., the permanent displacement between fibre optic cable and
clamp measured after removal of the load shall not exceed 1.0 mm.
The load shall be further increased until the clamp starts slipping. The
load at which the clamp slips shall not be more than 5kN.

8.07.05.4.3 Fatigue Test


The vibration damper shall be installed on the test span with the
manufacturer's specified tightening torque. It shall be ensured that the
damper shall be kept minimum three loops away from the shaker to
eliminate stray signals influencing damper movement.
The damper shall then be vibrated at the highest resonant frequency of
each damper mass. For dampers involving torsional resonant
frequencies, tests shall be done at torsional modes also in addition to
the highest resonant frequencies at vertical modes. The resonance
frequency shall be identified as the frequency at which each damper
mass vibrates with the maximum amplitude on itself. The amplitude of
vibration of the damper clamp shall be maintained not less than ±25/f
mm where f is the frequency in Hz.
The test shall be conducted for minimum ten million cycles at each
resonant frequency mentioned above. During the test, if resonance shift
is observed, the test frequency shall be tuned to the new resonant
frequency.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 143 of 190


Volume-V

The clamp slip test as mentioned herein above shall be repeated after
fatigue tests without retorquing or adjusting the damper clamp, and the
clamp shall withstand a minimum load equal to 80% of the slip strength
for a minimum duration of one minute.
After the above tests, the damper shall be removed from fibre optic
cable and subjected to dynamic characteristics test. There shall not be
any major deterioration in the characteristics of the damper. The
damper then shall be cut open and inspected. There shall not be any
broken, loose, or damaged part. There shall not be significant
deterioration or wear of the damper. The fibre optic cable under clamp
shall also be free from any damage.

For purposes of acceptance, the following criteria shall be applied:

a) There shall not be any frequency shift by more than


±2Hz for frequencies lower than 15Hz & ±3Hz for
frequencies higher than 15Hz.
b) The force response curve shall generally lie within
guaranteed % variation in reactance after fatigue test in
comparison with that before fatigue test by they
Supplier.
c) The power dissipation of the damper shall not be less
than guaranteed % variation in power dissipation before
fatigue test by the Supplier. However, it shall not be less
than minimum power dissipation which shall be governed
by lower limits of reactance and phase angle indicated in
the envelope.

8.07.06 Type Tests for In Line Splice Enclosures


Following Type tests shall be demonstrated on the In Line Splice
Enclosure(s) (Splice Enclosure/Box). For certain tests, lengths of the
fibre optic cable shall be installed in the splice box, and the fibres must
be spliced and looped in order to simulate conditions of use. The
attenuation of the fibres shall be measured, during certain tests, by
relevant Fibre Optic Test Procedures (IEC 794-1 procedures).

8.07.06.1 Temperature Cycling Test


FO cable is installed in the splice enclosure and optical fibres spliced
and looped. The box must be subjected to 5 cycles of temperature
variations of -40C to +65C with a dwell time of at least 2 hours on
each extreme.
Fibre loop attenuation shall be measured in accordance with IEC 794-1-
C10. The variation in attenuation shall be less than ±0.05dB. The final
humidity level, inside the box, shall not exceed the initial level, at the
closing of the box.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 144 of 190


Volume-V

8.07.06.2 Humid Heat test


The sealed splice enclosure, with fibres spliced and looped inside, must
be subjected to a temperature of +55C ±2C with a relative humidity
rate of between 90% and 95% for 5 days. The attenuation variation of
the fibres during the duration of the test shall be less than ±0.05dB,
and the internal humidity rate measured, less than 2%.

8.07.06.3 Rain Withstand Test


The splice enclosure with optical fibres cable installed and fibres spliced
fixed, shall be subjected to 24 hours of simulated rain in accordance
with IEC 60 testing requirements. No water seepage or moisture shall
be detected in the splice enclosure. The attenuation variation of the
fibres after the test shall be less than ±0.05dB.

8.07.06.4 Vibration Test


The splice enclosure, with fibres united inside, shall be subjected to
vibrations on two axes with a frequency scanning of 5 to 50 Hz. The
amplitude of the vibrations shall be constant at 0.450mm, peak to
peak, for 2 hours, for each of the vibrations' axes. The variation in
attenuation, of the fibres, shall be less than ±0.05dB. The splice
enclosure shall be examined for any defects or deformation. There shall
be no loosening or visible damage of the FO cable at the entry point.

8.07.06.5 Bending and Torsion test


The splice enclosure, with fibres spliced inside, shall be firmly held in
place and be subjected to the following sequence of mechanical
stresses on the cable:
a) 3 torsion cycles of ±180 shall be exercised on the cable. Each
cycle shall be less than one minute.
b) 3 flexure cycles of the cable, of ±180 with one cycle less than one
minute.
The variation in the attenuation, of the fibres, shall be less than
±0.05dB. The cables connection ring shall remain securely fixed to the
box with the connection maintained firmly. No defects/fissures shall be
noted on the joint ring or on the splice enclosure

8.07.06.6 Tensile test


The splice enclosure with cable fixed to the boxes shall be subjected to
a minimum tension of 448 N for a period of two minutes. No fissure
shall be noted in the connections or on the box.

8.07.06.7 Drop Test

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 145 of 190


Volume-V

With 2 lengths of 10 metres of cable fixed to the box, it shall be


dropped five times from a height of 11 metres. There shall be no
fissure, at all, of the box, and the connections shall remain tight. The
test shall be carried out in accordance with procedure described in IEC-
68-2-32.

8.07.07 Factory Acceptance Tests on Fibre Optic Cables


As specified in technical specifications, the Factory acceptance tests
shall be conducted on random sampling of fibre optic cable to be
supplied for the present procurement, prior to any shipment.

8.07.07.1 FAT On Fibre : Optical Acceptance Tests


The Optical acceptance tests listed in Table 4.5.1 below are applicable
for the fibres of all types of Fibre Optic Cables i.e. OPGW and approach
cable to be supplied. The listed tests follow testing requirements set
forth in IEEE standard 1138 section 4.2.2.1 and section 5.2.2.1. The
referenced sections specify the detailed test description. The
acceptance norm shall be as specified in the above mentioned IEEE
standards unless specified otherwise in the technical specifications.
Table 4.5.1

Factory Acceptance Tests for Fibres of all FO cables: Optical Tests

S. Acceptance Test
Test Name
No. Criteria procedure
1 Attenuation Coefficient
Point Discontinuities of
2
attenuation
AS per
3 Attenuation at Water Peak AS per
Technical
Technical
4 Chromatic Dispersion Specificatio
Specification
n
5 Core – Clad Concentricity Error
6 Cladding diameter
7 Fibre Tensile Proof Testing

The test reports for the above tests for all types of the fibres carried out
by the Fibre Manufacturer and used in the OPGW cables and approach
cable shall be shown to the inspector during OPGW cable FAT and shall
be submitted along with the OPGW cable FAT report.

8.07.08 Factory Acceptance Test On OPGW Cable

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 146 of 190


Volume-V

The factory acceptance tests for OPGW cable specified below in Table
4.6 follow the requirements set forth in section 4.1.2 and section
5.1.2 of IEEE standard 1138. The FAT shall be carried out on 10% of
offered drums in each lot as specified in technical specifications and the
optical tests shall be carried out in all fibers of the selected sample
drums. The Rated Tensile Strength test shall be carried out on one
sample in each lot.
Table 4.6
Factory Acceptance Tests On OPGW
Applicable standard: IEEE 1138
S. No. Factory Acceptance Test on Manufactured OPGW
1 Attenuation Co-efficient at 1310 nm and 1550 nm

2 Point discontinuities of attenuation

Visual Material verification and dimensional checks as per approved


3
DRS/Drawings

4 Rated Tensile Strength

5 Lay Length Measurements

8.07.09 Factory Acceptance Test On OPGW Fittings

The factory acceptance tests for OPGW Fittings as specified below in


Table 4.7. The sampling plan shall be as per IS 2486:

Table 4.7

Factory Acceptance Tests On OPGW Fittings

S. No. Factory Acceptance Test


Suspension Assembly
1 UTS/Mechanical Strength of the assembly
2 Clamp Slip Test
Visual Material verification and dimensional checks as per approved
3
DRS/Drawings
4 Mechanical strength of each component
Tension Assembly
5 Clamp Slip Strength test
Visual Material verification and dimensional checks as per approved
6
DRS/Drawings
S. No. Factory Acceptance Test
7 Mechanical strength of each component
Vibration Damper
8 Galvanising test on damper, masses and messenger wires
9 Damper response (resonant frequencies)
10 Clamp Slip test
11 Strength of messenger wires

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 147 of 190


Volume-V

12 Mass pull off test


Visual Material verification and dimensional checks as per approved
13
DRS/Drawings
Structure Mounting Clamp
14 Clamp fit test
15 Clamp Strength test
Visual Material verification and dimensional checks as per approved
16
DRS/Drawings

8.07.10 Factory Acceptance Test on In Line Splice Enclosures


The factory acceptance tests for In Line Splice Enclosures as specified
below in Table 4.8:
Table 4.8

Factory Acceptance Tests on In Line Splice Enclosures

S. No. Factory Acceptance Test

Visual check Kit Quantities and Specific Component Number for each
1 component of In Line Splice Enclosure and dimensional checks against the
approved drawings.

8.08 PACKING AND MARKING -


All conductors for export shipment are generally shipped on best
commercial practice non-returnable steel reels having suitable
dimension for winding a specified length.
Each length of cable shall be wound on a separate cable reel and the
cable ends shall be securely fastened to the reel to prevent the cable
from becoming loose in transit or during placing operations. Both ends
of the cable shall be sealed with a suitable plastic cap to prevent the
entry of moisture during shipping, handling and storage. Spare plastic
cap shall be provided with each drum.
The cable shall be shipped on reels designed to prevent damage to the
cable during shipment and installation. The wooden lagging will be
given a preventive treatment from termite and wood preservative
treatment.The construction of reels and markings shall be as per
approved documents.
The wire shall be furnished on reels of sufficiently sturdy construction to
withstand normal shipping, hauling and field erection. The size, length,
weight, manufacturer’s name or trade mark, date of manufacturer
direction of rolling for each drum, and contract number shall be clearly
marked on the outside of each drum. The wire shall be packed to
protect it from moisture, salt, or any other impurities which may cause
rust or other harmful effects.
The packing and shipping requirements for overhead galvanized steel
wire hardware shall be applied for assemblies and line accessories for
OPGW.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 148 of 190


Volume-V

Each package shall be clearly, legibly and durably marked on both sides
as follows:-
a. Name & designation of the consignee (to be furnished
by the purchaser.)
b. Ultimate destination (as required by the purchaser).
c. Items and respective quantities contained in the
package to be furnished by the purchaser.)
d. Net and gross weight of the material.
e. Gross weight of each package.

8.09 DESIGN AND DRAWING DETAILS

The design, manufacture and performance of OPGW and accessories


shall comply with all the requirements of the latest editions of
International codes and standards applicable. Nothing in this
specification shall be construed to relieve the vendor of this
responsibility.
The design and workmanship shall be in accordance with best
engineering practices to ensure satisfactory performance and long
service life and shall be such as has been proved to be suitable for the
intended purpose.
The equipment offered shall be robust and durable. It shall be generally
possible to set up and assemble the equipment without the use of
special tools but in case special tools are required for installation the
same shall be provided free cost basis with the supply of OPGW.
The equipment offered shall require minimum maintenance.All relevant
requirements of data and drawings for galvanized steel wire and its
hardware shall be applicable for OPGW and joint boxes.

8.10 INSTALLATION OF OPGW

The Supplier shall provide a complete description of all procedures and


methods to be used during installation of the OPGW.
The installation methods and tools required for OPGW shall be similar to
those of conventional overhead ground wire. The OPGW shall be strung,
sagged and clipped before phase conductors are strung. The OPGW
shall be connected to the transmission tower for grounding at every
location

8.11 OVERHEAD GROUND WIRE WITH OPTICAL FIBER


CONNECTIONS

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 149 of 190


Volume-V

The jointing of overhead ground wires shall be performed using joint


boxes located on tension towers. All overhead ground wire connections
shall be of the underpass variety.

8.11.01 OPTICAL FIBER CONNECTIONS

The jointing of optical fiber shall be performed using arc-fusion splicing.


All cores shall be spliced at every locations, fiber identification shall be
matched and maintained for the entire length of the installation.
The optical fiber splicing loss shall not be more than 0.10 dB for any
one joint, and shall average no more than 0.05 dB per joint on any
given repeater span. Splicing loss shall be measured immediately after
the splice has been made, and if the splice does not meet minimum
standards above, it shall be replaced.
All successful splices shall be protected using a heat shrink protection
sleeve with integrated reinforcement, or some other material/process
providing equivalent protection.
An additional slack of 1 to 1.5 m shall be provided on each side of each
splice, and stored securely in the joint box.

8.11.02 COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT AND BOUGHT OUT


ITEMS

8.11.02.1 Offered material shall be complete in all respects and shall


include all minor component, accessories, small wiring etc., not
specifically mentioned in this order, specifications etc; but essential
for the completeness of the system. Supplier shall not be eligible for
extra charges in respect of such minor components, accessories, small
wiring etc., though not included specifically in this Tender but requires
for satisfactory operation of equipment offered.

8.11.02.2 It is obligatory on the part of supplier to ensure that supply


of all accessories along with Main equipment are simultaneously
delivered to avoid any holdups. Responsibility for obtaining timely
supplies of bought out items will rest on the supplier.

8.11.02.3 It may be noted that in case of damages/shortages


due to improper packing or any other negligence ,replenishment
shall be arranged within one months time. For bought out items,
responsibility for guarantee and obtaining immediate
replacement in case any defects are noticed and also in case
defective supply of any item is reported, will rest on the
suppliers.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 150 of 190


Volume-V

ANNEXURE -A

OPGW TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION


(To be submitted by manufacturer)

Configuration : To be filled by bidder.

Guaranteed value
Description Unit
48 fibers

Applicable standard - IEEE std. 1138:2009

Number of fiber
No. 48

Aluminium-clad steel wire To be filled by Bidder


Aluminium alloy wire
Structure No/dia

Stainless steel tube -do-

Lay direction of outer layer


- (Left-hand (S)

Ratio of length of lay or a layer to nominal


Times To be filled by Bidder
outside diameter of that layer
Outer diameter mm -do-
Aluminium-clad steel wire -do-
2
(*) Cross Aluminium alloy wire mm -do-

section
Steel tube -do-

(*) Approximate weight Kg/km -do-

Rated tensile strength (RTS) (min) -do-


Ultimate tensile strength (UTS) (min) Kg

2
(*) Modules of elasticity Kg/mm -do-
(*) Co-efficient of linear expansion /deg C -do-
D.C. resistance at 20 deg C (max) ohm/km -do-

Short circuit current capacity for 1 second


(Initial temperature : 40 ° C) KA 6.32

Assumed maximum temperature under short


circuit current deg C To be filled by Bidder

Remark – (*) means data for information only.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 151 of 190


Volume-V

ANNEXURE-B

PROPERTIES OF INDIVIDUAL WIRE


(To be submitted by manufacturer)

Guaranteed value
Description Unit
48 fibers
Type of individual wire - ACS Wires Al-alloy

Applicable standard -
To be filled To be filled
by bidder by bidder
Standard diameter mm -do- -do-

Tolerance of diameter mm -do- -do-


2
Minimum tensile strength Kg/mm -do- -do-
Minimum elongation in 250 mm % -do- -do-

Minimum conductivity %ACS -do- -do-

Minimum number of twisting


No. -do- -do-
(100 x dia)

Minimum thickness of Aluminium mm -do- -do-

-do-
Properties of wrapping % -do-

ANNEXURE – C

PROPERTIES OF OPTICAL FIBER UNIT


(To be submitted by manufacturer)

Guaranteed
Description Unit value 48
Fibers
Loose type
(Stainless Steel Tube
Buffer type - type preffered)
Number of Loose tube No. To be filled by bidder
Total No.of Fibers No 48
(*) Diameter Mm To be filled by bidder
Number of empty tube Nos. To be filled by bidder
Loose tube
To be filled by bidder
(*) Material -

Remark : (*) means data for information only.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 152 of 190


Volume-V

ANNEXURE - D

PROPERTIES OF OPTICAL FIBER

Description Unit Guaranteed value


Applicable standard - ITU-TG 652 D
Cladding diameter µm 125±1
Core concentricity error µm ≤ 0.6
Cladding non-circularity % ≤ 1.0
Mode field diameter at 1310 mm (8.6-9.5)+0.6
µm

Attenuation coefficient at 1310 mm dB/km ≤ 0.4

at 1550 mm dB/km ≤ 0.3


Attenuation at water peak at 1383±3 nm dB/km ≤ 0.4
Bend performance
dB/km ≤ 0.05 at 1310 nm
@1310 nm (75±2mm diameter mandrel),
100 turns, Attenuation Rise
@1550 nm (75±2mm diameter mandrel),
100 turns, Attenuation Rise
dB/km ≤ 0.10 at 1550 nm
@1550 nm (32±0.5mm diameter
mandrel), 1turn
dB/km ≤ 0.50 at 1550 nm

Temperature dependence (-60°C


dB/km ≤ 0.05 dB
+85°C)
̃
Cutoff wavelength for cabled fiber (λ) nm ≤ 1260 nm

Chromatic dispersion
@ 1288 nm 1̃ 339 nm ps/(nm.km) ≤ 3.5
@ 1271 nm 1̃ 360 nm ps/(nm.km) ≤ 5.3
@ 1550 nm ps/(nm.km) ≤ 18
Zero dispersion wavelength Nm 1300 to 1324
2
Zero dispersion Slope Ps/Nm .km ≤0.093
½
Polarization mode dispersion (PMD) ps/km ≤0.2
Point discontinuities of attenuation dB ≤0.1@1310&1550 nm
Proof-test level Gpa ≥ 0.69

ANNEXURE-E

COLOR CODE OF OPTICAL FIBER UNIT

Loose Tube : To be filled by bidder.


Fiber Colors(12 No;s)
Blue,Orange,Green,Brown,Slate,white,Red,Black,Yellow,Violet,Pink and Aqua

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 153 of 190


Volume-V

ANNEXURE-F

DATA REQUREMENT SHEETS FOR INLINE SPLICE ENCLOSURE

S.
Parameter Unit Particulars
No.
1. Dimensions HWD mm To be filled by bidder
2. Weight Kg To be filled by bidder
3. Color and Finish Stainless Steel AISI 304
4. Cable Glanding & Fixing Mechanical clamp
Stainless Steel AISI 304
5. Construction materials & Gauge
(1.0 - 3.0 )mm
6. Locking arrangements Bolts and nuts
Installation Clearances:
Front access: N/A
7.
Rear access: N/A
Cm2 To be filled by bidder
Top*Bottom*Slides
8. IP Protection Code IP 68
9. Total number of optical couplings n* To be filled by bidder
10. Provision of pass through splicing Yes/No Yes
Whether filled with suitable
11. Yes/No To be filled by bidder
encapsulant
Method(s) for mounting with the
12. Mechanical
tower

Optical Fiber Cable Accommodations

13. Cable Glanding Cable Blocking


Maximum number of cables that can
14. n* To be filled by bidder
be accommodated
Diameter(s) of cables that can be
15. mm To be filled by bidder
accommodated :
Details of Splice Trays :
Dimension: Mm To be filled by bidder
Material/Gauge: ABS/1 mm
17.
Weight: kg To be filled by bidder
Color & Finish: RAL 7035
Method of mounting: Release
18. Maximum number of splices per tray n* To be filled by bidder
19. Number of splices per tray n* To be filled by bidder
Provision of maximum splice
20. n* To be filled by bidder
organizers
Do splice trays require a separate
Yes/No To be filled by bidder
enclosure?
If so:
Manufacturer:
21. Dimensions: H*W*D Cm
Weight: kg
Color and Finish:
Method(s) of Mounting:
Construction Materials & Gauge:

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 154 of 190


Volume-V

Locking arrangements
Installation Clearances:
Front Access:
m
Rear Access:
Top*Bottom*Slides:
22. Excess length of Fiber service loops m 1.5 + 1.5

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 155 of 190


Volume-V

SECTION- 9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ERECTION OF 220KV
AND 132KV TRANSMISSION LINES

9.01 INDIAN STANDARDS/CODE :


The material and services under this section shall conform to the
requirements of the latest revisions and amendments available at the
time of placement of order of all the relevant Indian standards/codes
listed here under or equivalent International Standards, except as
modified in this document.

S.N Indian standards Title


o.
1. IS:5613-1995 Code of practice for design, installation
(part-II) and maintenance of overhead power
lines.
Sec.-1 - Designs.
Sec.-2 - Installation &
Maintenance

2. IS:269-1967 Ordinary rapid hardening and low heat


Portland cement.
3. IS:456-2000 Code of practice for plain and
reinforced concrete

4. IS:1786-1966 Cold twisted steel bars for concrete


reinforcements
5. IS:4091-1967 Code of practice for design &
construction of foundation for
transmission line towers & poles

9.02 LINE MATERIALS:


9.02.01 Conductor:

The conductor used in the132kV line will be single ACSR Panther


Conductor and the conductor size is 30/3.00mm A1. + 7/3.00 mm steel
and the conductor used in the 220kV line will be single ACSR Zebra
Conductor and the conductor size is 54/3.18mm A1. + 7/3.18 mm steel.
9.02.02 Earth wire :
The Earth wire to be used on the line shall be 7/3.66 mm; 95
kg/mm2 quality galvanized steel stranded wire.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 156 of 190


Volume-V

9.02.03 Insulator Strings with Hardware Fittings:

(A) For 220kV lines


(i) Single suspension and single tension strings will be used on
the line as under:
a. At suspension locations:
13 disc single suspension strings having 70KN E&MS of
255x145 mm size disc insulators with AGS type clamps
will be used.
b. At tension locations :
14-disc single tension strings with 160 KN E&MS disc
insulators of 280x170 mm size disc insulators will be used
with compression type dead end clamp.
(ii) In the cases of Railway/Road/River/Other transmission line
crossing, double suspension/double tension insulator strings
will be used.
(B) For 132kV lines
(i) Single suspension and single tension strings will be used on
the line as under:
a. At suspension locations:
9 disc single suspension strings having 70KN E&MS of
255x145 mm size disc insulators with AGS type clamps
will be used.
b. At tension locations :
(ii) 10-disc single tension strings with 90 KN E&MS disc insulators
of 255x145 mm size disc insulators will be used with
compression type dead end clamp.
(iii) In the cases of Railway/Road/River/Other transmission line
crossing, double suspension/double tension insulator strings
will be used.
9.02.04 Conductor Accessories:
(i) AGS type suspension clamps shall be used with
suspension strings.
(ii) Vibration Dampers (4-R type) shall be used for Conductors.
9.02.05 Miscellaneous Items:

Enameled Number Plates, Phase Plates and Danger Board, Bolts


and Nuts, Spring washers, Pack washers and other tower
accessories like ‘D’ Shackle, Hanger, U-Bolts and fasteners etc.,
shall be provided with the tower.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 157 of 190


Volume-V

9.03 DETAILED SURVEY/CHECK SURVEY:


The contractor will have to carry out detailed survey of the line for which
route map indicating the proposed alignment of the transmission line
will be handed over by the Employer. If the detailed survey is already
conducted by the Employer for some portion of the line, the profiles for
such portion will be handed over to the Contractor for check survey. It
may please be noted that no check survey is required to be conducted
for the portion of line for which detail survey is conducted by the
contractor himself.
9.03.01 Detailed Survey:-

(d) At the starting point of the commencement of route survey, an


angle iron spike 65 x 65 x 1000mm shall be driven firmly into the
ground to show only 150mm above the ground level. A punch
mark on the top section of the angle iron shall be made to
indicate location of the surveying instrument. Teak wood pegs 50
x 50 x 650 mm shall be driven at prominent positions at intervals
of not more than 750 meter along the transmission line to be
surveyed up to the next angle point. 125 mm wire nails should
be fixed on the top of these pegs to show the location of
instrument. The pegs shall be driven firmly into the ground to
show only 100 mm above ground level. At angle positions,
stones shall be put up for easy identification. Paint mark in
white lead paint shall be put in, about 300 mm squares with a
direction indication, on nearby boulders, rocks, or trees, along
the complete line alignment. At peg position, identification marks
giving the peg position, with reference to painting marks, shall
be given. The white lead paint mark shall indicate to the
individual the direction of alignment from either direction.
(e) Routing/Re-routing of transmission line through
protected/reserved forest area should be avoided. In case it is
not possible to avoid the forests or areas having large trees
completely, then keeping in view of the overall economy, the
route should be aligned in such a way that cutting of trees is
minimum.
(f) The route should have minimum crossings of Major river, Railway
lines, National/State highways, overhead EHV power line and
communication lines.
(g) The number of angle points shall be kept to minimum.
(h) The distances between the terminal points specified shall be kept
shortest possible, consistent with the terrain that is encountered.
(i) Marshy and low lying areas, river beds and earth slip zones shall
be avoided to minimize risk to the foundations.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 158 of 190


Volume-V

(j) It would be preferable to utilize level ground for the alignment.


(k) Crossing of power lines shall be minimum. Alignment will be kept
at a minimum distance of 300 m from power lines to avoid
induction problems on the lower voltage lines.
(l) Crossing of communication line shall be minimized and it shall be
preferably at right angle. Proximity and parallelism with telecom
lines shall be eliminated to avoid danger of induction to them
(m) Areas subjected to flooding such as nalah shall be avoided.
(n) Restricted areas such as civil and military airfield shall be
avoided. Care shall also be taken to avoid aircraft landing
approaches.
(o) All alignment should be easily accessible both in dry and rainy
seasons to enable maintenance throughout the year.
(p) Certain areas such as quarry sites, tea, tobacco and saffron fields
and rich plantations, gardens and nurseries which will present the
Employer problems in acquisition of right of way and way leave
clearance during construction and maintenance should be
avoided.
(q) Angle points should be selected such that shifting of the point
within 100 m radius is possible at the time of construction of the
line.
(r) The line routing should avoid large habitations, densely populated
areas, Forests, Animal/Bird sanctuary, reserve coal belt areas, oil
pipe line/underground inflammable pipe lines etc to the extent
possible.
(s) The areas requiring special foundations and those prone to
flooding should be avoided.
(t) From the field book entries, the route plan and level profile shall
be plotted and prepared to the scales of 1=2000 horizontal and
1=200 vertical on 1 mm/5 mm/1 cm square paper.
(u) If the difference in levels be too high, the chart may be broken up
according to requirement. A 400 meter overlap shall be shown
on each following sheet. The chart shall progress from left to
right. For convenience in handling, the sheet size may be limited
to 594x841 mm (Al) size.
(v) After completing the detail survey, profiles shall be submitted to
the Employer duly spotted with tower for approval. While
submitting the profiles after conducting the detail survey, the
contractor will also submit a copy of route alignment on the route
map indicating the surveyed route.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 159 of 190


Volume-V

9.03.02 Check Survey:-

The Contractor shall conduct the check survey only for such
portion of line for which detailed survey has been done by the Employer
after the profiles are handed over to the Contractor. The check survey
shall include checking of deviation angles, checking of levels at critical
points. After completing the check survey, profiles shall be re-submitted
to the Employer duly spotted with tower for approval.
9.03.03 The requirement of tower site leveling and revetment work, if
required, shall also be marked by the Contractor on the
profiles while carrying out the detail or check survey work.
9.03.04 If due to site conditions any change in the tower
location/provision of extension is considered necessary
compared to approve profiles, the contractor shall bring the
same to the knowledge of the Employer well in time and get
revised approval of the profile before setting the stubs.
The revised approval shall be conveyed to the Contractor by
the Employer.
9.04 APPROVED PROFILE:
(Applicable for check survey only)
9.04.01 The detailed survey may be conducted by the Employer for
some portion of the transmission line and in such case, the
profiles will be handed over to contractor for carrying out
check survey and marking of towers on the profiles. The
profile will be prepared on cm. graph paper on scale 1:2000
horizontal and 1:200 vertical. The profile will be submitted
along with the route map showing the route followed by the
contractor during check survey.
9.04.02 The route alignment surveyed by the Employer shall be
marked at angle points. At angle points concrete blocks shall
be provided and in the straight alignment marking will be done
by pegs.
9.04.03 The Contractor will be responsible for the correct setting of
towers as shown in approved profiles. If towers after erection
are found to be out of the approved alignment/position in the
profile, the Contractor will dismantle and re-erect them
correctly fully at his own cost and without extension of time.
9.04.04 Soil Resistivity:-

While carrying out detailed/ check survey work, the Soil


Resistivity values will have to be measured at convenient points along
the route, not exceeding 2.50 Km between adjacent points. The Soil
Resistivity wiil be measured using 4 electrod method with an inter
electrod spacing of 50 M . The following formula shall be used :

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 160 of 190


Volume-V

P=2πaR
Where a = Interelectrod spacing = 50M
R = Earth resistance measured in Ohms
P = Soil Resistivity in Ohm- m
The soil resistivity values shall be submitted duly marked on the
route map and also in the form of statement. The quoted rates for
detailed survey/ check survey work shall be inclusive of cost of
measuring soil resistivity values along the proposed route and the
contractor will not be paid separately for this work.
9.05 EXCAVATION:
9.05.01 Except as specifically otherwise provided, all excavation for
footing shall be made to the lines and grades of the foundation. The
excavation walls shall be vertical and the pit dimensions shall be such
as to allow a clearance of 150mm on all sides from the foundation pit,
where form boxes are used. In undercut/stepped (slab type)
foundations where form box is not required to be used at the base, the
pit dimensions should be as per the standard drawings. All excavation
shall be protected so as to maintain a clean sub-grade, until the footing
is placed, by using timbering, shoring or casing, if necessary. Any
sand, mud, silt or other undesirable materials which may have
accumulated in the excavation shall be removed by the Contractor
before placing concrete.
9.05.02 The Soil to be excavated for tower foundations shall be
classified as under for the purpose of payment of excavation for
tower site leveling and building stone revetment:
(a) Normal Dry Soil : Soil removable by means of ordinary pick
axes and shovels (Normal Soil, intermediate Soil fall
under this category).
(b) Wet Soil : Soil as per (a) above, where the sub Soil water
table is encountered within the range of foundation
depth, the Soil below the water table and that at
locations where pumping or bailing out of water is
required due to presence of surface water, will be
treated as wet Soil.
(c) Black cotton (Dry/Wet) :To be used at locations where soil is
clayey type, not necessarily black in colour, which
shrinks when dry and swells when wet, resulting in
differential movement extending to a maximum depth
of about 3.5 meter below ground level.
(d) Soft Rock: This will mean fissured rock i.e. decomposed rock,
hard gravel, kankar, limestone, laterite or any other Soil
of similar nature which can be excavated with pick axe,

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 161 of 190


Volume-V

crow bar etc. However, if required, light blasting may be


resorted to for loosening the material but this will not in
any way entitle the excavation to be classified as hard
rock.
(e) Hard Rock: Hard rock will be that which requires chiseling or
drilling and blasting.
9.05.03 No extra charges shall be admissible for the removal
the fallen earth in the pits when once excavated.
9.05.04 If water is encountered in the foundation pit, de-
watering will have to be done. The cost of dewatering shall be
deemed to be included in the unit rates of excavation for
foundation work.
9.05.05 For excavation of foundation in rock, where blasting is
unavoidable, care should be taken to minimize the volume of concrete
necessary for filling up the blasted area. The blasted area shall be
reduced to the minimum possible so that the specified form for the
foundation could be obtained. No extra payment for excavation in hard
rock shall be allowed if the excavated area exceeds the designed
excavation volumes. Similarly, no extra payment shall be made if
concrete volume exceeds the designed volume due to excessive
blasting.
9.05.06 The payment for excavation shall be made as per actual
type of soil encountered at the time of excavation, but the total
payment for excavation portion shall not exceed the amount as payable
for excavation considering the foundation as classified for that location.
9.05.07 The Contractor shall arrange requisite blasting material,
excavation and drilling equipment, necessary license etc., at his own
cost and the quoted rates shall be deemed to be inclusive of all such
costs.

9.05.08 The decision of the owner shall be final and binding with
respect to classification of soil and foundation.

9.06 CLASSIFICATION OF FOUNDATIONS :

9.06.01 The foundation designs shall depend upon the type of


Soil, sub-Soil water level and the presence of surface water which
have been classified as follows:
(A) For 132 kV Double Circuit /220kV Double Circuit/ 220kV
Multi Circuit lines:-
(i) Normal dry : To be used for locations where normal
dry cohesive or non-cohesive soils are
met.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 162 of 190


Volume-V

(ii) Wet : To be used for locations :


(a) Where sub-soil water is met at
1.5meter or more below the ground level.
(b)Which are in surface water for long
periods with water penetration not
exceedingone meter below the ground
level e.g. the paddy fields.
(iii) Partially Submerged: To be used at locations where sub-soil
water level is met between 0.75 meter to
1.5 meter below the ground level.
(iv) Fully Submerged : To be used at locations where sub-soil
water level is met less than 0.75 meter
below ground level.
(v) Black cotton(Dry/Wet): To be used at locations where soil is
clayey type, not necessarily black in
colour, which shrinks when dry and
swells when wet, resulting in differential
movement extending to a maximum depth
of about 3.5meter below ground level.
(vi) Dry Fissured rock: To be used at locations where decomposed
or fissured rock, hard gravel, kanker,
limestone, laterite or any other soil of
similar nature is met. Under cut type
foundation is to be used for fissured rock
locations.
(vii) Submerged Fissured rock: In case of fissured rock locations
where water level is met at 1.5meter or
more below ground level, submerged
fissured rock foundations shall be adopted.
If after soil investigation, water level is
encountered at less than 1.5meter below
ground level, a separate foundation shall be
developed.

(viii) Hard rock : The locations where chiseling, drilling and


blasting is required for excavation, hard
rock type foundations are to be used.
(B) For 132kV M/C lines:-

(i) Normal dry : To be used for locations where normal


dry cohesive or non-cohesive soils are
met.
(ii) Black cotton(Dry/Wet):To be used at locations where soil is
clay type, not necessarily black in colour,
which shrinks when dry and swells when

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 163 of 190


Volume-V

wet, resulting in differential movement


extending to a maximum depth of about
3.5 meter below ground level.
(iii) Dry Fissured rock: To be used at locations where decomposed
or fissured rock, hard gravel, kanker,
limestone, laterite or any other soil of
similar nature is met. Under cut type
foundation is to be used for fissured rock
locations.
(iv) Composite soil: To be used at location where soil is clay
type up to 1 meter depth from top and
balance is Normal/Intermediate soil.

9.07 SHORING OF PITS:


Shoring of pits with shuttering on the internal walls surrounding the
vertical facing of approved dimensions of the pit shall be done when
the Soil condition is so bad that there is likelihood of accident due to
falling of surrounding earth in foundation pit. The cost of carrying out
shoring & shuttering shall be deemed to be included in the unit rate of
excavation for foundation work and no extra payment shall be made on
this account.
9.08 TOWER SITE LEVELLING:
In case of foundations located on sloping ground, it may be necessary
to level the ground for locating the tower. In leveling the tower site,
only excavation will be allowed. The Contractor shall quote separate
rates for excavation for purpose of site leveling for dry Soil, wet Soil,
soft and hard rock in respective Schedule. The requirement of tower
site leveling will be decided by the Employer’s site Engineer and will be
marked by the Contractor in the profiles while carrying out the check
survey work.
9.09 SETTING OF STUBS:
9.09.01 The Contractor shall be responsible for correct setting of
stubs. Discrepancies, if any, shall be brought to the notice of Employer
and final approval shall be taken before execution of work. The stub
shall be set correctly in accordance with approved method at the exact
locations and alignment and imprecisely correct levels. The stub
setting Templates shall be used for proper setting of stubs. Stubs shall
be set in the presence of Employer’s representative available at site
whenever required and for which the contractor shall give adequate
advance intimation to the site Engineer.
9.09.02 The foundations are to be made as per designs and
drawings approved by the Employer. Extent of the work as defined by

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 164 of 190


Volume-V

such drawings shall not be exceeded except in very exceptional cases


where the prior approval of Employer has been obtained.
9.09.03 The setting of stubs in hard rock foundation may require
cutting of stubs depending on depth at which hard rock is encountered.
The cutting of stubs and drilling of new holes for fixing cleats etc. shall
be considered inclusive in the rate of foundation of towers in hard rock.
However, the cut pieces of stubs shall be returned to EMPLOYER.
9.09.04 Setting of stub at each location shall be approved by the
Employer’s site Engineer. This approval shall not however, absolve the
Contractor of his responsibility of correct setting of stubs and casting of
foundations, who will be required to rectify the faulty work at his own
expense.
9.10 PLACEMENT OF REINFORCEMENT:
9.10.01 Some of the tower foundations may be designed with steel
reinforcement so as to achieve better foundation strength with lesser
space. The cost of placing of reinforcement steel, binding etc. in the
foundation pit shall be paid as per rate to be quoted in the price
schedule.
9.10.02 The Contractor shall arrange foundation reinforcement steel
etc. at their cost which shall be deemed to be included in the quoted
rate of placement of reinforcement steel. The reinforcement bars will
have to be properly cut, bent in required shape and placed in the
foundation in approved manner after due cleaning of oil, grease or
organic matter. The reinforcement shall be properly tied by binding
wire.
9.11 CONCRETE:
9.11.01 The cement concrete used for the foundation shall be of
1:2:4 mix ratio (M150) with 20mm nominal size stone metal for
chimney portion and 40mm nominal size stone metal for pyramid or
slab portions. 1:3:6 mix ratios (M 100) shall be used for base padding
(lean pad). For RCC, the aggregates shall preferably be of 20mm
nominal size.
9.11.02 The cement required for the purpose of foundations,
building revetment walls etc. shall be arranged by the Contractor at
his own cost, which shall be deemed to be included in the cost of
foundations.
9.11.03 The sand used for the concrete shall be arranged by the
Contractor at his own cost including necessary license etc., which shall
be deemed to be included in the cost of foundations. The sand shall be
composed of hard silicate materials. It shall be clean and of a
sharp angular grit type and free from earthy or organic matter and
deleterious salts.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 165 of 190


Volume-V

9.11.04 The aggregate shall be arranged by the contractor at his


own cost including necessary license etc, which shall be deemed to be
included in the cost of foundations. The aggregate shall be of clean
broken hard granite or other stone specified or approved by the
Employer. It shall be of hard and coarse-grained quality. It shall also
be as far as possible cube like, preferably angular, but not flaky,
perfectly clean and free from earth, organic or other deleterious
matter. 40mm aggregate shall be of size as will pass through a mesh of
40 mm measured in the clear and 20 mm aggregate through 20mm
square mesh measured in clear.
9.11.05 The water used for mixing concrete shall be arranged by
the contractor at his own cost including necessary license etc, which
shall be deemed to be included in the cost of foundations. The water
used shall be fresh, clean and free from oil, acid and alkali, organic
materials or other deleterious substances. Salty/Saline or brackish
water should not be used. Potable water is generally satisfactory.
9.11.06 The concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer.
However in case of locations not accessible for concrete mixers, hand
mixing may be permitted at the discretion of our site Engineer.
9.11.07 Mixing shall be continued until there is uniform
distribution of materials and the mixing is uniform in colour and
consistency but in no case the mixing is done for less than two
minutes. Normally mixing shall be done close to the foundation, but in
case it is not possible, the concrete may be mixed at the nearest
convenient place. The concrete shall be transported from the place of
mixing to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable by
methods, which shall prevent the segregation or loss of any ingredient.
The concrete shall be placed and compacted before setting
commences. The transportation cost of these materials shall be
deemed to be included in the cost of foundations.
9.11.08 The concrete should be mixed as stiff as per the
requirements of placing the concrete in the form boxes, with ease and
the degree to which the concrete resists segregation. Hence the
quantity of water used should not be too much.
9.11.09 Proper form boxes adequately braced to retain proper
shape while concreting should be used for chimney or pyramid and slab
portions. The form boxes should be made water tight so that cement
cream may not come out leaving only sand and jelly consequently
forming of honeycombing in the concrete. The form boxes shall be
cleaned and oiled before these are used for concreting.
9.11.10 The concrete shall be laid in 150mm layers and
consolidated well so that the cement cream works up to the top and
no honeycombing is left in the concrete. Concreting is to be done
continuously so that the subsequent layers are laid before the initial

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 166 of 190


Volume-V

setting of the bottom layer begins. The consolidation of concrete shall


normally be done by using vibrators.
9.11.11 After concreting the chimney portion up to the
required height, the top surface should be finished smooth, with
slight slope towards the outer edge, to drain off the rainwater falling
on the coping.
9.11.12 In wet locations, the site must be kept completely de-
watered both during the placing of the concrete and up to 24 hours
after completion. There should be no spilling to concrete by water
during this period.
9.11.13 The form boxes shall be removed only after at least 24
hours after the completion of concreting. After removal of the forms
and boxes the concreted surface wherever required shall be repaired
with a mixture of rich cement and sand mortar in the shortest possible
time.
The cost of carrying out concreting of shall be payable as per unit
rates quoted by the Bidder.
9.12 BACKFILLING AND REMOVAL OF STUB TEMPLATE:
9.12.01 Following opening of form work and removal of
shoring and shuttering, if required, backfilling shall be started after
24 hours of casting repairs, if any, to the foundation concrete.
Backfilling shall normally be done with the excavated Soil, unless it
consists of large boulders, which shall be broken to a maximum size of
80mm.
9.12.02 The backfill materials should be clean and free from
organic or other foreign materials The earth shall be deposited in
maximum 200mm layers, leveled, and wetted and rammed
properly before another layer of earth is deposited. Care shall be
taken that the back filling is started from the foundation end only in the
pits towards the outer end.
9.12.03 The backfilling and grading shall be carried to an elevation
of about 150mm above the finished ground level to drain out water.
After backfilling, 50mm high earthen embankment (bandh) will be
made along the sides of excavated pits and sufficient water will be
poured in the backfilled earth for at least next 24 hours.
9.12.04 The stub setting Templates shall be opened only after the
completion of back-filling.
9.12.05 After completing stringing work, if level of backfilling of
some of the locations gets settled and it is required to backfill the
locations again, the same would be done by the contractor at no extra
cost.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 167 of 190


Volume-V

9.12.06 No extra charge is admissible for carrying out


backfilling of foundation pit (including backfilling from borrowed
earth if required) and the cost of backfilling shall be deemed to be
included in the cost of excavation quoted by the bidder in the price
schedule.
9.13 CURING:
The concrete, after it is 24 hours old, shall be cured by keeping the
concrete wet continuously for a period of 14 days after laying. The
pit may be backfilled with selected earth sprinkled with necessary
amount of water and well consolidated in layers not exceeding
200mm of consolidated thickness after a minimum period of 24
hours and thereafter both the backfilled earth and exposed chimney
top shall be kept wet for the remainder of the prescribed time of 14
days. The uncovered concrete chimney above the backfilled earth shall
be kept wet by providing empty cement bags dipped in water fully
wrapped around the concrete chimney for curing duly ensuring that the
bags are kept wet by frequent pouring of water on them. The
Contractor may use anti curing paint. However no extra payment
shall be made on this account.
9.14 BUILDING STONE REVETMENT:
Stone revetment in 1:5 cement mortars shall be constructed by the
Contractor at specified locations. The detailed proposal in consultation
with the site Engineer, for carrying out revetment work shall be
submitted to the concerned Superintending Engineer, EHT
Construction and approval shall be obtained before carrying out
revetment work. The top seal cover of revetment work shall be done
with 1:2:4 normal mixes. All materials including cement shall be
provided by the contractor and cost of building revetment shall be
deemed to include cost of such materials also i.e. Cement, sand, metal
and stone. Curing of revetment shall be done as specified for tower
foundation. The back filling of the inside of the revetment wall with
Soil/borrowed earth will be paid for extra on per m³ basis and shall
include its compacting and watering. The excavation for revetment
foundation shall be paid at the rates as indicated by the bidder in Price
Schedule. The revetment work, wherever necessary, shall have to be
completed before taking up final tensioning work in the Section.
9.15 TOWER EARTHING:
9.15.01 For the purpose of earthing, necessary earthing rods
(25mm dia, 2 meter long) connecting clamps, and connecting
wire will be provided by the contractor. The earthing rods are to be
hammered preferably in the side wall of foundation pits and connected
to stub by 7/4.00mm Earth wire and with necessary connecting clamps
before concreting the foundation. If it is not possible to tie the rods in
the foundation pit i.e. in rocky location, they shall be

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 168 of 190


Volume-V

buried near the foundation pit and connected to the stubs. The earthing
rods are to be provided in every leg of the tower. Each tower shall be
earthed before the foundation is casted.
9.15.02 The tower footing resistance of all towers shall be
measured in dry whether after the erection and before the stringing of
Earth wire. The counterpoise earthing shall be resorted to, in
accordance with the instructions of the site Engineer, in case the tower
footing resistance (TFR) exceeds the specified value. It shall be
ensured that the tower footing resistance is less than 10 ohms. Each
tower footing resistance shall be intimated (along with the tower
location number) while submitting the progress report of tower
erection.
9.15.03 Counterpoise Earthing :

In case of high resistivity, counterpoise earthing shall be provided


which consists of four lengths of galvanized steel stranded wires,
7/4.00mm fitted with each leg of the tower with proper clamps for
connection to the tower leg at one end. The counterpoise will be laid
radially away from the tower and will normally be 15 meters in length,
buried to the depth of 600mm below the ground level. The length of
counterpoise wire may be increased if the resistance requirements are
not met. Connecting clamps shall be buried in the chimney portion
of the foundation. Contractor shall quote for the laying of counterpoise
earthing on per running meter basis, excluding cost of all materials.
The scope of work of connecting the counterpoise to the tower legs
shall be deemed to be included in the cost of laying of counterpoise.
The counterpoise shall preferably be laid through soft soil areas if
available. The planning of laying counterpoise shall be done as per
approval of site Engineer. The cost of laying of counterpoise shall be
inclusive of excavation and backfilling work also.
The Contractor shall have to provide rod earthing at the end of each
counterpoise wire and this may lead to T.F.R. values within specified
limits. This work of additional rod earthing shall be paid extra on per
location basis as per the rates indicated in Price Schedule.
9.16 TOWER ERECTION/ ASSEMBLY:
Towers shall be erected after the foundation concrete is at least 14
days old, but a gap of 24 days shall be preferred. The method followed
for the erection of towers, shall ensure the points mentioned below:

(i) Straining of the members shall not be permitted for bringing


them into position. It may, however, be necessary to match
hole positions at joints and to facilitate this, Tommy bars not
more than 450mm long may be used.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 169 of 190


Volume-V

(ii) Before starting erection of an upper section, the lower section of


tower shall be completely braced and all bolts provided in
accordance with approved drawings.
(iii) All plan diagonals relevant to a section of tower shall be placed in
position before assembly of upper section is taken up.
(iv) The bolt positions in assembled towers shall be as per IS: 5613
(Part-II/Sec.2), 1995 with latest amendments.
(v) Tower shall be fitted with Number, Phase and Danger Plates
which shall be arranged by the Contractor.
(vi) Anti-climbing Devices:
Barbed wire will be used at a height of approx. 3 meters and
above as an anti-climbing measure, which shall be arranged by
the Contractor. At every location three layers of Barbed wires
will be provided each inside and outside the tower in horizontal
plane. Spacing between the layers with fixing arrangements shall
be provided as per the provisions of IS:5613 (Part-II/Sec.1)-
1976 with latest amendments. The galvanized angle pieces with
notches for accommodating Barbed wire with Bolts Nuts etc.
shall be supplied by the Contractor. After the Barbed wire is
placed in position in the notches, the notch opening shall be
welded to avoid the theft of Barbed wire and anti-corrosive
treatment with cold galvanizing paint shall be given, as also in
the case of bolts to be welded below bottom cross arm level.
Suitable locking arrangement (pad-lock) shall also be provided.
(vii) All blank holes, if any left, after complete erection of the tower,
are to be filled up by bolts and nuts of proper size.
9.17 TIGHTENING PUNCHING AND WELDING
OF BOLTS AND NUTS:

9.17.01 All nuts shall be tightened properly using correct size of


spanners. Before tightening, it will be seen that packing washers and
plates are placed in relevant gaps between members, bolts of proper
size and length are provided and one spring washer is used under each
nut and in case of step bolts, spring washers shall be placed under the
outer nut.
9.17.02 The tightening shall progressively be carried out from the
top to downwards, care being taken that all bolts at every level are
tightened simultaneously. The threads of bolts projecting outside
the nuts shall be punched at three positions on the periphery to
ensure that the nuts are not loosened in course of time. If during
tightening a nut is found to be slipping or running over the bolt
threads, the bolt together with the nut shall have to be replaced.
9.17.03 The threads of all the bolts projected outside the nuts shall
be welded around the periphery of nut & bolts. The welding of bolt

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 170 of 190


Volume-V

projections as above shall be provided from ground level to bottom


cross arm level in all towers and also on extensions up to 10M except
in case of special river crossing tower in which case welding shall be
done up to 20 meter height from ground level.
9.17.04 After welding, cold galvanized paint having at least 90%
zinc content shall be applied on the welded portion. At least two coats
of the paint shall be applied. The cost of such paint and welding etc.,
including application of paint etc., shall be deemed to be included in the
quoted erection rates.
9.18 INSULATOR HOISTING:
Suspension insulator strings shall be used on suspension towers and
tension insulator strings on angle and dead end towers. They shall
be fixed on all the towers just prior to the stringing. Damaged
Insulators and fittings, if any, shall not be used in the assemblies.
Before hoisting, all Insulators shall be cleaned in a manner that will
not spoil, injure or scratch the surface of the Insulator, but in no case
shall any oil be used for the purpose. Security clips shall be fitted in
position for the Insulators before hoisting. Arcing Horns shall be fitted
in an approved manner. Torque wrench shall be used for fixing
different line materials and their components, like suspension clamps
etc. for Conductor and Earth wire etc.
9.19 HANDLING OF CONDUCTOR AND EARTH WIRE:
9.19.01 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for any damage
caused to the towers or Conductors during stringing. While running
out the Conductors, proper care shall be taken ensuring that the
Conductors do not touch and rub against the ground or objects which
could cause scratches or damage to the Conductor strands. The
Conductors shall be run out of the drums from the top in order to avoid
damage due to chafing. The drum stand shall be provided with a
suitable braking device to avoid damage, loose running out and
kinking of Conductor. The Conductor will be pulled by pull cable and
consequently pass over the running out blocks. The groove of the
running out blocks will be of such a design that the seat is semi-
circular and larger than the diameter of the Conductor and it does
not slip over or rub against the sides. The grooves shall be lined with
hard rubber or neoprene to avoid damage to Conductor and shall be
mounted on properly lubricated bearings.
9.19.02 The running blocks shall be suspended in a manner to suit
the design of the cross arm. All running out blocks especially
those at the tensioning end, will be fitted on the cross arm with jute
cloth wrapped over the steel work and under the slings to avoid
damage to the slings as well as to the protective surface finish of the
steel work. The Conductor shall be continuously observed for loose or
broken strands or any other kind of damage. When approaching
towards end of a drum length, at least three coils shall be left when

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 171 of 190


Volume-V

the stringing operations are to be stopped. These coils are to be


removed carefully if another length is required to be run out, new
length may be joined to the length already run out by the compression
joint in approved manner.
9.19.03 The Conductor joints and clamps shall be erected in such a
manner that no bird caging, over tensioning of individual wires or
layers or other deformities or damage to the conductor shall occur.
Clamps or bracing devices shall under erection conditions allow no
relative movement of strands or layers of the conductors.
9.19.04 Repairs of Conductors, in the event of damage being caused
to isolated strands of a conductor during the course of
erection, if necessary, shall be carried out during the running out
operations, with repair sleeves. Repairing of Conductor surface with
repair sleeve shall be done only in case of minor damage, scuff marks
etc., keeping in view both electrical and mechanical safety
requirements. The final Conductor surface shall be clean, smooth and
shall be without any projections, sharp points, cuts, abrasions etc.
Repair sleeves may be used when the damage is limited to the
outermost layer of the Conductor and is equivalent to the severance
of not more than one third of the strands of the outermost layer. No
repair sleeve shall be fitted within 30 m of tension or suspension clamp
or fittings. Further, more than one repair sleeve per Conductor shall
not be normally used in any single span.
9.19.05 Conductor splices shall be so made that they do not crack
or get damaged in the stringing operation. The Contractor shall
use only such equipment/methods during Conductor stringing which
ensures complete compliance in this regard.
9.19.06 Derricks shall be used where roads, rivers, canals,
telecommunication or overhead power lines, railway lines, fences
or walls have to be crossed during stringing operations. It shall
be seen that normal services are not interrupted and no damage is
caused to property. Shut down shall be obtained when working at
crossing of overhead power lines.
9.19.07 The sequence of running out shall be from
top to downwards, i.e. the Earth wire shall be run out first followed
by the Conductors in succession. Imbalances of loads on towers shall
be avoided as far as possible i.e. both Earth wires, then both bundles of
top Conductor and then both bundles of middle Conductor followed by
both bundle Conductors of bottom Cross-arm should be strung.
9.19.08 The proposed transmission line may run parallel for certain
distance with the existing 400/220/132KV lines which will remain
energized during the stringing period. As a result there is a possibility
of dangerous voltage build up due to electromagnetic and electrostatic
coupling in the pulling cables, Conductors and Earth wires, which
although comparatively small in magnitude during normal operations,

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 172 of 190


Volume-V

can be severe during switching and ground fault conditions on the


energised lines. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to take
adequate safety precautions to protect his employees and others from
this potential danger.
9.20 STRINGING OF CONDUCTOR AND EARTH WIRE:
The contractor shall give complete details of the stringing methods,
which he proposes to follow. At least one month in advance of the
commencement of stringing, the contractor will submit the
stringing charts for the conductors and earth wire showing the
initial and final sags and tension for various temperatures and
spans, alongwith equivalent spans in the lines, for the approval of
the Employer. The stringing shall be carried out as per
the stringing charts approved by the Employer and in accordance
with relevant IS. All the tolerances for the line shall conform to IS
5613 (Part-2/Sec-2) 1995
9.21 JOINTING:
9.21.01 The number of joints in Conductor/Earth wire shall be kept
to minimum possible by properly selecting the drums from available
lot of respective drums. All the joints on the Conductor and Earth wire
shall be of compression type. Each part of the joint shall be cleaned
by wire brush to make it free of rust or dirt etc. and properly
greased with anti-corrosive compound, as approved by our
Engineer before the final compression is done with the compressors.
The cost of such grease etc. used for joints shall not be paid extra
and shall be deemed to be included in the stringing rates.
9.21.02 All joints shall be made at least 30 meter away from the
structures. No joints shall be made in the spans crossing over the
main roads, railways, rivers etc. Not more than one joint per Conductor
shall be allowed in one span. Care shall be taken to mark the
conductor for properly centering the compression clamp before
compressing. During compression operation, the conductor shall be
handled in such a manner as to prevent lateral or vertical bearing
against the dies. After pressing the joint the aluminum sleeve
shall have all corners rounded, burrs and sharp edges removed and
smoothened.
9.21.03 Suitable protector shall be used during stringing of
Conductor to avoid any damage to the joint while it passes over the
traveler.
9.22 SAGGING IN OPERATION:
9.22.01 The Conductors shall be pulled up to the desired sag and
left in running block for at least one hour after which the sag shall be
rechecked and adjusted, if necessary, before transferring the conductor
from the running out blocks to the suspension clamps. The
Conductors shall be clamped within 36 hours of sagging in.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 173 of 190


Volume-V

9.22.02 The sag will be checked in the first and the last span of the
section in case of sections up to eight spans and in one intermediate
span also for sections with more than eight spans. The sag shall also
be rechecked when the Conductor have been drawn up and
transferred from running blocks to the insulator clamps.
9.22.03 The running out blocks, when suspended from
the transmission structure for sagging shall be so adjusted that the
Conductors on running out blocks will be at the same height as that of
the suspension clamps to which it is to be secured.
9.22.04 At sharp vertical angles, the sags and tensions shall be
checked on both sides of the angle. The Conductor and Earth wire shall
be checked on the running out blocks for equality of tension on both
sides. The suspension insulator assemblies will normally assume
vertical positions when the Conductor is clamped.
9.22.05 Tensioning and sagging operations shall be carried out in
calm weather, when rapid changes in temperature are not likely to
occur.
9.23 TENSIONING & SAGGING OF CONDUCTOR AND EARTH
WIRE:
The tensioning and sagging shall be done in accordance with the
approved stringing charts before the Conductor and Earth wire is
finally attached to the towers through the insulator strings for the
Conductor and Earth wire clamps for the Earth wire Dynamometers
shall be used for measuring tension in the Conductor and Earth wire.
9.24 CLIPPING IN:
9.24.01 Clipping of the Conductors in position shall be done in
accordance with the method approved by our Engineer. At suspension
location free center type suspension clamp with Armour rod set or AGS
type suspension clamp shall be used.
9.24.02 The jumpers at the section and angle towers shall be
formed to parabolic shape to ensure maximum clearance
requirements. Pilot suspension insulator string shall be used, if
necessary, to restrict the jumper swings to the design values. Jumper
connections of transposition towers shall be so made that adequate
clearances are available from tower body as well as phase conductors.
9.24.03 Fasteners in all fittings and accessories shall be secured in
position. The security clip shall be properly opened and sprung into
position.
9.25 FIXING OF CONDUCTORS AND EARTH WIRE
ACCESSORIES :
Vibration dampers (4-R type) and other Conductor and Earth wire
Accessories supplied by the Employer shall be installed by the
Contractor as per the design/drawing requirement and as per

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 174 of 190


Volume-V

instructions of the Engineer. While installing the Conductor and Earth


wire Accessories, proper care shall be taken to ensure that the surfaces
are clean and smooth and no damage shall occur to any part of the
Accessories.
9.26 MAINTENANCE:
9.26.01 For a period of 12 (twelve) calendar months
commencing immediately upon the satisfactory completion of the
final tests at site and taking over of the line, the Contractor's
liability shall be limited to the replacement (supply and re-erection)
of any defective parts that may develop on line of his own
manufacture or those of his Sub-Contractors approved by the Employer
under the conditions provided for by the contract under proper use
and arising solely from faulty materials, or workmanship.
9.26.02 If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to replace or
renew any defective portions of the line under this clause, the
provisions of this clause shall apply to the portions of the line so
replaced or renewed until the expiration of six months from the date
of such replacement or renewal or until the end of the above
mentioned period of twelve months whichever may be the later.
9.26.03 If any defects be not remedied within a reasonable time,
the Employer may proceed to do the work at the Contractor's risk and
expense, but without prejudice to any other rights which the Employer
may have against the Contractor in respect of such defects. The
Contractor shall bear reasonable cost of minor repairs carried out on
his behalf at site. At the end of the maintenance period the
Contractor’s liability ceases.
In respect of plant not covered by the first paragraph of this clause, the
Employer shall be entitled to the benefit of any guarantee given to the
Contractor by the original Contractor or manufactures of such plant.
9.27 REPLACEMENT:
If any replacements are to be effected after stringing and
tensioning or during maintenance, members and bracing shall not be
removed without reducing the tension on the tower with proper
guying or releasing the Conductor. If the replacement of cross arms
becomes necessary after stringing, the Conductor shall be suitably tied
to the tower at tension points or transferred to suitable roller pulleys at
suspension points.
9.28 PRE-COMMISSIONING:
After completion of the works, final checking of the line shall be done
by the Contractor to ensure that all the foundation works, tower
erection, and stringing have been done strictly in accordance with the
specification and as approved by the Employer. All the works shall
be thoroughly inspected keeping in view the following main points:

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 175 of 190


Volume-V

9.28.01 Sufficient back-filled earth is lying over each foundation pit


and it is adequately compacted.
9.28.02 Concrete chimneys and their copings are in good finely
shaped conditions.
9.28.03 All the tower members are correctly used, strictly according
to approved drawing and are free from defects or damages,
whatsoever.
9.28.04 All bolts are properly tightened and punched/tack welded
as per this specification.
9.28.05 The stringing of the Conductors and Earth wire has been
done as per the approved sag and tension charts and desired
clearances are clearly available.
9.28.06 All Conductor and Earth wire Accessories are properly
installed.
9.28.07 All other requirements to complete the work like fixing of
Danger Plate, Phase Plate, Number Plate, Anti-climbing devices,
Aviation Signal (wherever required) etc. are properly installed and the
painting has been done wherever required as per Aviation Rules.
9.28.08 It should be ensured that revetment is provided, wherever
required.
9.29 COMMISSIONING:-
9.29.01 The line insulation is tested by the Contractor by providing
his own equipment labour etc. to the satisfaction of the Employer to
ascertain the insulation condition of the line.
9.29.02 Conductor continuity test is carried out to verify that each
Conductor of the overhead line is properly connected electrically also.
The line may be charged at a low value of Power Frequency Voltage
for the purpose of testing and commissioning.
9.30 TAKING OVER:
When all performance tests called for by the Specification have
been successfully carried out, the transmission line shall be accepted
and taken over when it has been satisfactorily put into operation on
site, or within one month of its being ready to be put into
operation, whichever shall be the earlier and the Engineer shall
forthwith issue a taking over certificate. The Engineer shall not delay
the issue of any taking over certificate contemplated by this clause
on account of minor defects in the plant which do not materially effect
the commercial use thereof, provided that the Contractor shall
undertake to make good the same in due course.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 176 of 190


Volume-V

ANNEXURE- 1

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF CONDUCTOR &


EARTH WIRE

[A] ACSR CONDUCTOR

S. Description ZEBRA PANTHER


No.
1. Particulars of ACSR Conductor
i. Standard nominal Copper area (sq. 260 130
mm)
ii. Stranding, lay and wire dia (mm) 54/7/3.1 30/7/3.00
8
iii. Diameter of complete conductor (mm) 28.62 21.00
iv. Overall diameter when wrapped with 44.36 33.78
preformed Armour Rod (mm)
v. Weight (kg/km)
a. Steel Section (kg) 436 586
b. Aluminium Section (kg) 1185 390
c. Conductor (kg) 1621 976
2. Guaranteed ultimate tensile strength of 130.32 89.67
conductor in KN
3. Calculated D.C. resistance/km of 0.06915 0.139
conductor when corrected to standard
weight at 20oC
4. Standard Cross Sectional Area of 7.942 7.069
i. Aluminium strand in sq. mm
ii. Standard Cross Sectional Area of Steel 7.942 7.069
strand in sq. mm
iii. Standard Cross Sectional Area of 484.5 261.60
conductor in sq. mm.
5. Modulus of elasticity of Conductor 69 80
2
(GN/M )
6. Co-efficient of liner expansion per oC of
a. Aluminium strand Kg/sq.cm 23X10-6 23X10-6
b. Steel strand Kg/sq.cm 11.5X10- 11.5X10-6
6

c. ACSR Conductor Kg/sq.cm 19.3X10- 17.8X10-6


6

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 177 of 190


Volume-V

S. Description ZEBRA PANTHER


No.
7. Mean Lay-ratio
i. First layer 13-28 13-28
ii. Second layer 10-17 10-16
iii. Third layer 10-16 10-14
iv. Fourth layer 10-14
8. Continuous maximum current rating of 750 427
i. conductor in still air at 40 oC ambient
temperature (amp)
ii. Temperature rise for the above current 35 oC 30 oC
(oC)
9. Standard length of conductor (km.) 1.5 1.5
i.
ii. Tolerance in length (in percent) +/- 5% +/- 5%
10. Particulars of strands
i. Aluminiu Aluminiu
Minimum ultimate tensile strength in
m/ St eel m/ St eel
kg/sq.mm.
a. Aluminimum strand 16.56 16.02
b. Steel strand 134 127.41
ii. Nominal strand Dia 3.18/3.18 3.0/3.0
a. Maximum (mm) 3.21/3.24 3.03/3.06
b. Minimum (mm0 3.18/3.18 3.0/3.0
iii Mass (kg/Km) of strand at Nominal Dia 21.47 19.11
of Aluminium
iv. Mass (kg/Km) of strand at Nominal Dia 61.95 55.18
of Steel
v. Minimum breaking load in KN for
a. Aluminium strand
i) Before stranding 1.29 1.17
ii) After stranding 1.23 1.11
b. Steel strand
i) Before stranding 10.43 9.29
ii) After stranding 9.91 8.83
c. Approximate breaking load of conductor 13316 9127
in kgs
vi. Zinc coating

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 178 of 190


Volume-V

S. Description ZEBRA PANTHER


No.
a. Uniformity of coating, number and 3 dips 1 3 dips 1
duration of dips(according to Preece min. min.
test)
b. Minimum weight of coating 260 260
(gms/sq.meter)
c. Purity of zinc and the standard to which 99.95% 99.95%
it will conform IS:209 IS:209

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 179 of 190


Volume-V

[B] HTGS EARTH WIRE

S.N. Particulars HTGS EARTH WIRE


1 Particulars of single steel wire before
stranding
a) No. of wires 7
b) Diameter (mm) 3.66 mm
c) Tolerance 2%
Plus 3.74
Minus 3.58
d) Minimum elongation in 100 mm
5 mm
length
e) Breaking load (Kg.)
Standard/Minimum 1179/1000
f) Minimum ultimate tensile stress
95
(Kg/mm2)
g) D.C. resistance at 20 deg. C
17.57(Max.)
(Ohm/Km)
2 Stranded Wire
a) Length of lay (mm)
Maximum 198
Minimum 165
b) Overall diameter of Earth wire(mm) 10.98
c) Area of cross section of Earth wire
73.64
(sq. mm.)
d) Breaking load (Kg.)
Standard/Minimum 7431/6972
e) Resistance in Ohms per Km. at 20
2.5
deg. C.
f) Modulus of elasticity of Earth Wire
19 x10 5Kg/cm2
(Kg/cm2)
g) Weight of Earth wire (Kg/Km) 583
h) Co-efficient of linear expansion (per
11.5x10-6 /deg. C
deg. C)
3 Quality of zinc used (Specify the
Zn - 99.95 %
grading and percentage)
4 Coating of zinc on wires In Gms. per
260
sq. mtrs.
5 Nos. of Dip 3,one minute&1, half
minute
6 Oiling/greasing on Earth wire Boiled Linseed Oil
7 Tolerance in standard length Plus/Minus 5%

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 180 of 190


Volume-V

ANNEXURE-2

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF DISC INSULATORS

S. Description 70 kN EMS 90kN EMS 160kN EMS


No. Single Double Single Double Single Double
Suspensio Suspensi Tension Tensio Tension Tension
n on n
1. Size and designation of 16 mm 16 mm 20 mm
Ball & Socket and
standard to which it will
conform (mm)
2. No. of insulator discs 9/132KV 2x9/132KV 10 2X10 14 2X14
per string 13/220K 2x13/220K
V V
3. Outside dia. of the disc 255 255 280
– mm
4. Spacing - mm 145 145 170
5. Creepage distance of 320 320 340
the single disc-mm
6. Electro-mechanical 7000 9178 16500
strength of single disc –
kg.
7. Withstand voltage of
single disc-kVp
7.1 Power frequency
a) Dry – kV (rms) 70 75 75
b) Wet – kV (rms) 40 45 45
7.2 Impulse voltage
1.2/50 microsecond
a) Positive – kV 110 110
b) Negative - kV 110 115 120
120
8. Withstand voltage for
the complete string
8.1 Power frequency (with
and without Corona
ring) 280 400/405
a) Dry – kV (rms) 280 300/305
b) Wet – kV (rms) 490/690
490/690
8.2 Lightning Impulse
voltage 1.2/50
microsecond (With and
.
without Corona ring) 800/805
550
a) Positive – kVp 805/810 1050/1425
b) Negative – kVp 550 1050/1425
9. Flashover voltage for
the disc
9.1 Power frequency
a) Dry – kV (rms)
b) Wet – kV (rms) 75 80 85
45 50 55

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 181 of 190


Volume-V

S. Description 70 kN EMS 90kN EMS 160kN EMS


No. Single Double Single Double Single Double
Suspensio Suspensi Tension Tensio Tension Tension
n on n
9.2 Lightning impulse
voltage 1.2/50
microsecond
115 115
a) Positive – kVp 130
115 120
b) Negative – kVp 130
10. Flashover voltage for
the complete string
10. Power frequency (with
1 Corona ring)
a) Dry – kV (rms) 415/420
290 470 310/315 500
b) Wet – kV (rms) 290 470 500
10. Lightning Impulse
2 voltage 1.2/50
microseconds (with and
without Corona ring)
a) Positive – kVp 560 1060 825/830 1050
b) Negative – kVp 560 1060 830/835 1050
11. Max. voltage (%) across
any disc in the string
9% 13% 14%
(with and without
Corona ring)
12. P.F. Puncture Voltage of
each disc insulator 110 125 125
KV(rms)
13. Maximum RIV with 10
KV(RMS) of each disc
50 50 50
insulator (microvolts)

14. Weight of each disc


5.2 5.2 9.5
(kgs)
15. Electromechanical
strength of complete 7000 14000 9178 18356 16500 33000
string (kgs.)

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 182 of 190


Volume-V

ANNEXURE-3

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF HARDWARE


FITTINGS FOR ACSR ZEBRA/PANTHER AND EARTH WIRE FOR
LINE

S. Particulars Panther ACSR Zebra ACSR Earth Wire


No. (7/3.66) mm
A) Conventional Type
Hardware Sets:
1 Length of single suspension
strings with 9 Disc Insulators
and 13 Disc Insulators of size
1551 2171 185
255 mm (Dia.) x 145 mm
(Height) respectively for
Panther & Zebra ACSR. In mm
2 Length of double suspension
strings 9x2 Disc Insulators &
13x2 Disc Insulators of 255mm
1873 2429 NA
(Dia) x 145 mm (height) size
respectively for Panther and
Zebra ACSR.
3 Length of single tension strings
with 10 Disc Insulator of 255
mm(Dia)x145 mm (Height) size
for Panther and 14 Disc 1728 2679 375
Insulator of 280 mm (Dia) x170
mm (Height) size for Zebra
Conductor.
4 Length of double tension strings
with 10x2 Disc insulator of 255
mm x 145 mm size for Panther
2069 3202 NA
and 14x2 disc insulators of size
280 mm x 170 mm for Zebra
ACSR.
5 Minimum breaking strength of
suspension strings Hardware.
(i) Single 7000kgf 7000kgf 7000kgf
(ii) Double 2x7000kgf 2x7000kgf
6 Minimum slipping strength of 25% of UTS
15to20% of UTS of Conductor
suspension clamp. of Wire
7 Minimum breaking strength of
tension strings Hardware.
(i) Single 9000kgf 16500kgf 7000kgf
(ii) Double 2x9000kgf 2x16500kgf
8 Minimum slipping strength of 95% of UTS 95% of UTS of 95% of UTS
tension clamp. of Conductor Conductor of wire
9 Ball & Socket designation of
Hardware items for Tension 16mm 16mm NA
Type of strings.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 183 of 190


Volume-V

S. Particulars Panther ACSR Zebra ACSR Earth Wire


No. (7/3.66) mm
10 Ball & Socket designation of
Hardware items for suspension 16mm 16mm NA
strings.
11 Unit weight of Single
Suspensions String Hardware 6.4kg appox. 11kg appox. 2.9kg appox.
sets(without Disc Insulators)
12 Unit weight of double
24.5kg 29.32kg
suspension string Hardware NA
appox. appox.
sets(without Disc Insulators)
13 Unit weight of single tension
string Hardware sets (without 6.6kg appox. 9.8kg appox. 2.3kg appox.
Disc Insulators).
14 Unit weight of double tension
Hardware sets (without Disc 21kg appox. 31.7kg appox. NA
Insulators).
15 Type of suspension clamp.
AGS Type AGS Type AGS Type
16 Material used for suspension
Al. Alloy Al. Alloy MCI
Clamp giving reference of ISS
17 Type of tension clamp. Compression
Type
18 Material used for tension Clamp Extruded Al. Extruded Al.
Mild Steel
giving reference of ISS Alloy Alloy
19 Unit weight and material used
for each of the following
Hardware items in Kg.
a. Ball hook 0.775kg 0.775kg
NA
appox. appox.
b. Socket type horn holder 0.920kg 0.920kg
NA
appox. appox.
c. `D’ Shackle 0.450/ 0.950/
0.450kg
0.950kg 2.000kg
appox.
appox. appox.
d. Ball link 0.375kg 0.750kg
NA
appox. appox.
e. Socket clevis 0.650kg 0.650/1.275kg
NA
appox. appox.
f. Ball clevis 0.300kg 0.300/0.600kg
NA
appox. appox.
g. Clevis Eye 0.650kg 0.650kg
NA
appox. appox.
h. Chain Link 0.600kg 1.500kg 0.350kg
appox. appox. appox.
i. Suspension Clamp 3.0kg appox. 6.0kg appox. 2.0kg appox.
j. Tension Clamp with Jumper
2.4kg appox. 4.5kg appox. 1.0kg appox.
Sleeves.
20 Power loss in Aluminium alloy 100 Milli
143 Milli Watt NA
Suspension Clamp at 400 amps. Watt

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 184 of 190


Volume-V

S. Particulars Panther ACSR Zebra ACSR Earth Wire


No. (7/3.66) mm
21 Power loss in extruded NA
Aluminum Tension Clamp at Insignificant
400 amps.
22 Type of arcing horn
(i) 132 kV Flat type NA NA
(ii) 220 kV Pipe type Pipe type NA
B) AGS Type Suspension
Assembly:
1 Type of material used for
Al.Alloy of HE 20 Grade as per
retaining rod for AGS assembly NA
IS:6051
giving reference of ISS
2 Minimum tensile strength of
35kg/sq. mm NA
retaining rod material.
3 Chemical composition of
As per IS:733 NA
retaining rod material.
4 Electrical conductivity of Armour
Rod material (in percentage of
the conductivity of IACS i.e. Not less than 40% of the IACS NA
International Annealed Copper
Standard)
5 Slipping strength of cushioned
15to20% of UTS of Conductor NA
suspension assembly
6 Breaking strength of cushioned
7000 kgf NA
suspension assembly
7 Physical properties of synthetic
rubber:
a. Minimum tensile strength 2000PSI NA

b. Minimum ultimate elongation 300% NA


8 Details of the retaining rods
of AGS assembly:
a. Length of Armour Rod (mm) 1550 2080 -
b. Diameter of Armour Rod(mm) 6.35 7.87 3.00

c. Number of Armour Rod/set 11 12 12

d. Wt. of each Armour Rod(gm) 150 292 -


e. Tolerance in diameter of each
Armour Rod
i. Maximum (mm) NA
+/- 1% +/- 1%
ii. Minimum (mm) +/- 1% +/- 1% NA
f. Tolerance in flattening Max. +/- 0.08 +/- 0.08 NA
(mm)
g. Pitch length of the helix (mm) 190.5 260.4 NA

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 185 of 190


Volume-V

S. Particulars Panther ACSR Zebra ACSR Earth Wire


No. (7/3.66) mm
h. Tolerance in pitch length

i. Maximum (mm) NA
+/- 6 +/- 6
ii. Minimum (mm) +/- 6 +/- 6 NA
i. Tolerance in internal diameter of
helix.
i. Maximum (mm) NA
+/- 0.2 +/- 0.2
ii. Minimum (mm) +/- 0.2 +/- 0.2 NA
j. Tolerance in outer diameter of
helix
i. Maximum (mm) NA
+/- 0.2
ii. Minimum (mm) NA
9 Power loss at 400 Amp. Current 200 Milli 501.50 Milli
NA
AGS suspension assembly Watt Watt

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 186 of 190


Volume-V

ANNEXURE-4

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR


ACCESSORIES FOR ZEBRA/PANTHER ACSR & EARTH
WIRE FOR LINES

S. Particulars Panther ACSR Zebra ACSR Earth Wire


No. (7/3.66) mm
A MIDSPAN JOINTS (Compression Type)
1 Breaking strength. 95% of UTS of 95% of UTS of 95% of UTS of
Conductor Conductor Earth wire
2 Slipping strength. 95% of UTS of 95% of UTS of 95% of UTS of
Conductor Conductor Earth wire
3 Conductivity. 100% of eqvt. 100% of eqvt. 100% of eqvt.
Length of Length of Length of Earth
conductor conductor wire
4 Before and after
compression dimensions in
mm Al. Steel Al. Steel Al. Steel
OD 38.0 18.0 48.0 19.20 NA 21.0
23.0 9.35 31.0 9.95 NA 11.5
ID
37.0 17.40 46.0 18.80 NA 20.20
Across Corner
32.0 15.10 40.0 16.10 NA 17.50
Across Flat
5 Material from which
following is made. Also give
reference to ISS for the
same.
a. Aluminium sleeve. Extruded Extruded
NA
Aluminium. Aluminium.
b. Steel sleeve. Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel
Galvanised Galvanised Galvanised
6 Unit weight of:
a. Aluminium sleeve. 1.15 1.91 Appox. NA
b. Steel sleeve. 0.28 Appox. 0.41 Appox. 0.470 Appox.
7 Length of steel and
Aluminium sleeve in mm
Before compression Al. Steel Al. Steel Al. Steel
610 203 711 241 NA 230
Tolerance
+/-5 +/-5 +/-5 +/-5 NA +/-5
After compression
660 233 763 273 NA 252
Tolerance +/-5 +/-5 +/-5 +/-5 NA +/-5
B REPAIR SLEEVE (Compression Type)
1 Breaking strength of cable 95% of UTS of 95% of UTS of 95% of UTS of
with sleeve compressed. Conductor Conductor Earth wire
2 Conductivity of cable with 100% of eqvt. 100% of eqvt. 100% of eqvt.
sleeve compressed. Length of Length of Length of Earth

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 187 of 190


Volume-V

S. Particulars Panther ACSR Zebra ACSR Earth Wire


No. (7/3.66) mm
conductor conductor wire conductor
3 Before and after
compression dimensions in
mm
OD 38.0 48.0 20.8
ID 23.0 31.0 41.3
4 Material from which sleeve
Mild Steel
is made with IS for the Extruded Extruded
Galvanised
same. Aluminium. Aluminium.
5 Unit weight of repair sleeve. 0.40 appx. 0.740 appx. 0.400 kg appx.
6 Length of repair sleeve in
mm Before compression 241 +/- 0.5 279 +/- 5 254 +/- 5
After compression. 270 +/- 5.0 310 +/- 5 280 +/- 5
C 4R VIBRATION DAMPER
1 Type 4R Type
2 Suitable for conductor size. 21 28.62 10.98
3 Material used for :
a. Clamp Al. Alloy GDC
b. Messenger cable. H T G S IS:4826
4 Number of strands and dia. 19/2.11 19/2.59 19/2.11
of each wire used in
messenger cable.
5 Over all dia. of messenger 10.55 mm appox. 12.95mm appox. 10.55mm
cable. appox.
6 Weight per Km of - - -
messenger cable.
7 Slipping strength of 2.5 KN 2.5 KN 2.5 KN
messenger cable.
8 Total weight of each damper 3.4 kg +/- 5% 6.5 kg +/- 5% 2.3 kg +/- 5%
with tolerance.
9 Weight of each counter
weight with tolerance.
a. Heavier mass. 2.4 kg +/- 5% 3.3 kg +/- 5% 1.150 kg +/-
5%
b. Lighter mass. 1.750 kg +/- 2.4 kg +/- 5% 0.950 kg +/-
5% 5%
10 Natural frequencies of 12+/-1 18.5+/-1 8+/-1 12+/-1 12+/-1 18.5+/-1
damper. 30+/-2 46+/-2 17.5+/-2 30+/-2 46+/-2
30+/-2
11 Clamping torque (Kg 6.5 7.5 6
meter).
12 a. Minimum fatigue test 10 Million cycles 10 Million cycles 10 Million cycles
at the highest resonant
frequency.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 188 of 190


Volume-V

S. Particulars Panther ACSR Zebra ACSR Earth Wire


No. (7/3.66) mm
b. Amplitude of fatigue test +/- 1 +/- 1 +/- 1
of the resonant
frequency.
13 Slip strength of clamp. 2.5 KN 2.5 KN 2.5 KN

14 Maximum magnetic power


loss of damper at 500 Less than 1Watt Less than 1Watt Less than 1Watt
Amps, 50 Hz, AC current.
15 Wind velocity range for Max. Wind load Max. Wind load Max. Wind load
which damper will be 45 kg/sq. m 45 kg/sq. m 45 kg/sq. m
effective.
16 Maximum dynamic strain on
the conductor with the 150 Micro strain 150 Micro strain 150 Micro strain
damper at clamping points.
17 Standard to which material
will be manufactured and IS:9708 IS:9708 IS:9708
tested.

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 189 of 190


Volume-V

ANNEXURE-5

LIST OF DRAWINGS
S.No Particulars
1. Details of earthing arrangement.
2. Number plate for 220 kV Transmission line.
3. Phase plate for 220 kV Transmission line.
4. Danger Board for 220 kV Transmission line.
5. Anticlimbing device for 220kV towers

6. Number plate for 132 kV Transmission line.

7. Phase plate for 132 kV Transmission line.

8. Danger Board for 132 kV Transmission line.

9. Anticlimbing device for 132kV towers.

10. Flexible GI Bond for earth wire.

11. Drum for Zebra conductor

12. Drum for Panther conductor

13. Drum for Earth Wire

14. 220kV Single & Double suspension insulator string hardware for Zebra
ACSR conductor
15. 220kV Single & Double tension insulator string hardware for Zebra ACSR
conductor
16. 132kV Single & Double suspension insulator string hardware for Panther
ACSR conductor
17. 132kV Single & Double tension insulator string hardware for Panther
ACSR conductor
18. Hardware fittings for Earth wire

19. Mid span compression joint for Zebra ACSR Conductor


20. Vibration damper for Zebra ACSR Conductor
21. Repair sleeve for Zebra ACSR
22. Mid span compression joint for Panther ACSR
23. Vibration damper for Panther ACSR Conductor

24. Repair sleeve for Panther ACSR

25. Mid span compression joint for Earth Wire

26. Vibration damper for Earth Wire


27. Repair sleeve for Earth Wire

28. Disc Insulators of Ball & Socket type


29. Armour Rods for Conductor and Earthwire suspension clamps

MPPTCL/TECH/PROC/12/JULY15 Page 190 of 190


MADHYA PRADESH POWER TRANSMISSION CO. LTD.

SHAKTI BHAWAN RAMPUR: JABALPUR

VOLUME-V (Part-2)

Technical specification for 24/48F OPGW cable and


associated hardware & fittings for use on 220kV and
132kV transmission lines

O/o CHIEF ENGINEER (PROCUREMENT)

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


Specification for OPGW cabling and associated hardware &
fittings

This section of the technical specification describes the functional and technical
specifications of Fibre Optic cabling and associated items.
2.1 Fibre Optic Cabling
In this section of the technical specification, the functional & technical specifications
of OPGW cable, Fibre Optic Approach Cable, Joint Box and associated hardware &
fittings for the requirements for G.652D Dual-window Single mode (DWSM)
telecommunications grade optical fibre is specified. Bidders shall furnish with their
bids, detailed descriptions of the fibres & cable(s) proposed.
All optical fibre cabling including fibre itself and all associated installation hardware
shall have a minimum guaranteed design life span of 25 years.
2.1.1 Required Optical Fibre Characteristics
The 24 Fibre optical fibre to be provided should have following characteristics:- :
2.1.1.1 Physical Characteristic
Dual-Window Single mode (DWSM), G.652D optical fibres shall be provided in the
fibre optic cables. DWSM optical fibres shall meet the requirements defined in Table
2-1(a):
2.1.1.2 Attenuation
The attenuation coefficient for wavelengths between 1525 nm and 1575 nm shall
not exceed the attenuation coefficient at 1550 nm by more than 0.05 dB/km. The
attenuation coefficient between 1285 nm and 1330 nm shall not exceed the
attenuation coefficient at 1310 nm by more than 0.05 dB/km. The attenuation of
the fibre shall be distributed uniformly throughout its length such that there are no
point discontinuities in excess of 0.10 dB. The fibre attenuation characteristics
specified in table 2-1 (a) shall be “guaranteed” fibre attenuation of any & every
fibre reel.

Table 2-1(a)
DWSM Optical Fibre Characteristics

Fibre Description: Dual-Window Single-Mode


Mode Field Diameter @ 1310nm: 8.6 to 9.5 m (± 0.6m )
Cladding Diameter: 125.0 m ± 1 m
Mode field concentricity error  0.6m
Cladding non-circularity  

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


Cable Cut-off Wavelength cc  1260 nm
1550 nm loss performance As per G.652 D
Proof Test Level  0.69 Gpa

Attenuation Coefficient: @ 1310 nm  0.35 dB / km


@ 1550 nm  0.21 dB / km
Chromatic Dispersion; Maximum: 18 ps/(nm x km) @ 1550 nm
3.5 ps/(nm x km) 1288-1339nm
5.3 ps/(nm x km) 1271-1360nm

1300 to 1324nm
Zero Dispersion Wavelength: 0.092 ps/(nm2xkm) maximum
Zero Dispersion Slope:
Polarization mode dispersion  0.2 ps/km^½
coefficient
Temperature Dependence: Induced attenuation  0.05 dB (-60C to
+85C)
Bend Performance: @ 1310 nm (75±2 mm dia Mandrel), 100 turns;
Attenuation Rise  0.05 dB/km

@ 1550 nm (75±2 mm dia Mandrel), 100 turns;

Attenuation Rise  0.10 dB/km


@ 1550 nm (32±0.5 mm dia Mandrel, 1 turn;
Attenuation Rise  0.50 dB/km

CACT APPROVAL: - The optical fibres being utilized in OPGW shall be


brought from a CACT (Component Approval Centre for Telecommunication)
approved supplier.

2.1.2 Fibre Optic Cable Construction

The OPGW (Optical Ground Wire) cable is to be installed on 400/220/132kV


transmission lines of MPPTCL. The list of lines is enclosed at Appendix IV. The
design of cable shall account for the varying operating and environmental
conditions that the cable shall experience while in service. The OPGW cable to be
supplied shall be designed to meet the overall requirements of all the
transmission lines. Normally the tower span of the lines shall not exceed 600 m,
however, some of the spans may be up to around 1000 m or more. The exact
details shall be collected by the Contractor during survey. To meet the overall
requirement of all the transmission lines, the contractor may offer more than
one design without any additional cost to MPPTCL, in case of different voltage
levels, wind zones, non snow / snow bound areas, span length of more than 600
m is found during survey. It may also be noted that some of the transmission
lines route may be added during the engineering stage.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


The OPGW cable to be supplied shall be meeting the design parameters specified
in Technical Specifications.

2.1.2.1 Optical Fibre Cable Lengths

The estimated Optical Fibre link length are provided in Appendix-IV as


transmission line route length, However, contractor shall supply and install the
Optical Fibre cable as required based on detail site survey to be carried out by the
contractor during the project execution. The OPGW BoQ shall be released by
MPPTCL for the purpose of supply. Adjustment if required shall be done by
MPPTCL in last lot of supply to optimise OPGW supply and avoid wastages.

For the purpose of payment, the Optical Fibre lengths are defined as transmission
line route length from gantry at one termination station to the gantry in the other
terminating station. The actual cable lengths to be delivered shall take into
account various factor such as sag, service loop, splicing, working length and
wastage etc. and no additional payment shall be payable in this regard. The unit
rate for FO cable quoted in the bid price shall take into account all such factor.

2.1.2.2 Optical Fibre Identification

Individual optical fibres within a fibre unit and fibre units shall be identifiable in
accordance with EIA/TIA 598 or IEC 60304 or Bellcore GR-20 colour-coding
scheme.

Colouring utilized for colour coding optical fibres shall be integrated into the fibre
coating and shall be homogenous. The colour shall not bleed from one fibre to
another and shall not fade during fibre preparation for termination or splicing.

Each cable shall have traceability of each fibre back to the original fibre
manufacturer's fibre number and parameters of the fibre. If more than the
specified number of fibres is included in any cable, the spare fibres shall be tested
by the cable manufacturer and any defective fibres shall be suitably bundled,
tagged and identified at the factory by the vendor.

2.1.2.3 Optical Fibre Strain & Sag-Tension chart

The OPGW cable the optical fibres shall experience no strain under all loading
conditions defined in IS 802. Zero fibre strain condition shall apply even after a 25
year cable creep.

For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions shall apply:

 Maximum Working Tension (MWT) is defined as the maximum cable tension


at which there is no fibre strain.
 The no fibre strain condition is defined as fibre strain of less than or equal to
0.05%, as determined by direct measurements through IEC/ ETSI (FOTP)
specified optical reflectometry.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


 The Cable strain margin is defined as the maximum cable strain at which
there is no fibre strain.
 The cable Maximum Allowable Tension (MAT) is defined as the maximum
tension experienced by the Cable under the worst case loading condition.
 The cable max strain is defined as the maximum strain experienced by the
Cable under the worst case loading condition.
 The cable Every Day Tension (EDT) is defined as the maximum cable
tension on any span under normal conditions.
 The Ultimate Tensile Strength (UTS/ breaking strength) is defined as the
maximum tensile load applied and held constant for one minute at which
the specimen shall not break.

While preparing the Sag-tension charts for the OPGW cable the following
conditions shall be met:
 The Max Allowable Tension (MAT) / max strain shall be less than or equal
to the MWT/ Strain margin of the cable.
 The sag shall not exceed the earth wire sag in all conditions.
 The Max Allowable Tension shall also be less than or equal to 0.45 times
the UTS.
 The 25 year creep at 25% of UTS (creep test as per IEEE 1138) shall be
such that the 25 year creep plus the cable strain at Max Allowable Tension
(MAT) is less than or equal to the cable strain margin.
 The everyday tension (EDT) shall not exceed 20% of the UTS for the
OPGW cable, subject to the condition that the requirements mentioned
below are fulfilled.

The Sag-tension chart of OPGW cable indicating the maximum tension, cable
strain and sag shall be calculated and submitted under various conditions
mentioned below:
1. 53° C , no wind and no ice
2. 32° C, no wind and no ice
3. 0°C, no wind and no ice
4. 32° C, full wind and no ice
5. 32° C, 75% full wind and no ice
6. 0° C, 2/3rd / 36% of full wind (IS 802:1977 / 1995)
7. MPPTCL standard 400kV,220kV and 132kV tower type technical
details defined in Table 2.1(b).

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


Table 2-1(b)
400/220/132kV Tower Type Technical Details

Max Max
Sag
Sag Tension
at
at at 32°C
S. Tower KV Wind Design 0°C
53°C with
No. Type Level Load Span with
with Full
Nil
Nil Wind
Wind
Wind
45 400 8.69 10.19
1 FD Series 400kV 1686 Kg
Kg/meter2 meter meter meter
NFD 189 400 8.69 10.19
2 400kV 3327 Kg
Series Kg/meter2 meter meter meter
194 350 5.50 6.91
3 B Series 220kV 3300 Kg
Kg/meter2 meter meter meter
189 350 4.83 6.19
4 E Series 132kV 3400 Kg
Kg/meter2 meter meter meter
ND 45 350 4.83 6.19
5 132kV 1942 Kg
Series Kg/meter2 meter meter meter
MD 254 250 2.30 3.21
6 132kV Kg/meter2 3536 Kg
Series meter meter meter
MC 257 350 5.50 6.90
7 220kV 3976 Kg
Series Kg/meter2 meter meter meter

Table 2-1(C)
Ground Wire Technical Details

S.No Particulars Ground Wire

1. Material Steel

2. Size --

3. Nominal Aluminium area --

4. Stranding and wire diameter (no./mm) 7/3.66mm.

5. Number of strands in each layer.


Central core 1 of steel
1st layer 6 of steel
2nd layer
3rd layer
4th layer

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


S.No Particulars Ground Wire

6. Sectional area of Alu. --

7. Total sectional area --

8. Approximate overall diameter 10.98 mm

9. Overall diameter when wrapped with 18.30 mm


preformed Armour Rod
10 Approximate weight 583Kg per Km

11 Calculated D.C. resistance at 20º C 2.5 Ohm/km

12 Approximate Breaking Load 6972 kgs

13 Co-efficient of Linear Expansion 11.5 x 10-6


per ºC
14 Final Modulus of Elasticity 1.931X106 kg/cm²

The above cases shall be considered for the spans from 100 m to 525 m or
higher span length in the steps of 20 m increase in spans. Max. Vertical sag,
max. tension and max sag at 0° C & no wind shall be considered in line with the
design parameter of transmission line. In order to maintain the minimum Mid
Span vertical clearance between OPGW and top conductor, the OPGW Sag at 0° C
no wind condition must be equal to or less then the corresponding sag of ground
wire as considered in the design of tower and also indicated in the above table.
The full wind load shall be considered as the design wind load for all the specified
transmission lines as per relevant IS 802 version and the sag-tension chart shall
be submitted considering the transmission lines for approval of MPPTCL and the
same shall be followed during installation of OPGW Cable.

2.1.2.4 Cable Materials

The materials used for optical fibre cable construction, shall meet the following
requirements:

2.1.2.4.1 Filling Materials

The interstices of the fibre optic unit and cable shall be filled with a suitable
compound to prohibit any moisture ingress or any water longitudinal migration
within the fibre optic unit or along the fibre optic cable. The water tightness of the
cable shall meet or exceed the test performance criteria as per IEC 60794-1-F-5or
EIA/TIA 455-82B.

The filling compound used shall be a non-toxic homogenous waterproofing


compound that is free of dirt and foreign matter, non hygroscopic, electrically
nonconductive and non-nutritive to fungus. The compound shall also be fully

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


compatible with all cable components it may come in contact with and shall inhibit
the generation of hydrogen within the cable.

The waterproofing filling materials shall not affect fibre coating, colour coding, or
encapsulant commonly used in splice enclosures, shall be dermatologically safe,
non-staining and easily removable with a non-toxic cleaning solvent.

2.1.2.4.2 Metallic Members

When the fibre optic cable design incorporates metallic elements in its
construction, all metallic elements shall be electrically continuous.

2.1.2.5 Marking, Packaging and Shipping

All OPGW for export shipment are generally shipped on best commercial practice
non-returnable steel reels having suitable dimension for winding a specified
length.

Each length of Optical Fibre cable shall be wound on a separate cable reel and the
cable ends shall be securely fastened to the reel to prevent the cable from
becoming loose in transit or during placing operations. Both ends of the cable
shall be sealed with a suitable plastic cap to prevent the entry of moisture during
shipping, handling and storage. Spare plastic cap shall be provided with each
drum.

The Optical Fibre cable shall be shipped on reels designed to prevent damage to
the cable during shipment and installation. The wooden lagging will be given a
preventive treatment from termite and wood preservative treatment. The
construction of reels and markings shall be as per approved documents.

The OPGW shall be furnished on reels of sufficiently sturdy construction to


withstand normal shipping, hauling and field erection. The size, length, weight,
manufacturer’s name or trade mark, date of manufacturer direction of rolling for
each drum, and contract number shall be clearly marked on the outside of each
drum. The OPGW shall be packed to protect it from moisture, salt, or any other
impurities which may cause rust or other harmful effects.

The packing and shipping requirements for OPGW cable shall be applied for
assemblies and line accessories also.

Each package shall be clearly, legibly and durably marked on both sides as
follows:-

a. Name & designation of the consignee (to be furnished by the


purchaser.)
b. Ultimate destination (as required by the purchaser).
c. Items and respective quantities contained in the package to be
furnished by the purchaser.)

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


d. Net and gross weight of the material.
e. Gross weight of each package.

2.1.3 Optical Ground Wire(OPGW) Construction

OPGW cable construction shall comply with IEEE-1138, 2009. The cable provided
shall meet both the construction and performance requirements such that the
ground wire function, the optical fibre integrity and optical transmission
characteristics are suitable for the intended purpose.

2.1.3.1 OPGW design

OPGW design shall be finalized during the detailed engineering stage based on
aluminium tube multi buffer design OPGW in the package. However, in exceptional
cases such as heavy wind zones etc requiring smaller dia cable and aluminium tube
design OPGW is not found suitable for specific transmission line, stainless steel with
aluminium coated only protective central Fibre optic surrounded by concentric-lay
stranded metallic wire in single or multiple layer design can be accepted.

2.1.3.1.1 Buffer Tube:

Loose tube construction shall be implemented. The individually coated optical


fibre(s) shall be surrounded by a buffer for protection from physical damage during
fabrication, installation and operation of the cable. The fibre coating and buffer shall
be strippable for splicing and termination. Each fibre unit shall be individually
identifiable utilizing colour coding. Buffer tubes shall be filled with a water-blocking
gel. The individually coated optical fibre(s) shall be provided directly in stainless
steel tube in case stainless steel tube design.

(a) Central Aluminium tube type

The composite fibre optic overhead ground wire shall be made up of


multiple buffer tubes embedded in a water tight
aluminium/aluminium alloy protective central fibre optic unit
surrounded by concentric-lay stranded metallic wires in single or
multiple layers. Each buffer tube shall have maximum 12 no. of
fibres. All fibres in single buffer tube or directly in central fibre optic
unit is not acceptable. The dual purpose of the composite cable is to
provide the electrical and physical characteristics of conventional
overhead ground wire while providing the optical transmission
properties of optical fibre.

(b) Central Stainless Steel tube type

The composite fibre optic overhead ground wire shall consist of a


central fibre optic unit made up of stainless steel with aluminium
coating/tube surrounded by concentric-lay stranded metallic wires in
single or multiple layers. The dual purpose of the composite cable is

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


10

to provide the electrical and physical characteristics of conventional


overhead ground wire while providing the optical transmission
properties of optical fibre.

2.1.3.1.2 Central Fibre Optic Unit

(a) Central Aluminium tube type

The central fibre optic unit shall be designed to house and protect
multiple buffered optical fibre units from damage due to forces such
as crushing, bending, twisting, tensile stress and moisture. The
central fibre optic unit and the outer stranded metallic conductors
shall serve together as an integral unit to protect the optical fibres
from degradation due to vibration and galloping, wind and ice
loadings, wide temperature variations, lightning and fault current, as
well as environmental effects which may produce hydrogen.

The OPGW design of dissimilar materials for stranded wires and tubes are not
allowed. Central fibre optic unit may be of aluminium / aluminium alloy tube. There
shall be no exposed areas of tubing that can make electrical contact either directly
or indirectly through moisture, contamination, protrusions, etc with the surrounding
stranded wires. The tube may be fabricated as a seamless tube, seam welded, or a
tube without a welded seam.

(b) Central Stainless Steel tube type

The central fibre optic unit shall be designed to house and protect
optical fibres provided in single buffered tube of stainless steel tube
from damage due to forces such as crushing, bending, twisting, tensile
stress and moisture. The central fibre optic unit and the outer stranded
metallic conductors shall serve together as an integral unit to protect
the optical fibres from degradation due to vibration and galloping, wind
and ice loadings, wide temperature variations, lightning and fault
current, as well as environmental effects which may produce hydrogen.

The OPGW design of dissimilar materials for stranded wires and tubes
are not allowed. Central fibre optic unit shall be of stainless steel tube
with aluminium protective coating or stainless steel tube with Al
protecting outer tube. In case of aluminium protective coating, the
coating must completely cover the tubes leaving no exposed areas of
tubing that can make electrical contact either directly or indirectly
through moisture, contamination, protrusions, etc with the surrounding
stranded wires. The tube may be fabricated as a seamless tube, seam
welded, or a tube without a welded seam.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


11

2.1.3.1 OPGW Parameters to be considered for different line voltage and wind zones

1 Voltage Level 400 kV, 220kV,132kV

2 Stranding/Wire 24/48 fibers


diameter
3 Overall diameter Not less than for :
Al. Tube – 11.00 mm
Steel Tube – 10.00 mm
4 Min. UTS 80 kN
5 Modulus of elasticity 13904 kg/mm2

6 Co-efficient of linear 14.3 x10-6 /deg C


expansion

7 Max. allowable 53 deg C


temperature

OPGW, which is compatible with Conductor/EW Suitable for the particular


line, can be adopted, subject to meeting the limitations of Sag- tension
values. For Al tube & Stainless steel tube design details refer clause
2.1.3.1above.

2.1.3.2 Basic Construction

The OPGW cable construction shall conform to the applicable


requirements of this specification, applicable clauses of IEC 61089 related to
stranded conductors and Table 2.1(d) OPGW Mechanical and Electrical
Characteristics. In addition, the basic construction shall include bare
concentric-lay-stranded metallic wires with the outer layer having left hand
lay. The wires may be of multiple layers with a combination of various
metallic wires within each layer. The direction of lay for each successive layer
shall be reversed. The finished wires shall contain no joints or splices unless
otherwise agreed to by the MPPTCL and shall conform to all applicable
clauses of IEC 61089 as they pertain to stranded conductors. The wires
shall be so stranded that when the complete OPGW is cut, the
individual wires can be readily regrouped and then held in place by
one hand.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


12

2.1.3.3 Breaking Strength

The rated breaking strength of the completed OPGW shall be taken as 90 percent of
the sum of the rated breaking strengths of the individual wires, calculated from their
nominal diameter and the specified minimum tensile strength.

The rated breaking strength shall not include the strength of the optical unit. The
fibre optic unit shall not be considered a load bearing tension member when
determining the total rated breaking strength of the composite conductor.

2.1.3.4 Electrical and Mechanical Requirements

Table 2-1(d) provides OPGW Electrical and Mechanical Requirements for the
minimum performance characteristics.

Table 2.1(d)

OPGW Electrical and Mechanical Requirements

(1) Everyday Tension ≤ 20% of UTS of OPGW

(2) D.C. Resistance at < 1.0 ohm/Km


20ºC:

(3) Short Circuit Current ≥ 6.32 kA for 1.0 second (for 220 kV & above
lines)

≥ 5.6 kA for 1.0 second (for 132 KV lines)


Short Circuit shall be applicable as per the
Voltage level of the lines

2.1.4 Installation Hardware

Installation Hardware includes all required fittings and hardware such as Tension
assembly, Suspension assembly, Vibration dampers, Reinforcing rods, Earthing
clamps, Downlead clamps, splice enclosure etc. MPPTCL.

The OPGW hardware fittings and accessories shall follow the general requirements
regarding design, materials, dimensions & tolerances, protection against corrosion
and markings as specified in clause 4.0 of EN 61284: 1997 (IEC 61284). The
shear strength of all bolts shall be at least 1.5 times the maximum installation
torque. The OPGW hardware & accessories drawing & Data Requirement Sheets
(DRS) document to be submitted by contractor shall consist of three parts: (1) A
technical particulars sheet (2) An assembly drawing i.e. level 1 drawing and (3)
Component level drawings i.e. level 2 & lower drawings. All component reference

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


13

numbers, dimensions and tolerances, bolt tightening torques & shear strength and
ratings such as UTS, slip strength etc shall be marked on the drawings.

The fittings and accessories described herein are indicative of installation


hardware typically used for OPGW installations and shall not necessarily be limited
to the following:

(a) Suspension Assemblies: Preformed armour grip suspension clamps and


aluminium alloy armour rods/ reinforcing rods shall be used. The
suspension clamps shall be designed to carry a vertical load of not less than
70kN. The suspension clamps slippage shall occur between 12kN and 17 kN
as measured. For river crossing and special transmission lines (where
heavier earthwire used e.g. 7/4.5) OPGW installation hardware design
slippage shall occur between 9% and 14% of UTS of OPGW.

The Contractor shall supply all the components of the suspension assembly
including shackles, bolts, nuts, washers, split pins, etc. The total drop of
the suspension assembly shall not exceed 150 mm (measured from the
centre point of attachment to the centre point of the OPGW). The design of
the assembly shall be such that the direction of run of the OPGW shall be
the same as that of the conductor.

(b) Dead End Clamp Assemblies: All dead end clamp assemblies shall
preferably be of performed armoured grip type and shall include all
necessary hardware for attaching the assembly to the tower strain plates.
Dead end clamps shall allow the OPGW to pass through continuously
without cable cutting. The slip strength shall be rated not less than 95% of
the Ultimate tensile strength of the OPGW.

(c) Clamp Assembly Earthing Wire: Earthing wire consisting of a 1500 mm


length of aluminium or aluminium alloy conductor equivalent in size to the
OPGW shall be used to earth suspension and dead end clamp assemblies to
the tower structure. The earthing wire shall be permanently fitted with lugs
at each end. The lugs shall be attached to the clamp assembly at one end
and the tower structure at the other.

(d) Structure Attachment Clamp Assemblies: Clamp assemblies used to


attach the OPGW to the structures, shall have two parallel grooves for the
OPGW, one on either side of the connecting bolt. The clamps shall be such
that clamping characteristics do not alter adversely when only one OPGW
is installed. The tower attachment plates shall locate the OPGW on the
inside of the tower and shall be attached directly to the tower legs/cross-
members without drilling or any other structural modifications.

(e) Tension Fitting for Suspension Tower: The OPGW cable sections shall
also be terminated & spliced on suspension towers as per requirement. For
this, a special fitting namely Yoke plate alongwith tension fittings shall be
provided for termination/jointing of OPGW on Suspension tower.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


14

Typical drawing of suspension fitting where cable may be terminated on suspension


tower.

(f) Vibration Dampers: Vibration dampers type 4R Stockbridge or


equivalent, having four (4) different frequencies spread within the Aeolian
frequency bandwidth corresponding to wind speed of 1m/s to 7 m/s, shall
be used for suspension and tension points in each span. The Contractor
shall determine the exact numbers and placement(s) of vibration dampers
through a detailed vibration analysis.

One damper minimum on each side per OPGW cable for suspension
points and two dampers minimum on each side per OPGW cable for
tension points shall be used for nominal design span upto 400 meter for
400kV and 350 meters for 220kV and 132kV transmission lines. For
higher ruling spans, the number of vibration damper shall be as per
manufacturer recommendation and damper placement chart.

The clamp of the vibration damper shall be made of high strength


aluminum alloy of type LM-6. It shall be capable of supporting the damper
and prevent damage or chaffing of the conductor during erection or
continued operation. The clamp shall have smooth and permanent grip to
keep the damper in position on the OPGW cable without damaging the
strands or causing premature fatigue failure of the OPGW cable under the
clamp. The clamp groove shall be in uniform contact with the OPGW cable
over the entire clamping surface except for the rounded edges. The groove
of the clamp body and clamp cap shall be smooth, free from projections,
grit or other materials which could cause damage to the OPGW cable when
the clamp is installed. Clamping bolts shall be provided with self locking
nuts and designed to prevent corrosion of threads or loosening in service.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


15

The messenger cable shall be made of high strength galvanised steel/stain


less steel. It shall be of preformed and post formed quality in order to
prevent subsequent droop of weight and to maintain consistent flexural
stiffness of the cable in service. The messenger cable other than stainless
steel shall be hot dip galvanised in accordance with the recommendations
of IS: 4826 for heavily coated wires.

The damper mass shall be made of hot dip galvanised mild steel/cast
iron or a permanent mould cast zinc alloy. All castings shall be free from
defects such as cracks, shrinkage, inclusions and blow holes etc. The
surface of the damper masses shall be smooth.

The damper clamp shall be casted over the messenger cable and offer
sufficient and permanent grip on it. The messenger cable shall not slip out
of the grip at a load less than the mass pull-off value of the damper. The
damper masses made of material other-than zinc alloy shall be fixed to the
messenger cable in a suitable manner in order to avoid excessive stress
concentration on the messenger cables which shall cause premature
fatigue failure of the same. The messenger cable ends shall be suitably
and effectively sealed to prevent corrosion. The damper mass made of zinc
alloy shall be casted over the messenger cable and have sufficient and
permanent grip on the messenger cable under all service conditions.

The contractor must indicate the clamp bolt tightening torque to


ensure that the slip strength of the clamp is maintained between 2.5 kN
and 5 kN. The clamp when installed on the OPGW cable shall not cause
excessive stress concentration on the OPGW cable leading to permanent
deformation of the OPGW strands and premature fatigue failure in
operation.

The vibration analysis of the system, with and without damper and
dynamic characteristics of the damper as detailed in Technical
Specification, shall have to be submitted. The technical particulars for
vibration analysis and damping design of the system are as follows:

Sl. Description Technical Particulars


No.

1 Span Length in meters


400 meter for 400kV
(i) Ruling design span:
350 meters for 220kV &
132kV
(ii) Maximum span: 1100 meters
(iii) Minimum Span: 100 meters
2 Configuration: As per Specifications

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


16

Sl. Description Technical Particulars


No.
3 Tensile load in each: As per sag tension
calculations
4 Armour rods used: Standard preformed armour
rods/AGS
5 Maximum permissible +/- 150 micro strains
dynamic strain:

The damper placement chart for spans ranging from 100m to 1100m
shall be submitted by the Contractor. Placement charts should be duly
supported with sample calculations and manufacturer recommendation.
The damper placement charts shall include the following
(1) Location of the dampers for various combinations of spans and line
tensions clearly indicating the number of dampers to be installed per
OPGW cable per span.
(2) Placement distances clearly identifying the extremities between which
the distances are to be measured.
(3) Placement recommendation depending upon type of suspension
clamps (viz Free center type/Armour grip type etc.)

2.1.5 Fibre Optic Splice Enclosures (Joint Box)

All splices shall be encased in Fibre Optic Splice Enclosures. Suitable splice
enclosures shall be provided to encase the optical cable splices in protective,
moisture and dust free environment. Splice enclosures shall comply with ingress
protection class IP 66 or better. The splice enclosures shall be designed for the
storage and protection of required number of optical fibre splices and equipped
with sufficient number of splice trays for splicing all fibres in the cable. No more
than 12 fibres shall be terminated in a single splice tray. They shall be filled with
suitable encapsulate that is easily removable should re-entry be required into the
enclosures.

Splice enclosures shall be suitable for outdoor use with each of the cable types
provided under this contract. Splice enclosures shall be appropriate for mounting
on transmission line towers above anti-climb guard levels at about 10 metres
from top of the tower and shall accommodate pass-through splicing. The actual
mounting height and location shall be finalised after Survey.

2.1.5.1 Optical Fibre Splices

Splicing of the optical fibre cabling shall be minimized through careful Contractor

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


17

planning. There shall be no mid-span splices allowed. All required splices shall be
planned to occur on tower structures. All optical fibre splicing shall comply with
the following:

(a) All fibre splices shall be accomplished through fusion splicing.

(b) Each fibre splice shall be fitted with a splice protection sheath fitted over
the final splice.

(c) All splices and bare fibre shall be neatly installed in covered splice trays.

(d) For each link, bi-directional attenuation of single mode fusion splices, shall
not average more than 0.05 dB and no single splice loss shall exceed 0.1 dB
when measured at 1550 nm.

(e) For splicing, fibre optic cable service loops of adequate length shall be
provided so that all splices occurring at tower structures can be performed at
ground level.

2.1.6 Fibre Optic Approach Cables

For purposes of this specification, a fibre optic approach cable is defined as the
Armoured underground fibre optic cable required to connect Overhead Fibre Optic
Cable (OPGW) between the final in line splice enclosure on the gantry / tower
forming the termination of the fibre cable on the power line and the Fibre Optic
Distribution Panel (FODP) installed within the building. The estimated fibre optic
approach cabling length requirements are indicated in the BoQ. Actual supply to
be done as per directives of MPPTCL. However, actual supply shall be done based
on the actual site survey.

2.1.6.1 Basic Construction

The cable shall be suitable for direct burial, laying in trenches & PVC/Hume ducts,
laying under false flooring and on indoor or outdoor cable raceways.

2.1.6.2 Jacket Construction & Material

The Approach Cable shall be a UV resistant, rodent proof, armoured cable with
metallic type of armouring. The outer cable jacket for approach cable shall consist
of carbon black polyethylene resin to prevent damage from exposure to ultra-
violet light, weathering and high levels of pollution. The jacket shall conform to
ASTM D1248 for density.

2.1.6.3 Optical, Electrical and Mechanical Requirements

Approach cable shall contain fibres with identical optical/ physical characteristics
as those in the OPGW cables. The cable core shall comprise of tensile strength
member(s), fibre support/bedding structure, core wrap/bedding, and an overall
impervious jacket.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


18

2.1.6.4. Installation of Approach Cable

The existing cable trenches/cable raceways proposed to be used shall be


identified in the survey report. The contractor shall make its best effort to
route the cable through the existing available cable trenches. Where suitable
existing cable trenches are not available, suitable alternative shall be provided
after MPPTCL/site engineer approval. However, the approach cable shall be laid
in HDPE pipe in all condition.

Suitable Provision shall be made by the contractor to ensure adequate safety


earthing and insulated protection for the approach cable

All required fitting, support, accessories, ducts, inner ducts, conduits, risers
and any item not specially mentioned but required for laying an installation of
approach cable shall be supplied and installed by the contractor.

2.1.7 Fibre Optic Distribution Panel

At each location requiring the termination of at least one fibre within a cable,
all fibres within that cable shall be connectorized and terminated in Fibre Optic
Distribution Panels in a manner consistent with the following:

(a) All fibre optic terminations shall be housed using FODPs provisioned with
splice organizers and splice trays. All fibres within a cable shall be fusion
spliced to preconnectorized pigtails and fitted to the "Back-side" of the
provided fibre optic couplings.

(b) FODPs shall be suitable for use with each of the cable types provided as
part of this contract. FODPs shall accommodate pass-through splicing
and fibre terminations.

(c) FODPs shall be supplied in suitable cabinets/racks with locking


arrangement.

The dimension of FODP cabinet shall be minimum 2200mm x 600mm x


600mm (HxWxD) and shall meet or exceed ingress protection class IP55
specifications.

(d) All FODPs shall be of corrosion resistant, robust construction and shall
allow both top or bottom entry for access to the splice trays. Ground lugs
shall be provided on all FODPs and the Contractor shall ensure that all
FODPs are properly grounded.

(e) Flexible protection shall be provided to the patch cord bunches going out
from FODP to other equipment.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


19

2.1.8 Optical Fibre Connectors

Optical fibres shall be connectorised with FC-PC type connectors preferably.


Alternatively connector with matching patch cord shall also be acceptable.
Fibre optic couplings supplied with FODPs shall be appropriate for the fibre
connectors to be supported. There shall be no adapters.

2.1.9 Service Loops

For purpose of this specification, cable and fibre service loop are defined as
slack (extra) and fibre provided for facilating the installation, maintenance and
repair of the optical fibre cable.

(a) Outdoor cable service loops -Inline splice enclosures installed outdoor
and mounted on the utility tower shall be installed with sufficient fibre optic
cable service cable loop such that the recommended minimum bend radius is
maintained while allowing for installation or maintenance of the cable to be
performed in a controlled environment at ground level.

(b) Indoor cable service loops -FODPs shall provide atleast three meters
of cable service loops. Service loop shall be neatly secure and stored, coiled
such that the minimum recommended bend radius is maintained.

(c) Fibre units service loops:-For all fibre optic cable splicing the cable
shall be stripped back to sufficient length such that the fan out of fibre units
shall provide for atleast one meter of fibre unit service loops between the
stripped cable and the bare fibre fan out.

(d) Pigtail Service Loops:-Connectorised pigtails spliced to bare fibres shall


provide atleast one meter of service loop installed in the FODP Fibre organizer
and atleast one meter of service loops to the couplings neatly stored behind
the FODP coupling panel.

(e) Fibre Service Loops- Atleast 0.5 mts of bare fibre service loop shall be
provided on each side of all fibre splices. The bare fibre service loops shall be
neatly and safely installed inside covered splice tray.

2.1.9 OPGW Cable Installation requirements

Most of the OPGW fibre optic cables to be installed under this project shall be
installed under live line conditions, i.e. with all the circuits of the transmission line
charged to their rated voltage. The tentative bill of quantities for live-line OPGW
cable system installations have been specified in the appendices.

The OPGW cable shall be installed at the top of the tower by replacing the existing
ground wire. The Contractor shall carry out re-tensioning of the existing earth
wire wherever required to maintain the adequate clearances for live line stringing
of fibre optic cables. However, in exceptional cases installation of OPGW cable

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


20

below conductor may also be considered on low voltage lines which shall be
decided during detailed engineering.

During pre-installation survey, the Contractor shall check the suitability of OPGW
installation on EHV AC transmission line crossings, river crossing, highway, rail
crossing etc in consultation with MPPTCL. The Contractor shall propose suitable
OPGW route accordingly using diamond crossing etc wherever earth wire is not
available beneath line crossings. Such additional OPGW due to change in route on
account of line crossings shall be included as a part of main quantity for OPGW
route length.

OPGW installed under live line condition, i.e. with all circuits charged to the rated
line voltage as specified in this section shall be generally in accordance with the
IEEE Guide to the Installation of Overhead Transmission Line Conductors (IEEE
STD. 524 with latest revisions), with additional instructions and precautions for
live line working and fibre optic cable handling. Some of the cable may be
installed in off-line condition also. The stringing procedure shall be submitted by
the Contractor prior to stringing for MPPTCL approval.

A tower structural analysis shall be carried out by the Contractor, based on the
relevant data to be provided by MPPTCL, to ensure that with the replacement of
existing earthwire with the OPGW cable, the tower members remain within the
statutory safety limits as per Indian Electricity rules and if required the Contractor
shall carry out the tower strengthening as necessary.

Suitable marking / identification on all installed OPGW / associated fittings /


vibration dampers under this package shall be proposed by the Contractor to
differentiate OPGW from conventional Earthwire which shall be implemented after
acceptance & approval of MPPTCL.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


21

Appendix -I

INSPECTION & TESTING OF OPGW CABLE

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


22

INSPECTION & TESTING

All materials furnished and all work performed under this Contract shall be
inspected and tested. Deliverables shall not be shipped until all required inspections
and tests have been completed, and all deficiencies have been corrected to comply
with this Specification and approved for shipment by the MPPTCL.

Except where otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide all manpower and
materials for tests, including testing facilities, logistics, power and instrumentation,
and replacement of damaged parts. The costs shall be borne by the Contractor and
shall be deemed to be included in the contract price.

The entire cost of testing for factory & site acceptance, routine tests, production
tests and other test during manufacture & site activities specified herein shall be
treated as included in the quoted unit price of materials, except for the expenses of
Inspector/MPPTCL’s representative.

Acceptance or waiver of tests shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility
to furnish material in accordance with the specifications.

All tests shall be witnessed by the MPPTCL and/or its authorized representative
(hereinafter referred to as the MPPTCL) unless the MPPTCL authorizes testing to
proceed without witness. The MPPTCL representative shall sign the test form
indicating approval of successful tests.

Should any inspections or tests indicate that specific item does not meet
Specification requirements, the appropriate items shall be replaced, upgraded, or
added by the Contractor as necessary to correct the noted deficiencies at no cost to
the MPPTCL. After correction of a deficiency, all necessary retests shall be
performed to verify the effectiveness of the corrective action.

The MPPTCL reserves the right to require the Contractor to perform, at the
MPPTCL's expense, any other reasonable test(s) at the Contractor's premises, on
site, or elsewhere in addition to the specified Type, Acceptance, Routine, or
Manufacturing tests to assure the MPPTCL of specification compliance.

All security related features shall be demonstrated during FAT/SAT as required by


the MPPTCL.

1. Inspection

Access to the Contractor's facilities during system manufacturing and testing and to
any facility where systems/ equipment are being produced/ tested/ integrated for
the fibre optic communication network, shall be available to the MPPTCL. At all
times the MPPTCL shall have full facilities for unrestricted inspection of such
materials or equipment. To facilitate this, the Contractor shall submit for the
MPPTCL approval, a comprehensive Quality Assurance Plan using ISO 9000 as a
general guideline. In addition, the Quality Assurance Plan shall satisfy the following:

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


23

(a) Sufficient office facilities, equipment, and documentation necessary to


complete all inspections and to verify that the equipment is being
fabricated and maintained in accordance with the Specification shall be
provided by the Contractor to the MPPTCL.

(b) Inspections to be performed by the MPPTCL will include visual


examination of hardware, cable dressings and labeling. Contractor's
documentation will also be examined to verify that it adequately identifies
and describes all offered items and spare parts.

(c) Access to inspect the Contractor's standards, procedures, and records


that are applicable to the supplied equipment shall be provided to the
MPPTCL. Documents will be inspected to verify that the Contractor has
performed the required quality assurance activities.

(d) The inspection rights described above shall also apply to sub Contractors
who are responsible for supplying major components described in this
Specification. These items shall be inspected and tested at the sub
Contractor's factory by the MPPTCL's representatives prior to shipping this
equipment to the Contractor's facility or directly to the MPPTCL.

(e) The above inspection rights shall also apply to sub Contractors supplying
assemblies, subassemblies and components. However, such items will
normally be inspected and tested by the MPPTCL's representatives at the
Contractor's site before acceptance.

2. Test Plans and Procedures

Test plans and test procedures for both factory and site acceptance tests shall be
provided by the Contractor. Test plans and test procedures shall ensure that each
factory and site test is comprehensive and verify all the features of the equipment
to be tested. Test plans and test procedures shall be modular to allow individual
test segments to be repeated upon request.

The Contractor shall submit a Test Schedule for the MPPTCL's approval within one
(1) week after the award of contract for Type Tests and three (3) months after the
award of contract for all other tests. The test schedule shall list the tests to be
carried out, and the approximate test duration. The test periods shall also be
indicated in the PERT chart or equivalent for the work.

The Contractor shall give the MPPTCL twenty one (21) days written notice of any
material being ready for testing. Fifteen days prior to the scheduled testing, the
MPPTCL shall provide written notice to the Contractor of any drawings, equipment,
material, or workmanship which, in the MPPTCL’s opinion, are not compliant to the
specification. The Contractor shall give due consideration to such objections, if
valid, effecting the corrections as necessary or shall prove, in writing, that said
modifications are unnecessary for contract compliance.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


24

2.1 Factory and Site Test Plans

A test plan for factory and site acceptance tests shall be submitted for approval, at
least four (4) weeks before the start of testing. The test plan shall be a single
overview document that defines the overall schedule and individual responsibilities
associated with conducting the tests, documenting the test results, and successfully
completing the test criteria. Test Plans shall include, at a minimum, the information
contained in Table (I-a)

Table (I-a)
Factory & field Test Plan Requirements

Item: Description:

1. Test schedule

2. Record-keeping assignments, procedures and


forms

3. Procedures for monitoring, correcting and


retesting variances

4. Procedures for controlling and documenting all


changes made to the communications equipment
after the start of testing

2.2 Test Procedures

Test procedures for factory and site testing shall be submitted for the MPPTCL
approval at least four (4) weeks before each individual test. Fully approved test
procedures shall be submitted to the MPPTCL at least four weeks prior to the
commencement of testing. Testing shall not commence without approved test
procedures. At a minimum, test procedures shall include the items listed in Table(I-
b)……..

All test equipment and/or instruments shall bear calibration stickers indicating valid
calibration on and beyond the testing date. The time lapsed since last calibration
shall not exceed the test equipment/ jig manufacturer recommended calibration
interval or the interval recommended in the test lab’s internal quality procedures.

The Contractor shall ensure that all testing will be performed by qualified testing
personnel well experienced in performing such tests.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


25

Table (I-b)…….
Test Procedure Requirements

Item: Description:

1. Test Title and Revision Level, if applicable

2. List of Standard(s) complied with

3. Function(s) / parameter(s) to be tested


4.
Purpose of each test segment

5. List of required test equipment

Description of any special test conditions or special actions required.


6. This includes complete descriptions, listings and user interface
procedures for all special hardware and software tools and/or display
formats to be used during the test.

Test setup including test configuration block diagrams and/or


7. illustrations.

8. Test procedures to be followed.

9. Required inputs and expected outputs for each test segment

10. Acceptance criteria for each test segment.

List of test data to be supplied by the Contractor(s) and copies of


11. any certified data to be used
12. Format of test reports.

2.3 Test Records

Complete and indexed records of all factory and site acceptance tests results shall
be maintained and provided to the MPPTCL by the Contractor in hardcopy. The
records shall be keyed to the steps enumerated in the test procedures. The minimal
items required in test records are described in Table(I-c)……..

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


26

Table(I-c)
Test Record Requirements

Item: Description:

1. Test Title and Revision Level, if applicable; contract references

2. Date and time for test start and test completed

3. Test title and reference to the appropriate section of the test


procedures

4. Description of any special test conditions or special actions taken


(Includes test-case data).

5. Test results for each test segment including an indication of Passed,


Conditional Pass, Incomplete or Failed.

6. Test procedure modifications made during testing.

7. Variance Report(s) tracking information and copies (if variance(s)


was detected).

8. Contractor's test engineer(s) identification, signature and remarks

9. MPPTCL's test witness identification, signature and remarks

10. List of all attachments

11. Attachments (including system logs, printouts, variances, hard


copies of visual test result displays, etc.)

All principle test records, test certificates and performance curves shall be supplied
for all tests carried out as proof of compliance with the specifications and/or each
and every specified test. These test certificates, records and performance curves
shall be supplied for all tests, whether or not they have been witnessed by the
MPPTCL within the specified duration after the completion of test. Information given
on such test certificates and curves shall be sufficient to identify the material or
equipment to which the certificates refer, and shall also bear the Contractor's
reference and heading.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


27

2.4 Rejection of Elements

Any item or component which fails to comply with the requirements of this
Specification in any respect, at any stage of manufacture, test, erection or on
completion at site may be rejected by the MPPTCL either in whole or part as
considered necessary.

Material or components with defects of such a nature that do not meet the
requirements of the Specification by adjustment or modification shall be replaced
by the Contractor at his own expense. After adjustment or modification, the
Contractor shall submit the items to the MPPTCL for further inspection and/or tests.

2.5 Test Periods Defined

The terminology used in Volume I, General Conditions of Contract and their


correlation with the tests requirements described within this section is as follows:

Pre-Commissioning & Commissioning Period - The Site Acceptance Test (SAT)

Operational Acceptance - Successful completion of SAT

3. Type Testing

"Type Tests" shall be defined as those tests which are to be carried out to prove the
design, process of manufacture and general conformity of the materials to this
Specification. Type Testing shall comply with the following:

(a) All cable & equipment being supplied shall conform to type tests as per
technical specification.

(b) These type/ special tests should have been conducted within last
five years. In case the type/ special test was carried out earlier
than five years, the manufacturer will have to conduct these
tests before commencement of supply. In both the above cases
type/ special test certificate must be submitted with the offer.

(c) The Contractor shall submit, within 30 days of Contract Award, copies of
test reports for all of the Type Tests that are specified in the
specifications and that have previously ( before Contract award) been
performed. These reports may be accepted by the MPPTCL only if they
apply to materials and equipment that are essentially identical to those
due to be delivered under the Contract and only if test procedures and
parameter values are identical to those specified in this specifications
carried out at accredited labs and witnessed by third party / customer’s
representatives.

In the event of any discrepancy in the test reports or any type tests not
carried out, same shall be carried out by Contractor without any
additional cost implication to the MPPTCL.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


28

(d) Type Tests shall be certified or performed by reputed laboratories using


material and equipment data sheets and test procedures that have been
approved by the MPPTCL. The test procedures shall be formatted as
defined in the technical specifications and shall include a complete list of
the applicable reference standards and submitted for MPPTCL approval
at least four (4) weeks before commencement of test(s). The Contractor
shall provide the MPPTCL at least 30 days written notice of the planned
commencement of each type test.

(e) The Contractor shall provide a detailed schedule for performing all
specified type tests. These tests shall be performed in the presence of a
representative of the MPPTCL.

(f) The Contractor shall ensure that all type tests can be completed within
the time schedule offered in his Technical Proposal.

(g) In case of failure during any type test, the Supplier is either required to
manufacture a fresh sample lot and repeat all type tests successfully or
repeat that particular type test(s) at least three times successfully on
the samples selected from the already manufactured lot at his own
expenses. In case a fresh lot is manufactured for testing then the lot
already manufactured shall be rejected.

3.1 Type Test Samples

The Contractor shall supply equipment/material for sample selection only after the
Quality Assurance Plan has been approved by the MPPTCL. The sample material
shall be manufactured strictly in accordance with the approved Quality Assurance
Plan. The Contractor shall submit for MPPTCL approval, the type test sample
selection procedure. The selection process for conducting the type tests shall
ensure that samples are selected at random. At least three samples of each of the
proposed equipment/item/cable drum except FO cable installation hardware &
fittings shall be offered for selection. For FO cable installation hardware & fittings at
least ten (10) samples shall be offered for selection.

3.2 List of Type Tests

The type testing shall be conducted on the following equipment/items

(a) Optical fibres


(b) OPGW Cable
(c) OPGW Cable fittings
(d) Vibration Damper
(e) Splice Enclosure (Joint Box)
(f) Approach Cable

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


29

3.2.1 Type Tests for Optical Fibres

The type tests listed below in table(I-d) shall be conducted on DWSM fibres to be
supplied as part of overhead cables. The tests specific to the cable type are listed in
subsequent sections.

Table (I-d)
Type Tests For Optical Fibres

S. Test Name Acceptance Criteria Test procedure


No.

1 Attenuation As per Specification IEC 60793-1-40


Or EIA/TIA 455-78A

2 Attenuation Variation As per Table 2-1(a) IEC 60793-1-40


with Wavelength Or EIA/TIA 455-78A

3 Attenuation at Water IEC 60793-1-40


Peak Or EIA/TIA 455-78A

4 Temp. Cycling As per Table 2-1(a) IEC 60793-1-52


(Temp dependence of Or EIA/TIA 455-3A, 2
Attenuation) cycles
5 Attenuation With
Bending IEC 60793-1-47
(Bend Performance) Or EIA/TIA 455-62A
6 Mode Field dia. IEC 60793-1-45 Or
EIA/TIA 455-
164A/167A/174
7 Chromatic Dispersion IEC 60793-1-42 Or
EIA/TIA 455-
168A/169A/175A
8 Cladding Diameter IEC 60793-1-20 Or
EIA/TIA 455-176

9 Point Discontinuities of IEC 60793-1-40 Or


attenuation EIA/TIA 455-59
10 Core -Clad IEC 60793-1-20 Or
concentricity error EIA/TIA 455-176
11 Fibre Tensile Proof IEC 60793-1-30
Testing Or EIA/TIA 455-31B

-End Of table-

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


30

3.2.2 Type Tests for OPGW Cables

The type tests to be conducted on the OPGW cable are listed in Table(I-e) Type
Tests for OPGW Cables. Unless specified otherwise in the technical specifications or
the referenced standards, the optical attenuation of the specimen, measured during
or after the test as applicable, shall not increase by more than 0.05 dB/Km.

Table (I-e)
Type tests for OPGW Cable

S. No. Test Name Test Test Procedure


Description

1 Water Ingress Test IEEE 1138-2009 IEEE 1138-2009


Method 6.4.3.5

2 Seepage of filling IEEE 1138-2009 IEEE 1138-2009


compound Method 6.4.3.6

3 Short Circuit Test IEEE 1138-2009 IEEE 1138-2009


Method 6.4.3.3

4 Aeolian Vibration IEEE 1138-2009 IEEE 1138-2009


Test Method 6.4.3.1

5 Galloping test IEEE 1138-2009 IEEE 1138-2009


Method 6.4.3.2
IEEE 1138-2009
6 Cable Bend Test IEEE 1138-2009
Method 6.4.2.3
IEEE 1138-2009 IEEE 1138-2009
7 Sheave Test
Method 6.4.2.1
IEEE 1138-2009 IEEE 1138-2009
8 Crush Test Method 6.4.2.2
IEEE 1138-2009
9 IEEE 1138-2009
Twist Test Method 6.4.2.4

10 Creep Test IEEE 1138-2009 IEEE 1138-2009


Method 6.4.1.1

11 Strain Margin Test IEEE 1138-2009 IEEE 1138-2009


Method 6.4.1.3

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


31

Table (I-e)
Type tests for OPGW Cable

S. No. Test Name Test Test Procedure


Description

12 Stress Strain Test IEEE 1138-2009 IEEE 1138-2009


Method 6.4.1.2

13 Temperature IEEE 1138-2009 IEEE 1138-2009


Cycling Test Method 6.4.3.7
14 Corrosion (Salt IEEE 1138-2009 IEEE 1138-2009
Spray) Test Method 6.4.3.8
15 Ultimate Tensile IEEE 1138-2009 IEEE 1138-2009
Strength Test Method 6.4.1.4
16 Lightning Arc Test IEEE 1138-2009 IEEE 1138-2009
Method 6.4.3.4
17 DC Resistance Test IEEE 1138-2009 IEEE 1138-2009
Method 6.4.1.5

-End Of Table-

3.2.3 Type Test on OPGW Cable Fittings

The type tests to be conducted on the OPGW Cable fittings and accessories are
listed below:

(i) Mechanical Strength Test for Suspension/Tension Assembly

Applicable Standards: IEC 61284, 1997.

Suspension Assembly

The armour rods /reinforcement rods are assembled on to the approved OPGW
using the Installation Instructions to check that the assembly is correctly fitted and
is the same that will be carried out during installations.

Part 1:

The suspension assembly shall be increased at a constant rate up to a load


equal to 50% of the specified minimum Failure Load increased and held for one
minute for the test rig to stabilise. The load shall then be increased at a steady
rate to 67% of the minimum Failure Load and held for five minutes. The angle

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


32

between the cable, the Suspension Assembly and the horizontal shall not exceed
16o. This load shall then be removed in a controlled manner and the Protection
Splice disassembled. Examination of all the components shall be made and any
evidence of visual deformation shall be documented.

Part 2:

The Suspension clamp shall then be placed in the testing machine. The tensile
load shall gradually be increased up to 50% of the specified Minimum Failure Load
of the Suspension Assembly and held for one minute for the Test Rig to stabilise
and the load shall be further increased at a steady rate until the specified minimum
Failure Load is reached and held for one minute. No fracture should occur during
this period. The applied load shall then be increased until the failing load is reached
and the value shall be documented.

Tension Assembly

The Tension Assembly is correctly fitted and is the same that will be carried out
during installations.

Part 1:

The tension assembly (excluding tension clamp) shall be increased at a


constant rate up to a load equal to 50% of the specified minimum Failure Load
increased at a constant rate and held for one minute for the test rig to stabilise.
The load shall then be increased at a steady rate to 67% of the minimum Failure
Load and held for five minutes. This load shall then remove in a controlled manner
and the Tension Assembly disassembled. Examination of the Tension Dead-End and
associated components shall be made and any evidence of visual deformation shall
be documented.

Part 2:

The Tension Dead-End and associated components shall then be reassembled


and bolts tightened as before. The tensile load shall gradually be increased up shall
gradually be increased up to 50% of the specified Minimum Failure Load of the
Tension Assembly and held for one minute for the Test Rig to stabilise and the load
shall be further increased at a steady rate until the specified minimum Failure Load
is reached and held for one minute. No fracture should occur during this period. The
applied load shall then be increased until the failing load is reached and the value
shall be documented.

Acceptance Criteria for Tension/Suspension Assembly:

- No evidence of binding of the Nuts or Deformation of components at end of Part 1


of Test.

- No evidence of Fracture at the end of one minute at the minimum failure load
during Part 2 of the Test.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


33

Any result outside these parameters shall constitute a failure.

(ii) Clamp Slip Strength Test for Suspension Assembly

The suspension assembly shall be vertically suspended by means of a flexible


attachment. A suitable length fibre optical cable shall be fixed in the clamps. Once
the Suspension Clamp has been assembled, the test rig is tensioned to 1 kN and
the position scale on the recorder ‘zeroed’. The test rig is then tensioned to 2.5 kN
and the relative positions of the Reinforcing Rods, Armour Rods and Suspension
Clamp shall be marked by a suitable means to confirm any slippage after the test
has been completed. The relative positions of the helical Armour Rods and
associated Reinforcing Rods at each end shall be marked and also 2 mm relative
position between clamp body and Armour Rods shall be marked on one side. The
load shall be increased to 12 kN at a loading rate of 3 kN/min and held for one
minute. At the end of this one minute period, the relative displacement between
clamp body and the armour rods shall be observed. If the slippage is 2 mm or
above, the test shall be terminated. Otherwise, at the end of one minute the
position of the clamp body and 2 mm. relative positions between clamp body and
armour rods shall be marked on the other side. After the one minute pause, the
load shall be further increased at a loading rate of 3 kN/min, and recording of load
and displacement shall continue until either the relative Position displacement
between clamp body and armour rods reaches more than 2 mm or the load reaches
the maximum slip load of 17 kN. On reaching either of the above values the test is
terminated. Visual examination of all paint marks shall be recorded, and a
measurement of any displacement recorded in the Table of Results.

Acceptance Criteria:

The Suspension Clamp has passed the Slip Test if the following conditions are met:

 No slippage* shall occur at or below the specified minimum slip load.

* Definition of no slippage in accordance with IEC 61284, 1997:- Any relative


movement less than 2 mm is accepted. The possible couplings or elongations
produced by the cable as a result of the test itself are not regarded as
slippage.

 Slippage shall occur between the specified maximum and minimum slip load of
12 - 17 kN.

 There shall be no slippage of the Reinforcing Rods over the cable, and no
slippage of the Armour Rods over the Reinforcing Rods.

 The relative movement (i.e. more than 2 mm between Armour Rods & Clamp
body) between minimum 12 kN and maximum slip 17 kN, shall be considered
as slip.

 The Armour Rods shall not be displaced from their original lay or damaged**.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


34

** Definition of no damage in accordance with convention expressed in IEC


61284: 1997 no damage, other than surface flattening of the strands shall
occur.

Any result outside these parameters is a failure.

(iii) Slip Strength Test of Tension Clamp

Tension clamps shall be fitted on a 8 m length of fibre optic cable on both ends. The
assembly shall be mounted on a tensile testing machine and anchored in a manner
similar to the arrangement to be used in service. A tensile load shall gradually be
applied up to 20 % of the UTS of OPGW. Displacement transducers shall be
installed to measure the relative movement between the OPGW relative to the
Reinforcing Rods and Tension Dead -End relative to Reinforcing Rods. In addition,
suitable marking shall be made on the OPGW and Dead-End to confirm grip. The
load shall be gradually increased at a constant rate up to 50 % of the UTS and the
position scale of the recorder is zeroed. The load shall then gradually increased up
to 95 % of the UTS and maintained for one minute. After one minute pause, the
load shall be slowly released to zero and the marking examined and measured for
any relative movement.

Acceptance Criteria:

- No movement* shall occur between the OPGW and the Reinforcing Rods, or
between the Reinforcing Rods and the Dead-End assembly.

- No failure or damage or disturbance to the lay of the Tension Dead-End,


Reinforcing Rods or OPGW.

* Definition of no movement as defined in IEC 61284: Any relative movement less


than 2 mm is accepted. The possible couplings or elongations produced by the
conductor as a result of the test itself are not regarded as slippage.

Any result outside these parameters shall constitute a failure.

(iv) Grounding Clamp and Structure Mounting Clamp Fit Test

For structure mounting clamp, one series of tests shall be conducted with two fibre
optic cables installed, one series of tests with one fibre optic cable installed in one
groove, and one series of tests with one fibre optic cable in the other groove. Each
clamp shall be installed including clamping compound as required on the fibre optic
cable. The nut shall be tightened on to the bolt by using torque wrench with a
torque of 5.5 kgm or supplier's recommended torque and the tightened clamp shall
be held for 10 minutes. After the test remove the fibre optic cable and examine all
its components for distortion, crushing or breaking. Also the fibre optic cable shall
be checked to ensure free movement within the core using dial callipers to measure
the diameter of the core tube. The material shall be defined as failed if any visible
distortion, crushing, cracking or breaking of the core tube is observed or the fibre
optic cable within the core tube is not free to move, or when the diameter of the

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


35

core tube as measured at any location in the clamped area is more than 0.5 mm
larger or smaller of the core diameter as measured outside the clamped area.

(v) Structure Mounting Clamp Strength Test

The clamp and mounting assembly shall be assembled on a vertical 200 mm x 200
mm angle and a short length of fibre optic cable installed. A vertical load of 200 kg
shall be applied at the end of the mounting clamp and held for 5 minutes.
Subsequently, the load shall be increased to 400 kg and held for 30 seconds. Any
visible distortion, slipping or breaking of any component of the mounting clamp or
assembly shall constitute failure.

3.2.4 Type Test on Vibration Damper

(a) Dynamic Characteristic Test

The damper shall be mounted with its clamp tightened with torque recommended
by the manufacturer on shaker table capable of simulating sinusoidal vibrations for
Critical Aeolian Vibration frequency band ranging from 0.18/d to 1.4/d – where d is
the OPGW cable diameter in meters. The damper assembly shall be vibrated
vertically with a ±1 mm amplitude from 5 to 15 Hz frequency and beyond 15 Hz at
0.5 mm to determine following characteristics with the help of suitable recording
instruments.

(i) Force Vs frequency


(ii) Phase angle Vs frequency
(iii) Power dissipation Vs frequency

The Force Vs frequency curve shall not show steep peaks at resonance frequencies
and deep troughs between the resonance frequencies. The resonance frequencies
shall be suitably spread within the Aeolian vibration frequency-band between the
lower and upper dangerous frequency limits determined by the vibration analysis of
fibre optic cable without dampers.

Acceptance criteria for vibration damper:

(i) The above dynamic characteristics test on five damper shall be


conducted.
(ii) The mean reactance and phase angle Vs frequency curves shall be
drawn with the criteria of best fit method.
(iii) The above mean reactance response curve should lie within following
limits:
V.D. for OPGW - 0.060 f to 0.357 f kgf/mm*
Where f is frequency in Hz.
(iv) The above mean phase angle response curve shall be between 25o to
130o within the frequency range of interest.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


36

(v) If the above curve lies within the envelope, the damper design shall be
considered to have successfully met the requirement.
(vi) Visual resonance frequencies of each mass of damper is to be recorded
and to be compared with the guaranteed values.

(b) Vibration Analysis

The vibration analysis of the fibre optic cable shall be done with and without
damper installed on the span. The vibration analysis shall be done on a digital
computer using energy balance approach. The following parameters shall be taken
into account for the purpose of analysis.

(i) The analysis shall be done for single fibre optic cable without armour
rods. The tension shall be taken as 25% of UTS of fibre optic cable for
a span ranging from 100 m to 1100 m.

(ii) The self damping factor and flexural stiffness (EI) for fibre optic cable
shall be calculated on the basis of experimental results. The details to
experimental analysis with these data shall be furnished.

(iii) The power dissipation curve obtained from Damper Characteristics Test
shall be used for analysis with damper.

(iv) Examine the Aeolian Vibration level of the fibre optic cable with and
without vibration damper installed at the recommended location or
wind velocity ranging from 0 to 30 Km per hour, predicting amplitude,
frequency and vibration energy input.

(v) From vibration analysis of fibre optic cable without damper, antinode
vibration amplitude and dynamic strain levels at clamped span
extremities as well as antinodes shall be examined and thus lower and
upper dangerous frequency limits between which the Aeolian vibration
levels exceed the specified limits shall be determined.

(vi) From vibration analysis of fibre optic cable with damper(s) installed at
the recommended location, the dynamic strain level at the clamped
span extremities, damper attachment point and the antinodes on the
fibre optic cable shall be determined. In addition to above damper
clamp vibration amplitude and antinodes vibration amplitudes shall
also be examined.

The dynamic strain levels at damper attachment point, clamped span


extremities and antinodes shall not exceed the specified limits. The
damper clamp vibration amplitude shall not be more than that of the
specified fatigue limits.

(c) Fatigue Tests

(i) Test Set Up

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


37

The fatigue tests shall be conducted on a laboratory set up with a minimum


effective span length of 30m. The fibre optic cable shall be tensioned at 25% of
UTS of fibre optic cable and shall not be equipped with protective armour rods at
any point.

Constant tension shall be maintained within the span by means of lever arm
arrangement. After the fibre optic cable has been tensioned, clamps shall be
installed to support the fibre optic cable at both ends and thus influence of
connecting hardware fittings are eliminated from the free span. The clamps shall
not be used for holding the tension on the fibre optic cable. There shall be no
loose parts, such as suspension clamps, U bolts, on the test span supported
between clamps mentioned above. The span shall be equipped with vibration
inducing equipment suitable for producing steady standing vibration. The
inducing equipment shall have facilities for step less speed control as well as step
less amplitude arrangement. Equipment shall be available for measuring the
frequency, cumulative number of cycles and amplitude of vibration at any point
along the span.

(ii) Fatigue Test


The vibration damper shall be installed on the test span with the manufacturer's
specified tightening torque. It shall be ensured that the damper shall be kept
minimum three loops away from the shaker to eliminate stray signals influencing
damper movement.
The damper shall then be vibrated at the highest resonant frequency of each
damper mass. For dampers involving torsional resonant frequencies, tests shall
be done at torsional modes also in addition to the highest resonant frequencies
at vertical modes. The resonance frequency shall be identified as the frequency
at which each damper mass vibrates with the maximum amplitude on itself. The
amplitude of vibration of the damper clamp shall be maintained not less than
±25/f mm where f is the frequency in Hz.
The test shall be conducted for minimum ten million cycles at each resonant
frequency mentioned above. During the test, if resonance shift is observed, the
test frequency shall be tuned to the new resonant frequency.
The clamp slip test as mentioned herein shall be repeated after fatigue tests
without retorquing or adjusting the damper clamp, and the clamp shall withstand
a minimum load equal to 80% of the slip strength for a minimum duration of one
minute.
After the above tests, the damper shall be removed from fibre optic cable and
subjected to dynamic characteristics test. There shall not be any major
deterioration in the characteristics of the damper. The damper then shall be cut
open and inspected. There shall not be any broken, loose, or damaged part.
There shall not be significant deterioration or wear of the damper. The fibre optic
cable under clamp shall also be free from any damage.
For purposes of acceptance, the following criteria shall be applied:
(1) There shall not be any resonant frequency shift before and after the test

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


38

by more than ± 20%


(2) The power dissipation of the damper before and after test at the
individual resonant frequencies do not differ by more than ± 20%
Beside above tests, the type tests listed below in the table shall also be
conducted on Vibration Damper

Sl No. Test Name Test Procedure

Visual examination & Dimensional IEC 61897 Clause 7.1 & 7.2
1
and material verification
2 Clamp Slip test IEC 61897 Clause 7.5

3 Clamp bolt tightening test IEC 61897 Clause 7.7


Attachments of weights to IEC 61897 Clause 7.8
4
messenger cable
Attachment of clamps to IEC 61897 Clause 7.8
5
messenger cable
6 Damper effectiveness evaluation IEC 61897 Clause 7.11.3.2

3.2.5 Type Tests for Splice Enclosures (Joint Box)

Following Type tests shall be demonstrated on the Splice Enclosure(s) (Splice


Enclosure/Box). For certain tests, lengths of the fibre optic cable shall be
installed in the splice box, and the fibres must be spliced and looped in order to
simulate conditions of use. The attenuation of the fibres shall be measured,
during certain tests, by relevant Fibre Optic Test Procedures (EIA/TIA 455 or IEC
60794-1 procedures).

(i) Temperature Cycling Test

FO cable is installed in the splice enclosure and optical fibres spliced and looped.
The box must be subjected to 5 cycles of temperature variations of -40C to +65C
with a dwell time of at least 2 hours on each extreme.

Fibre loop attenuation shall be measured in accordance with EIA 455-20 / IEC
60794-1-C10. The variation in attenuation shall be less than ±0.05dB. The final
humidity level, inside the box, shall not exceed the initial level, at the closing of the
box.

(ii) Humid Heat test

The sealed splice enclosure, with fibres spliced and looped inside, must be
subjected to a temperature of +55C ±2C with a relative humidity rate of between
90% and 95% for 5 days. The attenuation variation of the fibres during the
duration of the test shall be less than ±0.05dB, and the internal humidity rate
measured, less than 2%.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


39

(iii) Water Immersion test

The splice enclosure with optical fibres cable installed and fibres spliced fixed, shall
be immersed in water for 24 hours. No water seepage or moisture shall be
detected in the splice enclosure. The attenuation variation of the fibres after the
test shall be less than ±0.05dB.

(iv) Vibration Test

The splice enclosure, with fibres united inside, shall be subjected to vibrations on
two axes with a frequency scanning of 5 to 50 Hz. The amplitude of the vibrations
shall be constant at 0.450mm, peak to peak, for 2 hours, for each of the vibrations'
axes. The variation in attenuation, of the fibres, shall be less than ±0.05dB. The
splice enclosure shall be examined for any defects or deformation. There shall be no
loosening or visible damage of the FO cable at the entry point.

(v) Bending and Torsion test

The splice enclosure, with fibres spliced inside, shall be firmly held in place and be
subjected to the following sequence of mechanical stresses on the cable:

a) 3 torsion cycles of ±180 shall be exercised on the cable. Each cycle shall be
less than one minute.

b) 3 flexure cycles of the cable, of ±180 with one cycle less than one minute.

The variation in the attenuation, of the fibres, shall be less than ±0.05dB. The
cables connection ring shall remain securely fixed to the box with the
connection maintained firmly. No defects/fissures shall be noted on the joint
ring or on the splice enclosure

(vi) Tensile test

The splice enclosure with cable fixed to the boxes shall be subjected to a minimum
tension of 448 N for a period of two minutes. No fissure shall be noted in the
connections or on the box.

(vii) Drop Test

With 2 lengths of 11 metres of cable fixed to the box, it shall be dropped five times
from a height of 10 metres. There shall be no fissure, at all, of the box, and the
connections shall remain tight. The test surface shall be carried out in accordance
with IEC 60068-2-32.

3.2.6 Type Tests for Fibre Optic Approach Cable

The type tests to be conducted on the Fibre Optic Approach cable are listed in
table(I-f):Type Tests for Fibre Optic Approach Cable. Unless specified otherwise in
the technical specifications or the referenced standards, the optical attenuation of

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


40

the specimen, measured during or after the test as applicable, shall not increase by
more than 0.05 dB/Km.

Table(I-f)::
Type Tests Fibre Optic Approach Cable
S.NO. Test Name Test Procedure
1 Water Ingress Test (IEC 60794-1-F5 /
EIA 455-82B) Test duration : 24 hours
2 Seepage of filling (EIA 455-81A)
compound Preconditioning : 72 hours,
Test duration : 24 hours.
3 Crush Test (IEC 60794-1-E3/ EIA 455-41)
4 Impact Test (IEC-60794-1-E4/ EIA 455-25A)
5 Stress strain Test (EIA 455-33A)
6 Cable Cut-off (EIA 455-170)
wavelength Test
7 Temperature (IEC60794-1-F1/EIA-455-3A) – 2 cycles
Cycling Test
-End Of Table-

3.2.6.1 Impact Test


The Impact test shall be carried out in accordance with IEC:60794-1-E4. Five
separate impacts of 2.0 kg shall be applied at different locations. The radius of the
intermediate piece shall be the reel drum radius ± 10%. A permanent or temporary
increase in optical attenuation value greater than 0.05 dB/km shall constitute
failure.
3.2.7 Factory Acceptance Tests
Factory acceptance tests shall be conducted on randomly selected final assemblies
of all equipment/material to be supplied. Factory acceptance testing shall be carried
out on OPGW Cable and associated hardware & fittings, Approach Cable and
associated hardware fitting , Joint Box and all other items for which price has been
identified separately in the Bid Price Schedules.
Material shall not be shipped to the MPPTCL until required factory tests are
completed satisfactorily, all variances are resolved, full test documentation has
been delivered to the MPPTCL, and the MPPTCL has issued CIP Clearance/Interim
Inspection Report. Successful completion of the factory tests and the MPPTCL
approval to ship, shall in no way constitute final acceptance of the system or any
portion thereof. These tests shall be carried out in the presence of the MPPTCL's
authorised representatives unless waiver for witnessing by MPPTCL’s
representatives is intimated to the contractor.
Factory acceptance tests shall not proceed without the prior delivery to and
approval of all test documentation by the MPPTCL.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


41

The factory acceptance test shall demonstrate the technical characteristics of the
equipment in relation to this specifications and approved drawings and documents.
List of factory acceptance tests for Fibre Optic Transmission system, Termination
Equipment Sub-system , NMS are given in specified Tables in this section. This list
of factory acceptance tests shall be supplemented by the Contractor's standard FAT
testing program. The factory acceptance tests for the other items shall be proposed
by the Contractor in accordance with technical specifications and Contractor's
(including Sub-Contractor's / supplier's) standard FAT testing program. In general
the FAT for other items shall include at least: Physical verification, demonstration of
technical characteristics, various operational modes, functional interfaces, alarms
and diagnostics etc.
For Test equipment & clock, FAT shall include supply of proper calibration
certificates, demonstration of satisfactory performance, evidence of correct
equipment configuration and manufacturer’s final inspection certificate/ report.
3.2.7.1 Sampling for FAT
From each batch of equipment presented by the Contractor for Factory acceptance
testing, the MPPTCL shall select random sample(s) to be tested for acceptance.
Unless otherwise agreed, all required FAT tests in the approved FAT procedures,
shall be performed on all samples. The Sampling rate for the Factory acceptance
tests shall be minimum 10% of the batch size (minimum 1) for all items. The
physical verification shall be carried out on 100% of the offered quantities as per
the approved FAT procedure. In case any of the selected samples fail, the failed
sample is rejected and additional 20% samples shall be selected randomly and
tested. In case any sample from the additional 20% also fails the entire batch may
be rejected. In case a number of equipments are required for demonstration of the
performance of any equipment during FAT, the sample size shall be taken as that
number of equipments which are necessary to demonstrate the performance,
irrespective of the percentage.
For the OPGW cable hardware fittings & accessories, the minimum sampling rate,
and batch acceptance criteria shall be as defined in IS 2486.
The Sampling rate for the Factory acceptance tests shall be 10% of the batch size
(minimum 2) for FO cable drums, FODPs, Joint box and other similar items.
Since FAT testing provides a measure of assurance that the Quality Control
objectives are being met during all phases of production, the MPPTCL reserves the
right to require the Contractor to investigate and report on the cause of FAT failures
and to suspend further testing/ approvals until such a report is made and remedial
actions taken, as applicable.
3.2.7.2 Factory Acceptance Tests on Optical Fibre to be supplied with
OPGW
The factory acceptance tests listed in table below are applicable for the Optical
fibres to be supplied. The listed tests follow testing requirements set forth in IEEE
standard 1138, 1994 section 4.2.2.1 and section 5.2.2.1. The referenced sections
specify the detailed test description. The acceptance norm shall be as specified in
the above mentioned IEEE standards unless specified otherwise in the technical

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


42

specifications.
Table (I-g):
Factory Acceptance Tests for Optical Fibres: Optical Tests

S. No. Test Name Acceptance Criteria Test procedure


1 Attenuation Coefficient TS Vol II ,Table 2-1(a) EIA/TIA 455- 78A
2 Point Discontinuities of TS Vol II, Section EIA/TIA 455-59
attenuation 2.1.1.2
3 Attenuation at Water Peak TS Vol II ,Table 2-1(a) EIA/TIA 455- 78A
4 Chromatic Dispersion EIA/TIA 455-
168A/169A/175A
5 Core – Clad Concentricity EIA/TIA 455-/176
Error
6 Cladding diameter EIA/TIA 455-176

7 Fibre Tensile Proof Testing EIA/TIA 455-31B


-End of table-

The test report for the above tests for the fibers carried out by the Fiber
Manufacturer and used in the OPGW cables shall be shown to the inspector during
OPGW cable FAT and shall be submitted along with the OPGW cable FAT report.

3.2.7.3 Factory Acceptance Test on OPGW Cable

The factory acceptance tests for OPGW cable specified below in Table follow the
requirements set forth in IEEE standard 1138 / IEC 60794. The FAT shall be carried
out on 10% of offered drums in each lot as specified in technical specifications and
the optical tests shall be carried out in all fibres of the selected sample drums. The
Rated Tensile Strength test shall be carried out on one sample in each lot.

Table (I-h):
Factory Acceptance Tests on OPGW
Applicable standard: IEEE 1138 / IEC 60794

S. Factory Acceptance Test on Manufactured OPGW


No.

1 Attenuation Co-efficient at 1310 nm and 1550 nm

2 Point discontinuities of attenuation

3 Visual Material verification and dimensional checks as per approved

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


43

Table (I-h):
Factory Acceptance Tests on OPGW
Applicable standard: IEEE 1138 / IEC 60794

S. Factory Acceptance Test on Manufactured OPGW


No.
DRS/Drawings

4 Rated Tensile Strength

5 Lay Length Measurements

3.2.7.4 Factory Acceptance Test on OPGW Fittings

The factory acceptance tests for OPGW Fittings as specified below in Table 7-16.
The sampling plan shall be as per relevant standard:

Table ((I-i):

Factory Acceptance Tests On OPGW Fittings

S. Factory Acceptance Test


No.
Suspension Assembly
1 UTS/Mechanical Strength of the assembly
2 Clamp Slip Test
3 Visual Material verification and dimensional checks as per approved
DRS/Drawings
4 Mechanical strength of each component
5 Galvanising test
Tension Assembly
6 Clamp Slip Strength test
7 Visual Material verification and dimensional checks as per approved
DRS/Drawings
8 Mechanical strength of each component
9 Galvanising Test
Vibration Damper
10 Galvanising test on damper, masses and messenger wires

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


44

11 Damper response (resonant frequencies)


12 Clamp Slip test
13 Strength of messenger wires
14 Attachments of weights to messenger cable
15 Attachments of clamps to messenger cable
16 Clamp bolt tightening test
17 Clamp bolt torque test
18 Dynamic characteristic test.
19 Visual Material verification and dimensional checks as per approved
DRS/Drawings
Structure Mounting Clamp
20 Clamp fit test
21 Clamp Strength test
Visual Material verification and dimensional checks as per approved
22
DRS/Drawings
End of Table

3.2.7.5 Factory Acceptance Test on Approach Cable

The factory acceptance tests for Approach Cable specified below in Table-(I-j):

Table(I-j):
Factory Acceptance Tests On Approach Cable
S. Factory Acceptance Test
No.
1 Attenuation Co-efficient at 1310 nm and 1550 nm
2 Point discontinuities of attenuation
3 Visual Material verification and dimensional checks as per
approved DRS/Drawings

3.2.7.6 Factory Acceptance Test on Splice Enclosure (Joint Box) /FODP

The factory acceptance tests for Splice Enclosures/FODP as specified below in


Table(I-k)

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


45

Table (I-k)

Factory Acceptance Tests on Splice Enclosures (Joint Box)/FODP

S. Factory Acceptance Test


No.

1 Visual check of Quantities and Specific Component Number for each


component of Splice Enclosure/FODP and dimensional checks against
the approved drawings.

4. Site Acceptance Tests

The Contractor shall be responsible for the submission of all equipment & test
equipment supplied in this contract for site tests and inspection as required by the
MPPTCL. All equipment shall be tested on site under the conditions in which it will
normally operate.

The tests shall be exhaustive and shall demonstrate that the overall performance of
the contract works satisfies every requirement specified. At a minimum Site
Acceptance Testing requirement for FO cable.

During the course of installation, the MPPTCL shall have full access for inspection
and verification of the progress of the work and for checking workmanship and
accuracy, as may be required. On completion of the work prior to commissioning,
all equipment shall be tested to the satisfaction of the MPPTCL to demonstrate that
it is entirely suitable for commercial operation.

4.1 Minimum Site Acceptance Testing Requirement for FO Cabling

Prior to installation, every spooled fibre optic cable segment shall be tested for
compliance with the Pre-shipment data previously received from the manufacturer.
This requirement will preclude the installation of out of specification cable segments
that may have been damaged during shipment.

4.1.1 Phases of Site Acceptance Testing

SAT shall be carried out link by link from FODP to FODP. SAT may be performed in
parts in case of long links.

The tests, checks, adjustments etc conducted by the Contractor prior to offering the
equipment for SAT shall be called Pre-SAT activities. The Pre-SAT activities shall be
described in the installation manuals and Field Quality Plan documents.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


46

Sag and tension of OPGW shall generally be as per approved sag-tension chart and
during installation, sag and tension of OPGW shall be documented. Upon completion
of a continuous cable path, all fibres within the cable path shall be demonstrated for
acceptance of the cable path. Fibre Optic cable site testing minimum requirements
are provided in Table (I-l) through (I-n) below:

Table(I-l)
Fibre Optic Cable Pre-Installation Testing
Item: Description:
1. Physical Inspection of the cable assembly for damage
2. Optical fibre continuity and fibre attenuation with OTDR at 1550 nm
3. Fibre Optic Cable length measurement using OTDR

Table (I-m)
Fibre Optic Cable Splicing Testing
Item: Description:

1. Per splice bi-directional average attenuation with OTDR


2. Physical inspection of splice box/enclosure for proper fibre / cable
routing techniques
3. Physical inspection of sealing techniques, weatherproofing, etc.

Table (I-n)

Fibre Optic Cable Commissioning Testing

Item: Description:

End to End (FODP to FODP) bi-directional average attenuation of


1. each fibre at 1310 nm and 1550 nm by OTDR.
End to End (FODP to FODP) bi-directional average attenuation of
2. each fibre at 1310 nm and 1550 nm by Power meter.
3. Bi-directional average splice loss by OTDR of each splice as well as
for all splices in the link (including at FODP also).
Proper termination and labelling of fibres & fibre optic cables at
4. FODP as per approved labelling plan.

-End of Table-

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


47

5. QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME

5.1 To ensure that the equipment and services under the scope of this
Contract, whether manufactured or performed within the Contractor’s Works
or at his Sub-Contractor’s premises or at the MPPTCL’s site or at any other
place of Work as applicable, are in accordance with the specifications, the
Contractor shall ensure suitable quality assurance programme to control
such activities at all points necessary. A quality assurance programme of
the Contractor shall be in line with ISO requirements & shall generally cover
the following :

a) The organisation structure for the management and implementation


of the proposed quality assurance programme.

b) System for Document and Data Control.

c) Qualification and Experience data of Bidder’s key personnel.

d) The procedure for purchases of materials, parts, components and


selection of sub-Contractor’s services including vendor analysis, source
inspection, incoming raw material inspection, verification of material
purchases etc.

e) System for shop manufacturing and site erection controls including


process controls, fabrication and assembly control.

f) System for Control of non-conforming products including deviation


dispositioning, if any and system for corrective and preventive actions
based on the feedback received from the Customers and also
internally documented system for Customer complaints.

g) Inspection and test procedure both for manufacture and field activities.

h) System for Control of calibration of testing and measuring equipment


and the indication of calibration status on the instruments.

i) System for indication and appraisal of inspection status.

j) System of Internal Quality Audits, Management review and initiation of


corrective and Preventive actions based on the above.

k) System for authorising release of manufactured product to the


MPPTCL.

l) System for maintenance of records.

m) System for handling, storage and delivery.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


48

n) A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control measures and
procedure adopted for controlling the quality characteristics relevant to
each item of equipment furnished and /or service rendered.

o) System for various field activities i.e. unloading, receipt at site, proper
storage, erection, testing and commissioning of various equipment and
maintenance of records. In this regard, the MPPTCL has already
prepared Standard Field Quality Plan for transmission line/substation
equipments as applicable, Civil/erection Works which is required to be
followed for associated works.

The MPPTCL or his duly authorised representative reserves


the right to carry out quality audit and quality surveillance of the
system and procedure of the Contractor/his vendor’s quality
management and control activities.

5.2 Quality Assurance Documents

The Contractor shall ensure availability of the following Quality Assurance


Documents:

i) All Non-Destructive Examination procedures, stress relief and weld


repair procedure actually used during fabrication, and reports including
radiography interpretation reports.
ii) Welder and welding operator qualification certificates.
iii) Welder’s identification list, welding operator’s qualification procedure
and welding identification symbols.
iv) Raw Material test reports on components as specified by the
specification and in the quality plan.
v) The Manufacturing Quality Plan(MQP) indicating Customer Inspection
Points (CIPs) at various stages of manufacturing and methods used
to verify that the inspection and testing points in the quality plan
were performed satisfactorily.
vi) Factory test results for testing required as per applicable quality
plan/technical specifications/GTP/Drawings etc.
vii) Stress relief time temperature charts/oil impregnation time
temperature charts, wherever applicable.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


49

Annexure-II

MQP & INSPECTION LEVEL REQUIREMENT

S.No Item/Equipment Requirement of


MQP/ITP/FAT
1 Test Equipment No
2 FO Cable Yes
3 OPGW & H/W Yes
4 Hardware Fitting for Fiber optic approach No
cable FODP including pigtail

Note:
* MICC for test and measuring equipment shall be issued only after
actual verification/demonstration of satisfactory performance at site.
** Though level-2 items, CIP can be issued also on review of TCs and
visual inspection of these items.

MPPTCL/Tech Specs OPGW/ Vol.-V/Part-2


50

Appendix - II

GUIDELINES FOR OPGW CABLE LIVE-LINE


INSTALLATION
51

GUIDELINES FOR OPGW CABLE LIVE-LINE INSTALLATION

1. General

Installation procedure for OPGW is basically similar to that for conventional


overhead ground wires in overhead transmission line construction, however
particular care required to be taken for protection of optical fibers in OPGW
cable from damage by handling the same properly during transportation ,
unloading and installation at site. Live line installation to be carried out
using traction machines and support rollers using experienced installation
team comprising of minimum 30-35 persons. The installation team shall
have one team leader/crew in-charge along with 15 skilled and 14 unskilled
persons minimum in one installation crew.

List of Tools and Plants to be used are as per enclosed Annexure-(II-a).

Following aspects are to be kept in mind before taking up live-line


installation:

a) Condition of existing ground wire for its suitability for live-line OPGW
installation.

b) Tools and Plant suitability.

c) Working conditions, specially following:

 Strong winds more than 7 m/sec


 Rain
 Foggy
 Lightening

2. Safety measures

All site workers must follow the Electricity Rules and MPPTCL specified
safety procedures. They must use safety belts, safety shoe, safety helmet
and other safety items required.

Assign foremen/Crew In-charge for each erection crew for enforcing


installation guidelines. It may be ensured that only authorized person is
climbing the tower during live-line installation of OPGW. Fix the warning
red flag on the tower, in order to keep the workers from encroaching into
unsafe zones.
52

2.1 Permission to Work (PTW) :

Permit to work to be obtained by the representative of installation agency


from concerned sub-station staff in coordination with MPPTCL prior to
commencement of installation and the same is to be returned after
completion of the work in all respect within the specified time duly following
the PTW conditions.

2.2 Preparedness to tackle untoward incidents:

a) Safety Engineer has to make sure the availability of First Aid Box with
each team.

b) Maintain a record of the details of list of all nearby hospitals/clinics in


each area, with contact details and Emergency contact nos. of
Ambulances.

c) In case of any untoward situation, Safety engineer/crew incharge must


act fast and provide the necessary first aid to the affected person(s).
Ambulance to be arranged immediately from the nearby area and
coordinate with hospital for immediate medical assistance as required.

2.3 Marking of Zones during OPGW Stringing:

It is very essential for the installation agency to be aware of safe zones of


the Tower while carrying out live-line installation. Generally crew members
identified for preparation work on the ground, will not work on the tower
and will remain within hazard-free zone.

The pictorial view of the working zone and limitation of the restricted zone
are shown below for your convenience.

Working Area

MPPTCL/Te
53

Working Area

3. Grounding

Grounding of the following before starting work at site is required to be


ensured. Grounding devices include the following:

3.1 Equipment Grounding:

Equipment like OPGW and Existing Ground wire (GW), Pulley Blocks are
connected with individual copper cable attached to the tower (with copper
rod installed on the ground) or to the main grid if grounding system exists.
Grounding clamp shall be cleaned well and ensure proper contact.
54

3.2 Running Ground:

Running ground shall be installed on the OPGW at drum side during OPGW
stringing time and at the Winch side on the existing GW during
dismantling time for the whole stringing operation to avoid any electrical
charges of induction from the line.

3.3 Pulley Block Grounding:

For each tower grounding type pulley block must be used.

Grounding cable must be connected to the ground source first then to the
object that needed to be grounded.

When removing grounds, the ground must be removed from the grounded
objects first and then remove the grounding clamp from the ground
source.
55

In case of any problems during the installation work, the person in charge
of the section will immediately contact sub-station in charge of the line
and MPPTCL immediately for required support.

4. Live-line Installation Process

4.1 Installation plan:

Following measures are to be taken in advance for smooth completion of


the installation.

 PTW availability and coordination with MPPTCL


 Erection crew mobilization along with T&Ps
 Safety aspects
 Field quality aspects
 Transportation arrangement

4.2 Materials handling:

Check the material with respect to the approved documentation. All


materials shall be visually examined for any physical damage. Any
material, which is not as per documentation or is damaged, shall not be
used.

OPGW Drums checks:

 Packing condition
 Packing list (Object, Type, Length, OPGW Weight, Drum No. etc)
 Attenuation results of OPGW

Hardware Fittings Checks:

 Bolts, Nuts Pitch


 Type & Quantity

Handling of OPGW:

OPGW contains optical fibers which are very delicate and to be handled
with due care. For the safety of optical fibers, it is very important to avoid
the bending at sharp angle. Manufacturer guidelines are to be followed
strictly while handling the same.
56

In order to avoid undue tension on OPGW, it is not recommended to


payoff OPGW together with phase conductors or other wires tied in
parallel. The tension during stringing works should be well managed within
permissible limits.

Adequate length of OPGW shall be ensured as loop at each joint location


after stringing so that it is possible to bring OPGW up to the ground level
for carrying out jointing work.

5. Clearance Checking

5.1 Check the clearance between existing ground-wire and live conductor
before Stringing. Check the clearance between OPGW and live conductor.
57

6. OPGW Stringing
 Hang the pulley blocks on one of the earth wire peaks for the whole
section (Section is a consecutive group of towers needed to support
the installation of scheduled length of OPGW Drum)

 Set the Traction machine on the existing ground wire.


 Set the support rollers on the existing ground wire where the OPGW
is to be installed.
 Connect the Setting Rope and Pulling Rope to the Traction Machine.
 Pull the support rollers, Setting Rope and Pulling Rope with the use of
Traction Machine. Support rollers should be hanged at an interval of
20 meters. (A mark with 20m interval marked on setting rope.
 Connect the OPGW to the Pulling Rope with Stringing Clamp.
 Pull the Pulling Rope with the use of winch machine to pay out the
OPGW.
 Set the Come-along and Lever Block to the existing ground wire.
 Release the tension of existing ground wire. At the same time, with a
fixed come-along and Lever Block, give more tension to the OPGW.
58

 Position of OPGW and existing ground wire will interchange with


above action. The OPGW will be in upper position and existing
ground wire in lower position in support rollers.
 With this OPGW paying for a section gets completed.

7. Dismantling process
7.1 Existing ground wire:
 Connect the existing ground wire with the Pulling Rope.
 Pull the Pulling Rope with winch to dismantle the ground wire.
59

7.2 Hanging Pulley Block, Setting Rope and Pulling Rope:

 Set the Breaking Machine on the OPGW of the span required for
dismantling.
 Connect the Pulling Rope and Setting Rope to the Braking Machine.
 Pull the Setting Rope and Pulling Rope to dismantle.

 Collect and dismantle the hanging pulley blocks upon reaching the
succeeding tower.

8. OPGW sagging

 Use the pre-calculated Sag & Tension Table as sag reference.

 Avoid fixing the sag if the wind is strong.

8.1 Sagging:

1) Methods and procedures for sagging of OPGW are the same as those of
normal overhead ground wire.

2) After stringing the OPGW shall be sagged using information furnished


on the sag and tension chart. The sag of the OPGW should not exceed the
existing ground-wire sag.
60

3) Sagging thermometers shall be used to determine accurate


temperature and OPGW sag of each sag section. Sagging thermometer
shall be used sufficiently prior to the actual sagging operation to represent
the temperature of the OPGW.

4) OPGW tension between each sag section shall be equalized and this
shall be determined by the vertical position of the suspension clamps on
the last clipped structure of the preceding sag section.

5) For pulling the OPGW with tension, the device of come-along is to be


recommended.

6) Personnel should be specifically deployed for keeping watch on sag at a


different section of the line during live line stringing.

7) Waterproof caps shall be fixed at both ends of the OPGW cable after
installation.

9. OPGW Clamping

9.1 Make sure to install and tighten the bolt of clamp properly.

9.2 Tightening must be made sequentially from the support point.


61
62

10. OPGW down Leading

10.1 Make sure to clip the OPGW with down lead clamp to the tower in a
careful manner.

10.2 Make sure to tighten the bolt of down-lead clamp properly.

10.3 Install the down-lead clamp at appropriate interval.


63

Appendix - III

GUIDELINES FOR OPGW CABLE OFF -LINE


INSTALLATION
64

GUIDELINES FOR OPGW CABLE OFF-LINE INSTALLATION

1. General

Installation procedure for OPGW is basically similar to that for conventional


overhead ground wires in overhead transmission line construction, however
particular care required to be taken for protection of optical fibers in OPGW
cable from damage by handling the same properly during transportation ,
unloading and installation at site.Off line installation to be carried out using
power operated winch machines and pulley blocks on each tower using
experienced installation team comprising of minimum 25 persons. The
installation team shall have one team leader/crew in-charge along with 15
skilled and 10 unskilled persons minimum in one installation crew.

Following aspects are to be kept in mind before taking up live-line


installation:

a) Tools and Plant suitability

b) Working conditions, specially following:

 Strong winds more than 7 m/sec

 Rain or snow

 Foggy

 Lightening

2. Safety measures

All site workers must follow the Electricity Rules and MPPTCL specified
safety procedures. They must use safety belts, safety shoe, safety helmet
and other safety items required.

Assign foremen/Crew In-charge for each erection crew for enforcing


installation guidelines. It may be ensured that only authorized person is
climbing the tower during live-line installation of OPGW. Fix the warning
red flag on the tower, in order to keep the workers from encroaching into
unsafe zones.
65

2.1 Permission to Work (PTW) :

Permit to work to be obtained by the representative of installation agency


from concerned sub-station staff in coordination with MPPTCL project
manager prior to commencement of installation in case of power line
crossings and the same is to be returned after completion of the work in
all respect within the specified time duly following the PTW conditions.

2.2 Preparedness to tackle untoward incidents:

a) Safety Engineer has to make sure the availability of First Aid Box with
each team.

b) Maintain a record of the details of list of all nearby hospitals/clinics in


each area, with contact details and Emergency contact nos. of
Ambulances.

c) In case of any untoward situation, Safety engineer/crew in charge


must act fast and provide the necessary first aid to the affected
person(s). Ambulance to be arranged immediately from the nearby
area and coordinate with hospital for immediate medical assistance as
required.

3. Off-line Installation Process

3.1 Installation plan:

Following measures are to be taken in advance for smooth completion of


the installation.

 Coordination with MPPTCL project manager


 Erection crew mobilization along with T&Ps
 Safety aspects
 Field quality aspects
 Transportation arrangement

3.2 Materials handling:

Check the material with respect to the approved documentation. All


materials shall be visually examined for any physical damage. Any
material, which is not as per documentation or is damaged, shall not be
used.
66

OPGW Drums checks:

 Packing condition
 Packing list (Object, Type, Length, OPGW Weight, Drum No. etc)
 Attenuation results of OPGW

Hardware Fittings Checks:

 Bolts, Nuts Pitch


 Type & Quantity

Handling of OPGW:

OPGW contains optical fibers which are very delicate and to be handled
with due care. For the safety of optical fibers, it is very important to avoid
the bending at sharp angle. Manufacturer guidelines are to be followed
strictly while handling the same.

In order to avoid undue tension on OPGW, it is not recommended to


payoff OPGW together with phase conductors or other wires tied in
parallel. The tension during stringing works should be well managed within
permissible limits.

Adequate length of OPGW shall be ensured as loop at each joint location


after stringing so that it is possible to bring OPGW up to the ground level
for carrying out jointing work.

4. OPGW Stringing

 Hang the pulley blocks on one of the earth wire peaks for the whole
section (Section is a consecutive group of towers needed to support the
installation of scheduled length of OPGW Drum)

 Carry out paying of pilot wire for entire section and connect the same
with OPGW on drum side and winch machine on other side suitably.

 Pull the Pilot Wire with the use of winch machine to pay out the OPGW.

 Maintain proper tension while pulling OPGW so as to avoid damage to


fibers inside the OPGW. In no case pulling tension should exceed 15 %
of UTS of OPGW.

 Set the Come-along and Lever Block to the OPGW. With this OPGW
paying for a section gets completed.
67

5. OPGW sagging

 Use the pre-calculated Sag & Tension Table as sag reference.

 Avoid fixing the sag if the wind is strong.

5.1 Sagging

1) Methods and procedures for sagging of OPGW are the same as those
of normal overhead ground wire.

2) After stringing the OPGW shall be sagged using information furnished


on the sag and tension chart. The sag of the OPGW should not exceed
the existing ground-wire sag.

3) Sagging thermometers shall be used to determine accurate


temperature and OPGW sag of each sag section. Sagging thermometer
shall be used sufficiently prior to the actual sagging operation to
represent the temperature of the OPGW.

4) OPGW tension between each sag section shall be equalized and this
shall be determined by the vertical position of the suspension clamps
on the last clipped structure of the preceding sag section.

5) For pulling the OPGW with tension, the device of come-along is to be


recommended.

6) Personnel should be specifically deployed for keeping watch on sag at


a different section of the line during stringing.

7) Waterproof caps shall be fixed at both ends of the OPGW cable after
installation.
68

6. OPGW Clamping

6.1 Make sure to install and tighten the bolt of clamp properly.

6.2 Tightening must be made sequentially from the support point.


69

7. OPGW down Leading

7.1 Make sure to clip the OPGW with down lead clamp to the tower in a
careful manner.
7.2 Make sure to tighten the bolt of down-lead clamp properly.
7.3 Install the down-lead clamp at appropriate interval .
70

Appendix -IV

Guidelines for Splicing of Fibre Optic Cable


71

1. General

OPGW based Fibre Optic network being established by Power Utilities for
catering data & voice communication requirements. OPGW is being supplied
in number of drums for a link and required splicing for completing of a fibre
optic link. Generally fusion method is being used for splicing of fibres in cable.
For carrying out splicing work, experienced personnel is essential for handling
splicing kit and necessary instruments such as OTDR etc.

a) Jointing of OPGW is usually carried out on the ground. For ease of jointing
with accuracy, adequate space (with tent) to be ensured on the ground for
jointer and equipment. This floor space should be protected against the
heavy wind, strong sunshine, high temperature, rain and dusty
atmosphere.

b) Attention must be paid so as not to damage OPGW including its optical


components during handling, cutting, un-stranding of component wires
and jointing.

c) Attenuation of optical fibers to be measured just before splicing and after


splicing.

c) Typical organization chart for jointing work is given below:

A. Jointing In charge -1

A.1 For Testing :

(i) Lineman – 1
(ii) Jointer & Tester – 1
(iii) Unskilled labor -1

A.2 For Jointing :

(i) Lineman- 1
(ii) Jointer & Tester – 1
(iii) Unskilled labor -1

2. Jointing of optical fibre

Optical fibre are joined by using Fusion splicing. It is the process of fusing or
welding two fibers together usually by an electric arc. Fusion splicing is the
most widely used method of splicing as it provides for the lowest loss and
least reflectance, as well as providing the strongest and most reliable joint
between two fibers.
72

3. Flowchart of jointing procedure.

Process flow chart of OPGW jointing works is summarized briefly, as below:


Start

Preparation of material, tools, and

Cutting and treatment of OPGW ends.

Removing tube over optical fiber units.

Taking out of optical units.

Inspection
(Using OTDR) Inspect fibers
If no good

Splicing of optical

Reinforcing of spliced parts.


Re-splicing of optical Fiber
Treatment of surplus length of optical

Measurement of splicing loss.

If no good
Sealing and closing of the joint box

Installation of the joint box

End
73

Jointing works

a) Preparation of materials, tools and equipment

It may be ensured that all the materials, tools and equipment listed in the
Table-1 are available. The Table-1 shows tentative list of required tools &
material.

b) Cutting and treatment of OPGW ends

 Coiled OPGW to be brought down and cut-off unnecessary lengths of the


OPGW with a cable cutter.

 Put marks on OPGW at positions where OPGW is to be fixed to the glands of


the joint box. Carryout mounting of OPGW at a position about 70mm below
the cutting mark with a metallic string to prevent the stranded wires from
becoming loose after cutting off the OPGW.

70mm
930mm

Central Tube(Al/Steel)

Wires
Metallic String

 Notch the Strand wires of the OPGW with a hacksaw to the depth of 1/3 or
1/2 of the Strand wire diameter. In this case, take care not to damage the
inside Central Tube (AL/Steel) of the OPGW.

 Loose the Strand wires from the OPGW ends one by one and snap them off at
the notched position.

 Cut the Central Tube (AL/Steel).

90mm
840mm

CentralTube(Al/Steel)

Strands
Metallic String Optical Unit
74

Table-1: Tools & Material

Description Quantity Purpose

Stabilized light source 1 Measure lose

Optical power meter 1 Measure lose

Dummy fiber 1 Measure lose

Fusion splicer 1 Splicing fiber

Fiber cutter 2 Cutting fiber

Jacket Stripper 2 Remove fiber jacket

Washing Agent 2 Clean Fiber

Ethyl Alchohol 2 Cleaning Fiber

Gauze 1 Set Cleaning fiber

Dust Remove 1 Cleaning Splicer

Cable Cutter 1 Cutting OPGW

Hacksaw 1 Cutting AW Wire

Pipe Cutter 1 Cutting AL Tube

Knife 1

Screw Driver Set(+,-) 1

Pliers 2

Light Stand 1 Lighting

Hexagon wrench 1

Portable Telephone Set 2

Engine Generator(If 1
Power Supply
need)
OTDR 1

Electric reel 1

Optical Telephone Set 2

1
Electric Cord
75

c) Fixing OPGW in the Passcable(see the Figure 4. for main assembling


particulars)

 Insert OPGW in the passcable until OPGW touch the internal clamping or until
the Central Tube (AL/Steel) is outside from the passcable of about 90 mm.

 Lock the moving clamping with torque force of 12 NM, like a Figure 5.

O-Ring Separator

Preroom
Passcable
Gear

Moving Clamp

Metallic String

Fig. 4

Moving Clamp

Metallic String Passcable

Fig. 5
76

d) Application of thermo-shrinkable tube

 Cover the Central Tube (AL/Steel) with aluminium sheet and put the thermo-
shrinkable tube with heating gun or lamp, like a Figure 6.

Thermo-shrinkable Tube

Fig. 6

e) Application of the preroom

 Lock the passcable to the preroom.

 Screw down the preroom to the passcable.

Preroom

Fig. 7

f) Fixing of the preroom

 Put the preroom in the hole of the splice enclosure base.

 Give attention that the O-ring is in the right position and fix with the torque
force of 50 NM
77

g) Taking out of optical units

 Remove the PBT tube of optical units leaving a suitable distance(around 1m)
from the edge of the AL tube.

 Make each optical unit into loops of about 5 to 10 cm diameter, and stick
these optical unit loops at a suitable position on the joint box with plastic
adhesive tape in order to ensure that the optical unit is not damaged during
splicing work.

h) Splicing of optical fibers.

 Cleave length

Bare fiber length should be 16mm ±5 after cleaving.

 Remove the fiber coating. Clean the fiber and then cleave the bare fiber to
the predetermined length. Slip a protection sleeve over one of the two fibers
for reinforcement after splicing. Set the prepared fiber in the v grooves as
shown in the figure below.

 Clamp the prepared fiber exactly by pushing the clamp lever. After clamping
the right and left fibers, close the hood. Make sure that the prepared fiber is
not trapped by the hood, and not caught by any other part of the machine.
78

 Evaluate the splice.

The evaluation of the splicing should be done by the splicing loss and the
external appearance at the splice point.

(1) Splicing having the following appearance shall be rejected.


Be sure to remove this type of
Bubble splice, because the splice loss can
be extremely high.
Caused by
1. Dust on fiber end
2. Condensing
3. Bad cleaving
4. Pre-fusion time is too short.
5. Arc power is too strong.

Thick black line

In this case, make re-fusion by


ARC Switch, and check it
Black shadow again.(*)

(*) In the case where fluorine doped fiber is splicer, a black line will always
appear at the splicing point, but does not cause any damage to the
characteristics of the optical transmission.

(2) The following splices are acceptable, even if the external appearance at
the splice point does not look good.
79

It is all right if the estimated splice loss is


White line within the specified value.
This is due to optical causes upon
observation, and there is no effect on the
splice characteristics.

Blurred thin line


Same as above

Because of core alignment, this is possible


for fiber with large core eccentricity.

This appearance is due to differences in


fiber diameter.
When the spliced portion is required to be observed in detail, “FIELD
CHANGE” and “FOCUS UP” and “FOCUS DOWN” SW on top mounted console
panel are useful.

i) Reinforcing of spliced parts.

(I) Open the heater cover, the left fiber clamp and right fiber clamp

(II) Open the hood, take out the spliced portion, close the hood, and press
the “RESET” SW.
80

(III) Slide fiber protection sleeve over the spliced portion.

Fig. 5

Note
 Make sure fiber coating is clean.
 Put the sleeve over the splice as shown in Fig. 5.
 Don’t twist the fiber.
 Protection sleeve should be straight.
(IV) Apply a slight tension and place the splice in the heater, close the right
hand heater clamp by pressing down with the right hand fiber.

(V) Next, close the left hand heater clamp while pulling the fiber slightly,
and close the heater cover.

Note
 Fiber should be straight.
 Make sure that there is no dust, or jelly in the protection sleeve.
(VI) Press the “HEATER SET” SW, and the “working” indicator will light up.
81

Fig. 5

(VII) After the tensile proof test (a few seconds), it will take a few minutes
until the fiber protection sleeve is shrunk. A buzzer will indicate the
finishing of shrinking the sleeve.

If the fiber breaks, or the fiber is loosely clamped or slips during the
tensile proof test, the buzzer will beep intermittently. Correct the
condition before proceeding.

Note 1

 Both the splicer and heater can be operated simultaneously.

Note 2

 The tensile proof strength can be set from 50 to 500 grams. This value
is set to 200 grams normally.

(VIII) Open the heater cover and clamps.

Take out the protected splice carefully while pulling the fiber slightly.

Cool the protection sleeve for a few minutes, as it is very hot just after
reinforcement.

(IX) Check the appearance of the reinforced portion.

Bad protection examples

 Short coverage of coated fiber.

 Bubble on bare fiber.


82

 Bending bare fiber

Bending

Good protection examples

 Unshrink sleeve end

 Bubble on coated fiber

6. Treatment of surplus length optical fibers.

 Arrangement of loose tube


83

The loose tube should be dressed up while closing joint box so that it is
protected against impact, corrosion and bend.
The loop diameter of loose tube is more than 50mm.

 Arrangement of optical fiber

The spliced portion of optical fiber should be put in regular order in the
fusion splice protector, and the extra length of optical fiber should be put
on the splice tray.

The loop diameter of optical fiber is more than 50mm.

7. Measurement of splice loss: Splice loss shall be measured by using


OTDR.

A. Test (Before splicing)

- After successfully completion of the installation, check for optical


attenuation and discontinuity at every splicing points (Joint Box
Locations).

OPGW

OTDR

- The attenuation of the fibres shall be distributed uniformly throughout


its length such that there are no point discontinuities in excess of
0.1dB. The overall optical fibres attenuation should be less than
0.21dB/km at 1550nm and 0.35dB/km at 1310nm.

B. Splicing Test (After splicing)

- Before closing the splice enclosure, splice loss shall be measured for
checking the splicing condition.

OPGW
Direction A Direction B
Joint Box

OTDR Fig 3 OTDR


84

- Before closing the in-line splice enclosure, the splice test shall be
executed at both sides (direction A & direction B) of jointing point.

- The average of bi-directional attenuation of fusion splices shall not be


more than 0.05 dB and no single splice loss shall exceed 0.1 dB at
1550 nm.

- Appearance of splice enclosure shall have no defect,


- Splice enclosure shall have good sealing condition to prevent moisture
and dust free environment, and render it waterproof.

*No point discontinuities in excess of 0.1dB

 Every effort shall be taken to minimize the splice loss during splicing so
that every splice loss in the link shall lies within o.o5 dB. Maximum
splice loss at any splice joint may be permitted up to 0.1 dB.

However, such events shall be avoided to minimize the splice loss and
total loss in the link.

C. Measurement of splicing loss.

Measure the of splice loss by OTDR

Direction A OPGW Direction B

Control Room
Control Room

Approach cable OTDR


OTDR
(1) (2) (3)
 Cut-back Method

Transmission Loss (dB) = P2– P1

P1: Power measured when light source is connected to power meter with the
OPGW fibre in between.

P2: Power measured when light source and power meter are connected to
one another with reference fibre in between.
85

Direction A OPG Direction B

Control Room
Control Room
Light source Power meter
(Power (Light
Approach cable
(P1) P1

Light source Power meter


(Power meter) (Light source)

7. Fixing the joint box lid


 Fix the cover to the joint box after having confirmed that nothing is left in
the joint box such as tools and dusts.
 Lock the lid with the torque force of 10 NM.

Lip

Fig. 6
86

8. Installation of a joint box.

SPLICING TOWER

The position of the joint


box should be near the top
cross-arm of the tower as
The balanced shown in the figure.
length of
OPGW
should be
coiled around
a circle
having a
diameter of
more than 1.5
meters after
completion of
jointing and

Check Point
 Check the status of water proof.
 Fusion splice working is protection it against dirt, grit and moisture.
 Lift the joint box using the eye bolt of lid.
 Fixing condition of joint box on the tower.
 Coiling condition of sur-plus(balanced) length of OPGW
87

Test Equipments (as required if specified in BoQ):-


Mandatory test equipment requirements has been specified in the BoQ. The
parameters /features of the mandatory equipments are enumerated in Table below:
Table……

A Test Equipment Fiber Optic Cabling

OTDR (Optical Time Domain Equivalent to Anritsu MW9076B1


Reflectometer) for 1310/1550 mm or better.
1
with source equipment to Anritsu
MW9076B1 or better
Optical attenuators(variable Equivalent to JDSU OLA55 or
2 1310/1550mm) equipment to JDSU better.
OLA or better
Equivalent to JDSU OLP55 or
3 Optical Power meter (1310/1550mm) better

Equivalent to JDSU OTS55 or


4 Optical Talk Set better.

Optical fibre Fusion Splicer incl. Fiber Equivalent to Sumitomo T-39-SE


5 cleaver equipment to Sumitomo or better.
Electric type-39SE or better
6 Calibrated fiber
FI-0053-FC-INST or equivalent
7 Connectorization kit
FI-0053-FF or equivalent
8 Splice kit
Optical test accessory kit including all FI-0053-TS-ST or equivalent
necessary connectors, adaptors,
9
cables terminations and other items
required for testing

In case the offered make/model of test equipment has multiple options for the
parameters, the
option of higher range shall be acceptable. The supplied test equipment shall be
suitable for
use in the high EMI/EMC environment. The Contractor shall submit performance
88

certificate
for offered test equipment from at least one customer. The Contractor shall offer
only reputed
make test equipment such as Acterna (JDSU)/Anritsu/Sumitomo/Agilent/EXFO etc.
89
DRS Form 1(a)

DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS for


OVERHEAD FIBRE OPTIC CABLE

OPTICAL GROUND WIRE (OPGW) – 24/48 Fibre:

Manufacturer:

Part #:

Configuration:

CABLE CONSTRUCTION

Seq Parameter: As per Technical As per Bidder


Specification Offering
No. of Fibres
1. Dual Window Single-
Mode: 24/48
2. Buffer Type: Loose Tube
3. Buffer Tube material As applicable
4. No. of Buffer Tubes: As applicable
5. No. of Fibers per buffer
As applicable
Tube:
6. Expected Cable Life: 25 Year
7. Parameters of OPGW
(i) UTS In Kgf
(ii) Effective area In mm2
(iii) Weight In kg/m
(iv) Diameter In mm
(v) Modulus of elasticity In kg/ mm2

(vi) Coeff. Of linear expansion


In /̊C
(vii) Central tube design Al or Steel
90
DRS Form 2
DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS for OPTICAL FIBRE
DUAL-WINDOW SINGLE MODE (DW-SM)

OPTICAL PARAMETERS
As per Technical As per Bidder
Seq Parameter: Specification offering
1. Fiber
manufacturer(s)/Type:
≤ 0.35 dB/km
2. Attenuation Coefficient@ 131 ≤ 0.21 dB/km
@ 1550 nm:
≤ 0.05 dB
3. Point discontinuity @ ≤ 0.05 dB
1310nm:
@
1550nm:

4. Nominal Mode Field 8.6 to 9.5 µm (±


Diameter 0.6 µm )
@ 1310 nm:

5. Chromatic Dispersion
Coefficient 3.5 ps/(nmxkm)
@ 1310 (1288-1339) nm: 5.3 ps/(nmxkm)
@ 1310 (1271-1360) nm: 18 ps/(nmxkm)
@ 1550 nm:
1300 to 1324 nm
6. Zero dispersion
wavelength:
Cutoff wavelength: ≤ 1260 nm
7.
Physical and Mechanical Properties
8. Bend Performance:
(37.5 mm radius, 100 ≤ 0.05 dB
turns) @1310 nm
(30 mm radius, 100 turn)
@1550 nm ≤ 0.05 dB
(16mm radius, 1 turn) @
1550nm ≤ 0.50 dB

9. 125.0 µm ± 1 µm
Cladding Diameter
(nominal ± deviation)
10. Polarisation mode ≤ 0.2 ps/km1/2
dispersion coefficient
11. Proof test level ≥ 0.69 Gpa
91

DRS Form 1

DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS


for OVERHEAD FIBRE OPTIC
CABLE

OPTICAL GROUND WIRE (OPGW):

Manufacturer:
Part #:

CABLE CONSTRUCTION
Seq Parameter: Unit: Particulars:
1 Fibre Manufacturer
Dual Window Single-Mode:
2 No. of Fibres
Dual Window Single-Mode: each
3 Buffer Type:
4 Buffer Tube Diameter: mm
5 Buffer Tube material
6 No. of Buffer Tubes: each
7 No. of Fibers per Tube: each
8 Identification/numbering of individual
tubes:
9 No. of empty tubes (If any): each
10 Filling material:
11 Filling material compliant with
technical specifications? Yes/No
12. Strength member(s):
13. Binding yarn/ tape:
Describe Central Core Design:
14
92

DRS Form 1 (Continued)

DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS


for OVERHEAD FIBRE OPTIC
CABLE

OPTICAL GROUND WIRE (OPGW):

Seq Parameter: Unit: Particulars:


14. Aluminum Clad steel wire
Diameter: mm
Number: each
15. Aluminum alloy wires
Diameter: mm
Number: each
16. Aluminum tube inner diameter: mm
17. Aluminum tube outside diameter: mm
18. Cable Diameter:
(nominal ± deviation) mm
19. Cable cross-section area (Nominal): mm2
20. Cable cross-section area (Effective): mm2
21. Fully Compliant with IEEE 1138: Yes/No
22. Whether CACT approved or not
Yes/No

Mechanical Properties of Cable


22. Max. breaking load/ Ultimate Tensile kN
Strength (UTS)/Rated Tensile
Strength:
23. Fibre strain margin: %
24. Zero fibre strain up to load kN
25. Weight: kg/km
26. Crush strength: kg/mm
27. Equivalent Modulus of elasticity: KN/mm2
- Continued -
93

DRS Form 1 (Continued)

DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS


for OVERHEAD FIBRE OPTIC
CABLE

OPTICAL GROUND WIRE (OPGW):

Seq Parameter: Unit: Particulars:


28. Minimum Bending Radius without mm
microbending:
29. Maximum Bending Radius: mm
Short Term:
Long Term (Continuous):
30. Tensile proof test (Screening) level: KN/mm2
31. Maximum permissible tensile stress: KN/mm2
32. Permissible CTS. tensile stress: KN/mm2
33. Maximum sag at maximum mm
temperature and design span with no
wind:
34. Everyday tension at 32ºC, no wind: % of
UTS
35. Maximum tension at Every day
condition with full wind pressure Kg

Thermal Properties of Cable


36. Coefficient of linear expansion: per °C
37. Coefficient of expansion
Cladding: per °C
Core: per °C
38. Nominal operating temperature range: °C
39. SC current transient peak temperature: °C
40. Maximum allowable temperature for °C
lightning strike:
- Continued –
94

DRS Form 1 (Continued)

DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS


for OVERHEAD FIBRE OPTIC
CABLE

OPTICAL GROUND WIRE (OPGW):

CABLE SPOOL and DRUM

Seq Parameter: Unit: Particulars:

41. Available length per spool m


Maximum:
Nominal:

42. Size of drum: m

43. Weight of empty drum: kg

44. Weight of drum with cable: kg


spooled

45. Will drum length scheduling be Yes/No


practiced to match transmission
line span lengths?

46. Describe Drum materials:

47. Describe cable end capping and protection against abrasion etc.:
95

DRS Form 1 (continued)

DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS


for OVERHEAD FIBRE OPTIC
CABLE

OPTICAL GROUND WIRE (OPGW):

INSTALLATION
Seq Parameter: Unit: Particulars:
48. Splice Loss:
Maximum: dB
Average: dB
49. Operating Temperature Range: °C
50. Rated Isoceraunic No.
51. Expected Cable Life: Years
52. Installation rate per team: km/day
53. No. of persons per team: no.
54. Max. possible span for specified M
operating conditions:
55. Midspan sag at 0°C with no Mm
wind loading:
56. Midspan sag at max temp. with Mm
no wind loading:
57. Midspan sag at max temp. and Mm
wind loading
58. Cable swing angles:
Worst Case:
Everyday:
59 Describe Installation method(s):

Sag tension chart parameters like sag and tension at various spans and applicable wind and ice load conditions shall
be submitted along with the DRS. The cable parameters like coefficient of liner expansion, modulus of elasticity
shall also be indicated.
96

DRS Form 2
DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS for OPTICAL FIBRE
DUAL-WINDOW SINGLE MODE (DW-SM)

OPTICAL PARAMETERS
Seq Parameter: Unit: Particulars:
1. Fiber manufacturer(s)/Type:
2. Fiber production method:
3. Attenuation Coefficient@ 1310 nm: dB/km
@ 1550 nm: dB/km
4. Attenuation Variation with
Wavelength (±25 nm): dB/km
5. Attenuation at water peak: dB/km
6. Point discontinuity @ 1310nm: dB
@ 1550nm: dB
7. Temperature dependence (induced dB
attenuation):
8. Nominal Mode Field Diameter
@ 1310 nm: μm
@ 1550 nm:
9. Mode Field Diameter Deviation
@ 1310 nm: μm
@ 1550 nm:
10. Mode field non-circularity: %
11. Chromatic Dispersion Coefficient
@ 1310 (1288-1339) nm: Ps/nm.km
@ 1310 (1271-1360) nm:
@ 1550 nm:
12. Zero dispersion wavelength: nm
13. Zero dispersion Slope: ps/nm2.km
14. Cutoff wavelength: nm
15. Refractive Index:
16. Refractive Index profile:
17. Cladding Design:
18. Numerical aperture:
97

DRS Form 2 (Continued)


DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS for OPTICAL FIBRE

DUAL-WINDOW SINGLE MODE (DW-SM)


PHYSICAL and MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
Seq Parameter: Unit: Particulars:
19. Bend Performance:
(37.5 mm radius, 100 turns) @1310 dB
nm
(30 mm radius, 100 turn) @1550 nm dB
(16mm radius, 1 turn) @ 1550nm

20. Core Diameter (nominal± deviation): μm


21. Core non-circularity: %
22. Cladding Diameter μm
(nominal ± deviation):
23. Core- Clad concentricity Error: μm
24. Cladding noncircularity: %
25. Fibre cut-off wavelength μm
26. Protective Coating type & material
DROP & INSERT:
Secondary:
27. Protective Coating Diameter μm
(nominal ± deviation):
28. Protective Coating removal method:
29. Coating Concentricity μm
30. Polarisation mode dispersion ps/km^1/
2
coefficient
31. Proof test level kpsi
32. Colour coding scheme compliant Yes/No
with EIA/TIA 598 or IEC 60304 or
Bellore GR-20.
33. Colouring material compliant with Yes/No
technical specs?
98

34 Whether CACT approved or not Yes/No

DRS Form 3-A


DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS for
HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
Suspension Clamp Assembly:
Manufacturer:
Part #:

ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT PARTICULARS


1
Minimum vertical Strength kN
Maximum Slip Strength kN
Minimum Slip Strength kN
Length (nominal) mm
Weight (nominal) kg
Total Drop (maximum) including shackles mm
Tightening torque (nominal) Nm
Details of Armour Rod Set
a) No. of rods per clamp
b) Direction of Lay
c) Overall length mm
d) Diameter of each Rod mm
e) Tolerances
(i) Diameter of each rod
(ii) Length of each rod ±%
±%
f) Material of manufacture
g) UTS of each Rod kN
h) Weight kg

Details of Protection Splice Set


(Reinforcing Rods)
i) No. of rods per clamp
j) Direction of Lay
99

k) Overall length mm

l) Diameter of each Rod mm


m) Tolerances
(i) Diameter of each rod
(ii) Length of each ±%
±%
n) Material of manufacture
o) UTS of each Rod kN
p) Weight kg
100

DRS Form 3-B

DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS for


HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

Dead End Clamp Assembly:


Manufacturer:
Part #:

ITEM UNIT PARTICULARS


DESCRIPTION

1. Minimum Slip Load kN


2. Length (nominal)
a) Reinforcing Rods mm
b) Dead end mm
3. Weight (nominal)
a) Reinforcing Rods kg
b) Dead end kg
4. Breaking strength (minimum) kN
5. Wire Size
a) Reinforcing Rods mm
b) Dead end mm
101

DRS Form 3-C


DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS for
HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

Vibration Damper:
Manufacturer:
Part #:

DESCRIPTION UNIT PARTICULARS


ITEM

1. Total Weight Kg
Weight of each Damper Kg
Material of Damper Weight
Clamp Material
Clamp bolt tightening torque Nm
Clamp bolt material
Messenger Cable Material
No. of Strands in Messenger Cable
Breaking Strength of Messenger Cable kN
Resonance Frequencies
a) First Frequency Hz
b) Second Frequency Hz
c) Third Frequency Hz

d) Forth Frequency Hz
Minimum Slip Strength of Damper Clamp
a) Before Fatigue Test kN
b) After fatigue Test kN
103

DRS Form 3-D

DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS for


OPGW HARDWARES and ACCESSORIES

Down Lead Clamp /Fastening Clamp

Manufacturer:
Part #:

ITE DESCRIPTION Unit: Particulars:


M
1. Material:
2. Suitable for OPGW (range): mm
3. Tightening torques Nm
4. Vertical load kN
5. Filler details:
(a) Material
(b) diameter: mm
6. Tower attachment arrangement
104
DRS Form 4-A
DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS for
Splice Enclosures(Joint Box) for Overhead FO cable

Manufacturer:
Model #

Seq Parameter: Unit: Particulars:


1. Dimensions H * W * D: cm
2. Weight: Kg
3. Colour and Finish:
4. Cable Glanding & Fixing:
5. Construction materials & Gauge:
6. Locking arrangements:

7. Installation Clearances: Front Access:


Rear Access: cm
Top * Bottom * Sides:
8. IP Protection Class

9. Total number of optical couplings: ea


10. Provision of pass through splicing: Yes/No
11. Whether filled with suitable encapsulant Yes/No
12. Method(s) for mounting with the tower:
Optical Fibre Cable Accommodations
13. Cable Glanding:
14. Maximum number of cables that can be
accommodated: each
15. Diameter(s) of cables that can be
accommodated:

16. Describe Cable entries :


104

DRS Form 4-A (Continued)

DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS for


Splice Enclosures(Joint Box) for Overhead FO cable

Seq Parameter: Unit: Particulars:


Cable Termination Splice Accomodations:

17. Details of Splice Trays:


Dimension:
Material/Gauge:

Weight:
kg
Colour & Finish:

Method of mounting:

18. Maximum number of splice trays: ea


19. Number of splices per tray: ea
20. Provision of Splice organisors:

21. Do splice trays require a separate Yes/No


enclosure? If so:
Manufacturer:
Dimensions H * W * D: cm
Weight: Kg
Colour and Finish:
Method(s) of Mounting:
Construction materials & Gauge:
Locking arrangements:
Installation Clearances Front Access: m
Rear Access:
Top * Bottom * Sides:

22. Excess length of fibre service loops


105

DRS Form 5
DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS for
Fibre Optic Distribution Panels (FODPs)
Manufacturer:
Model #

Seq Parameter: Unit: Particulars:


1. Dimensions H * W * D: cm
2. Weight: Kg
3. Colour and Finish:
4. Cable Glanding & Fixing:
5. Construction materials & Gauge:
6. Locking arrangements:
7. Installation Clearances: Front Access:
Rear Access: cm
Top * Bottom * Sides:

8. IP Protection Class
9. Total number of optical couplings: ea
10. Provision of pass through splicing: Yes/No
11. Whether filled with suitable encapsulant Yes/No
12. Method(s) for mounting
Optical Fibre Cable Accommodations
13. Cable Glanding:
14. Maximum number of cables that can be
accommodated: each
15. Diameter(s) of cables that can be
accommodated:
16.
Describe Cable entries:
106

DRS Form 5 (continued)


DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS for
Fibre Optic Distribution Panels (FODPs)

Manufacturer:
Model #

Seq Parameter: Unit: Particulars:


Cable Termination Splice Accomodations:

16. Details of Splice Trays:


Dimension:
Material/Gauge:

Weight: kg
Colour & Finish:
Method of mounting:

17. Maximum number of splice trays: each


18. Number of splices per tray: each
19. Provision of Splice organisors:
20. Do splice trays require a separate Yes/No
enclosure? If so:
Manufacturer:
Dimensions H * W * D: cm
Weight: Kg
Colour and Finish:
Method(s) of Mounting:
Construction materials & Gauge:
Locking arrangements:
Installation Clearances Front Access: m
Rear Access:
Top * Bottom * Sides:

21. Excess length of fibre service loops


107

DRS Form 6
DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS for
APPROACH CABLE

Manufacturer:
Part #:

CABLE CONSTRUCTION
Seq Parameter: Unit: Particulars:
1. Fibre Manufacturer
Dual Window Single-Mode:
2. No. of Fibres
Dual Window Single-Mode: each
3. Buffer Type:
4. Buffer Tube Diameter: mm
5. Buffer Tube material
6. No. of Buffer Tubes: each
7. No. of Fibers per Tube: each
8. Identification/numbering of individual
tubes:
9. No. of empty tubes (If any): each
10. Filling material:
11. Filling material compliant with
technical specifications? Yes/No
12. Strength member(s):
13. Binding yarn/ tape:
14. Describe Central Core Design:
108

DRS Form 6 (Continued)


DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS for
APPROACH CABLE
Manufacturer:
Part #:

Seq Parameter: Unit: Particulars:

15. Outside Jacket coating (if any)


16. Jacket thickness mm

17. Jacket non-circularity %


18. Cable Diameter:(nominal deviation) mm
19. Cable cross-section area: mm2
20. Rip-cord provided? Yes/No
21. Fully Compliant with IEC 60974-3: Yes/No

Mechanical Properties of Cable


22. Max. breaking load/ Ultimate Tensile kN
Strength (UTS):
23. Fibre strain margin: %
24. Zero fibre strain up to load kN
25. Weight: kg/km
26. Crush strength: kg/mm
27. Equivalent Modulus of elasticity: KN/mm2
28. Minimum Bending Radius without mm
microbending:
29. Maximum Bending Radius: mm
Short Term:
Long Term (Continuous):
30. Tensile proof test (Screening) level: KN/mm2
31. Maximum permissible tensile stress: KN/mm2
32. Permissible CTS. tensile stress: KN/mm2

- Continued -
109

DRS Form 6 (Continued)

DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS for


APPROACH CABLE

Seq Parameter: Unit: Particulars:


33. Every day tensile stress N
34. Torsion twist/m
Thermal Properties of Cable
35. Coefficient of linear expansion: per °C
36. Coefficient of expansion
Cladding: per °C
Core: per °C
37. Nominal operating temperature range: °C

CABLE SPOOL and DRUM

Seq Parameter: Unit: Particulars:

38. Available length per spool m


Maximum:
Nominal:

39. Size of drum: m

40. Weight of empty drum: kg

41. Weight of drum with cable: spooled kg

42. Will drum length scheduling be Yes/No


practiced to match transmission line
span lengths?

43. Describe Drum materials:

44. Describe cable end capping and protection against abrasion etc.:
110

DRS Form 6 (continued)

DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS for


APPROACH CABLE

INSTALLATION
Seq Parameter: Unit: Particulars:
45. Splice Loss:
Maximum: dB
Average: dB
46. Operating Temperature Range: °C
47. Expected Cable Life: Years

48. Describe Installation method(s) and the cable duct parameters for installation of approach
cable:
111

DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS for


Test Equipment and Other Items/Materials being supplied under the Package and
not covered in DRS Forms

The following items shall be described as a minimum:


1. Name of item:
2. Make & Model Number:
3. All Major Parameters:
4. Different options available and the specific option proposed to be supplied:
5. Operation Temperature range:
However, the technical brochure from the Manufacturer must be submitted along with the above
DRSs in support of the various parameters. The DRS shall also include the list of suppliers for all
bought out items.

--------------------------------------------------End of the Appendix-----------------------------------

You might also like